HORAE SYNOPTICAE
HAWKINS
HENRY FROWDE, M.A.
PUBLISHER TO THE UNIVERSITY OF OXFORD
LONDON, EDINBURGH, NEW YORK
TORONTO AND MELBOURNE
HORAE SYNOPTICAE
CONTRIBUTIONS TO THE STUDY OF
THE SYNOPTIC PROBLEM
BY THE
REV. SIR JOHN C. HAWKINS, BART., M.A., D.D.
HONORARY CANON OF ST. ALBAN3
SECOND EDITION, REVISED AND SUPPLEMENTED
OXFORD
AT THE CLARENDON PRESS
1909
OXFORD
PRINTED AT THE CLARENDON PRESS
BY HORACE HART, M.A.
PRINTER TO THE UNIVERSITY
PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION
THE origin, mode of composition, and mutual relations of
the three Synoptic Gospels form so obscure and so complex
a subject of inquiry that it has come to be generally known
as the * Synoptic Problem '. Among the many modern
attempts to deal with it, this volume has a limited and
merely preparatory purpose, which I have tried to indicate
upon its title-page. It is called by the plural name ' Horae
Synopticae ', because, while it is the outcome of a good
many hours spent in examination of the Synoptic Gospels
and in tabulation of the results thus obtained, those
results are presented separately and almost indepen-
dently in the successive sections of the book, no attempt
being made to combine them as foundations or supports of
any system or theory. And the sub-title is ' Contributions
to the study' rather than to the solution ( of the
Synoptic Problem ', because I have only been trying to help
in that preliminary process of collecting and sifting
materials which must be carried much further than it has
yet been before we can be ready for the solution of the
Problem or, as I would rather express it, of such parts
of it as are not now insoluble. For while it seems to me,
on the one hand, that there are some aspects of it as to
which we are not likely to advance beyond statements of
conflicting probabilities, unless there are some fresh dis-
coveries of documents in Egypt or elsewhere, on the other
hand I believe that not a few conclusions and those of
the most important kinds are likely to be made so clear
240097
vi Preface to the First Edition
and so practically certain by the patient and careful investi-
gations of the language of the Gospels which are now
being carried on, that before very long they will meet with
general acceptance. 1
My object, then, has been to collect and to exhibit facts
with as small an admixture of theory as possible. In
Part I there is, I think, scarcely anything that can be called
theory. In Parts II and III, however, it was found that
the occasional use of a ' working hypothesis ' could not be
dispensed with (as on p. in 2 ); and I have several times
(as on pp. 81, 128, 153, 162, 185, 212, and in the Conclud-
ing Summary) briefly stated or implied some inferences,
without which the reason for introducing the facts and
figures could hardly have been made clear. But I have
suppressed, or at least reserved for another opportunity,
some more detailed hypotheses and conjectures which had
occurred to me, or had been recalled to me, in the course of
the preparation of these pages. For some of them I think
I could have claimed a fair amount of probability, and they
might have made the book more interesting ; but they
would certainly have obscured its designed character of
being mainly a collection of materials.
It may be said, perhaps, that these materials are not of
a very solid and trustworthy nature, or at least that they
are of such a kind that their value is likely to be over-
rated, especially by the compiler of them. For they are to
a large extent statistical : and statistics are proverbially
misleading, and proverbially liable to be made to ' prove
anything' that is wished. No doubt there is this danger,
1 Professor Sanday speaks hopefully of the prospects of solution, both
in his important supplement to the article ( Gospels ' in Smith's Diet, of
the Bible, ed. 2, p. 1228, and in Inspiration, p. 282.
2 [These references are now made to the pages of the second edition.]
Preface to the First Edition vii
however cautious and free from prejudice the compiler may
try to be : and he should remember that he is particularly
exposed to it when the field from which the statistics are
collected is so small as it is in the present case. I can only
say, first, that I have done my best to guard against this
danger in various ways, and especially by bracketing words
on which stress should not be laid, although their insertion
in the lists was necessary (cf. pp. 2, 178). Secondly, I
would say that however misleading statistics may be, con-
jectures unsupported by statistics are likely to be still more
so, unless they are supported by evidence of other kinds,
such as contemporary, or nearly contemporary, historical
testimonies : and as to the Synoptic Gospels such evidence
is very slight, being almost limited to St. Luke's Preface
(i. I-4) 1 and to the well-known passage of Papias about
Mark as the interpreter of Peter, and Matthew as the com-
poser of the Logia. 2 Thirdly, some confidence in the
statistical method, as here used, may be inspired by the
general accordance of its results with such intimations as
we gather from the words of St. Luke and of Papias, and
(I venture to add, though the matter is too wide and too
vague for proof, or even for discussion, here) with the
general probabilities of the case, as they are suggested to
us through such other means as we have at our command. 3
If I seem to have devoted a disproportionately large
amount of space to some apparently minor matters, such
as the use of the Historic Present 4 and of Conjunctions 5
1 Of course these verses liave been abundantly and minutely discussed by
many commentators and others, as their unique importance and interest
demand. A fresh and interesting examination of them will be found in Blass,
Philology of the Gospels, pp. 7-20 [also, since then, in Expos. Times, xviii. 395].
2 The passage is given below, p. xiii.
3 See e.g. the remark on the use of the Gospels in sub-apostolic times,
p. 218, paragraph D. 4 pp. 143 ff. 6 pp. 137, 150 ff.
viii Preface to the First Edition
in St. Mark, and the comparatively slight differences
between the language of St. Luke's Gospel and of Acts, 1 it
is because I wished to dwell especially on those points
which, so far as I knew, had either been insufficiently
worked out, or at least had not been put before English
students in a distinct and easily available form. On the
other hand, some important departments of the Synoptic
Problem such as the number and nature of the sources
used by St. Luke only have been passed over, merely
because I could not see that any light would be thrown
upon them by such statistics and observations as I had
been able to put together. For of course the volume is far
too small to make any pretensions to completeness, or to
due proportion of contents, even as a collection of materials
for students.
Most of the following materials were originally drawn
up for my own use. But Professor Sanday, having seen
some of my papers, advised and encouraged the publication
of them, as being likely to be useful to others who are
working at the same subject. He has also very kindly read
the proof-sheets of the book, and has made many helpful
and valuable suggestions, for which I am extremely grateful.
My study of the language of the Gospels has generally
been independent ; but of course I have sometimes cor-
rected or supplemented my own results by those of other
writers. In so doing, I think my chief obligations have
been to Dr. E. A. Abbott's well-known article ' Gospels ' in
Enc. Brit., vol. x, and to Dr. Plummer's Commentary on
St. Luke, which enabled me to add about fifteen entries
to the list of 'words and phrases characteristic of that
Gospel.
Preface to the First Edition ix
In such lists as that to which I have just referred, there
are probably many deficiencies and imperfections ; but
perhaps other workers may be able to make use of them as
foundations of more complete lists, or, if they are unwilling
to do so themselves, may help me to do so by sending me
notices of errors and omissions.
J. C. H.
KELSTON LODGE, OXFORD,
October, 1898.
PREFACE TO THE SECOND
EDITION
VERY few prefatory words are required. For, although
many more hours have been spent over the Synoptic
Gospels with a view to this edition, it has not been with
the intention of working in any fresh directions, but only
with the hope of supplying some of the ' deficiencies ' and
removing some of the * imperfections ' which, in the last
words of the preceding preface, were spoken of as likely to
be found in a work of this kind.
Numerous small supplements have been made to many
of the lists, and especially to those concerned with the
characteristics of the three Synoptists, in order to render
them as nearly complete as possible.
I could not find more than a very few modifications or
withdrawals that I ought to make, the only two of any
importance being those referred to on pages 174 f. and 214.
The Section (Pt. II, Sect. V) on the chief non-Marcan
source used in the First and Third Gospels has been very
x Preface to the Second Edition
largely rewritten, not because of much change of opinion on
my own part, but in order to avoid the appearance of a claim
to more certainty than has yet been reached on this subject.
I have only found occasions for a few references to the
illustrations of the KOI^TJ Greek of the New Testament and
LXX which are being drawn from he Papyri. No doubt
many more will be suggested by such a work as the Lexicon
which is promised by Drs. J. H. Moulton and G. Milligan,
and some of the materials for which they are gradually
publishing in the Expositor.
J. C. H.
KELSTON LODGE, OXFORD,
September, 1909.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
PRELIMINARY NOTICES AND EXPLANATIONS .... xiii
PART I
WORDS AND PHRASES CHARACTERISTIC OF EACH
OF THE SYNOPTIC GOSPELS
SECTION I. St. Matthew's Gospel 3
II. St. Mark's Gospel . 10
III. St. Luke's Gospel 15
IV. General remarks on the Characteristic Words and
Phrases 26
APPENDIX I TO PART I : Two Subsidiary Lists of Lucan
Characteristics 27
APPENDIX II TO PART I : References to those Words and
Phrases which do not stand consecutively in
a Concordance 30
ADDITIONAL NOTES TO PART I 51
PART II
INDICATIONS OF SOURCES
SECTION I. Identities in language 54
II. Words differently applied 67
III. Transpositions of the Order of Words and
Sentences 77
IV. Doublets 80
APPENDIX TO SECTION IV: 'He that hath ears, &c.' 106
V. The Source largely used by Matthew and Luke,
apart from Mark 107
PART III
FURTHER STATISTICS AND OBSERVATIONS BEARING
ON THE ORIGIN AND COMPOSITION OF EACH GOSPEL
A. ST. MARK'S GOSPEL 114-153
SECTION I. Passages which may have been omitted or altered
as being liable to be misunderstood, or to give
offence, or to suggest difficulties . . . 117
xii Table of Contents
PAGE
SECTION II. Enlargements of the narrative, which add nothing
to the information conveyed by it, because they
are expressed again, or are directly involved, in
the Context 125
III. Minor Additions to the narrative . . . .127
IV. Rude, harsh, obscure, or unusual words or expres-
sions, which may therefore have been omitted
or replaced by others . , . . . . 131
V. Duplicate expressions in Mark, of which one or
both of the other Synoptists use one part, or its
equivalent . ... . . . . 139
VI. The Historic Present in Mark . . . .143
,, VII. The Conjunction Km preferred to Ae in Mark . 150
B. ST. MATTHEW'S GOSPEL . . ^ ,/ ; . . . 154-173
SECTION I. The Quotations from the Old Testament . . 154
II. The Shortening of Narratives in Matthew . . 158
III. Signs of Compilation in Matthew . : . . 161
,) IV. Traces of Numerical Arrangements in Matthew . 163
,, V. The transference and repetition of Formulas,
especially in Matthew . . . * .168
C. ST. LUKE'S GOSPEL . . . . . . ^ ' . 174-197
DIVISION I. On the Linguistic Relations between
St. Luke's Gospel and Acts . 174-193
SECTION I. The linguistic similarity between Luke and Acts . 174
II. Differences between the language of Luke and
Acts .177
III. Special consideration of the ' We '-Sections of
Acts in relation to Luke 182
IV. Subsidiary notice of the similarity between the
language of Luke and of the Pauline Epistles . 189
Note on the relation between Luke, Acts, Paul, and Hebrews 192
DIVISION II. On the Smaller Additions in St. Luke's
Gospel 194-197
APPENDIX A TO PART III. The Synoptists and the Septuagint 198
B ,, The alterations and small additions
in which Matthew and Luke agree
against Mark . . . . 208
ADDITIONAL NOTES TO PART III . . .-. ... . 212
CONCLUDING SUMMARY . .216
INDEX . . 221
PRELIMINARY NOTICES AND
EXPLANATIONS
AN 'Introduction' of the usual kind is needless here,
since the Table of Contents sufficiently indicates the nature
of the separate ' Contributions to the study of the Synoptic
Problem ' which the following pages contain. But the
attention of those who use the book is called to these
notices and explanations :
1.
The passage of Papias, which contains considerably the
earliest external mention of any of the writers whose names
are connected with our Gospels, is so often alluded to that
it will be well to print it here for convenience of reference.
Both text and translation are taken from Bishop Lightfoot's
Apostolic Fathers (i vol. 1891), pp. 517, 529.
Kal rouro 6 Trpeo-^repos And the Elder said this
also : Mark having become
apKOs uez> ep/^ewrj?
the interpreter of Peter,
yei/o/xez/oy, ova fyurcjjxo- wrote down accurately
, ~ v , , everything that he remem-
GLKpLpas eypayfV) ov
bered, 1 without however re-
rdgti, ra VTTO TOV Xptoroi; cording in order what was
r) \cxptvra ri -npa^vra. o^re either said or done b Y Christ.
For neither did he hear the
yap riKOV<r TOV Kvpiov, ovre T , j.ji rn TT-
Lord, nor did he follow Him ;
irapr]Ko\ov0r](Tv airy, vcrrepov but afterwards^ as I said,
1 Dr. E. A. Abbott, in Enc. Bibl., ii. 181 1, proposes and defends ' mentioned ',
or ' taught from memory ', as a preferable translation of fpvijuovevffev here, and
also of dir(fj.vr]fji6vevafv a few lines further on.
xiv Preliminary Notices and Explanations
5e, is e</>i7i>,
, 6s 717)6? ra?
,
woio/Aevos
,*v * , ,
oxrre ovoer rj/xapre Map/coy,
ovrus (via ypttyas a>s Awe/unj-
fjLovV(Tv. hoy yap e7rot?i(7aro
y
TTpOVOiaV, TOV IM]V &V 7]KOV(T
wapoXiireii; $ ^o-acr^af rt ev
avrots . . . Mar0atos plv ovv
rA Xo>
(attended) Peter, who adapted
Ws instructions to the needs
(of his hearers), but had no
design of giving a connected
account of the Lord's oracles. 1
So then Mark made no mis-
take, while he thus wrote
down some things as he
remembered them ; for he
made it his one care not to
omit anything that he heard,
or to set down any f a j se
statement therein ... So
then Matthew composed the
oracles in the Hebrew Ian-
o)s ?Jz; Swaroy eKaoroj. preted them as he could.
The passage is preserved for us by Eusebius (Hist. Eccl.,
iii. 39), and his context makes it probable that the Presbyter
John was the * Elder ' on whose authority Papias gives his
notice of Mark, and presumably of Matthew also. The
approximate date of the work of Papias may be given as
A.D. 130.
2.
Nearly all the following tables were drawn up before the
publication of Moulton and Geden's Concordance. But they
have been revised and checked with the help of it, and it is
adopted as the standard as to orthography, order of words,
&c. Where no other Concordance is named, it is assumed
that this one will be in use : but in a few instances there will
be found a reference to Bruder (ed. 1888), because in those
cases his arrangement brings out more fully or clearly or
conveniently the usage to which attention is being called.
1 Or 'sayings', if with Lightfoot we read \6ycuv, and not \oyicw.
Preliminary Notices and Explanations xv
The text used is Westcott and Hort's (WH), with
occasional reference to Tischendorfs (Tisch, or T) and to
that of the English Revisers (R). Various readings are
noticed only in the most important cases, as where WH's
margin (mg) agrees with Tisch against their text, or where
the matter in hand is directly affected by the variants.
Attention has been also called to a few specially interesting
Western readings, and some references made to the
Sinaitic-Syriac version.
4.
In the Tables on pp. 4-29 'Acts' and * Paul' are placed
in the columns next after ' Luke ', in order to draw attention
throughout to the strong affinities which exist between the
members of the Lucano-Pauline group of writings, and upon
which more is said on pp. 189 ff.
5.
When 'John' is referred to, or placed at the head of
a column, only the fourth Gospel is meant: for it is
important sometimes to bring out a similarity or contrast
between this and the other historical books. Therefore the
three Epistles of St. John, as well as the Apocalypse, had to
be placed in the column headed ' Rest of N. T.' But no
expression of opinion as to the authorship of any of those
books is thus intended. Again, it has been found convenient
to class thirteen Epistles under the heading * Paul ', but no
assumption is thus made as to the authorship and integrity
of all those Epistles. And on pp. 191 f. a distinctive mark
has been placed against words found only in the Pastoral
Epistles.
6.
An inconsistent way of using the names of the Evangelists
(or the abbreviations Mt, Mk, Lk) has been found unavoid-
able : sometimes the Gospel itself as it stands, sometimes
xvi Preliminary Notices and Explanations
the author or compiler of it, is thus denoted. But I hope
that the context will always show at a glance which is
meant.
7.
The figures in thick type after the name of a book or
writer (e. g. Matthew 6, Paul 12, Rev 3) mean that a word
or phrase is used so many times in that book or by that
writer. (In such cases ' Luke ' includes only the third
Gospel, the occurrences in Acts being enumerated separately;
and, as has been already said, 'John' includes only the
fourth Gospel.) Similarly LXX 4, LXX 22, &c., denote
that the word or phrase is used so many times in the
Septuagint.
HORAE SYNOPTICAE
PART I
WORDS AND PHRASES CHARACTERISTIC OF EACH
OF THE SYNOPTIC GOSPELS
THAT two at least of the Synoptic Gospels are compila-
tions is evident upon the face of them, because of the
different ways in which the same materials are used. And
there are other less obvious phenomena which support this
conclusion.
But before attempting to discover the number and the
nature of the sources used by the compilers, and so to
enter upon the most obscure part of the Synoptic Problem,
the ground should be cleared as far as possible by a careful
endeavour to discover how much in the Gospels is owing
to those who used the sources.
In trying thus to mark and to estimate the additions
made independently by each of the authors or compilers, it
is the most obvious and most usual course to lay stress on
the words peculiar to each Gospel, and from them to judge
of the style of the several writers. But though these are
not to be overlooked (and lists of them, drawn up for
another purpose, can be referred to on pages 1 99 ff. of this
book), their importance for our present purpose may easily
be over-estimated. For by far the larger number of them
viz. five-sevenths of those in Matthew and six-sevenths
of those in Mark and Luke are used only once ; and in
all three Gospels a smaller proportion than ten per cent.
is used more than twice (viz. in Matthew 10 words out
of 112, in Mark 4 out of 71, and in Luke 10 out of 261).
:
2/ . Words ,a,nd Phrases characteristic Pt. i
Now words that are not used more than once or twice
cannot have very much weight as proofs of the habitual
style of any writer. It is, therefore, much more important
to examine words which are used more frequently, though
it may not be exclusively, and to see which of them are
used so predominantly in each Gospel as to be apparently
characteristic of each compiler, and therefore presumably
due to him.
To bring together such 'characteristic words and
phrases ' is the object of the first and most elaborate series
of tables in this book. It will be seen that the number
of them in Luke (151) exceeds by more than one-third the
number in the slightly shorter Gospel of Matthew (95),
which is more than twice as large as the number in the
very much shorter 1 Gospel of Mark (41).
In the case of each Gospel a few words are placed in
brackets ( ) as being less important than the rest, because
they are mainly or entirely accounted for by the subject-
matter, and therefore give little or no indication of the
author's style, although their insertion in the lists was
required by the rules here adopted. 2 And there are some
other entries marked f, on which, for various reasons, but
little stress can be laid. On the other hand an asterisk *
is prefixed to the most distinctive and important instances.
In the columns headed ' Peculiar ' and ' Common ' it is
shown how often each word or phrase occurs respectively
in those portions of each Gospel which have not, and in
1 Nestle gives, on the authority of ' American scholars ', the number
of words in the Greek N. T. as being in Luke 19,209, in Matthew 18,222,
in Mark 11,158. Textual Criticism of N. T., p. 48.
3 No such rules can be quite satisfactory means of excluding all non-
characteristic, and including all characteristic words. But of course it was
necessary to adopt rules of some kind (and I think those here employed are
as fair tests of what is 'characteristic' as can be devised), in order that
the lists may be unaffected by one's own views or opinions or ' personal
equation'. I see that very similar rules were adopted in Carpenter and
Harford-Battersby's Hexateuch (1900) for the purpose of distinguishing words
and phrases characteristic of the various documentary sources (i. 183 f.).
of each of the Synoptic Gospels 3
those portions which have, parallels in one or both of the
other Synoptic Gospels : and in the cases of Matthew and
Luke, chapters i and ii have been kept separate from the
other ' peculiar ' portions, and placed in a column of their
own. For some of the results which are thus brought out,
see pages 9, 14, 24, 26.
SECTION I
WORDS AND PHRASES CHARACTERISTIC OF
ST. MATTHEW'S GOSPEL
I propose to take as ' characteristic ', words or phrases
which occur at least fair times in this Gospel, and which
either (a) are not found at all in Mark or Luke, or which
(b) are found in Matthew at least twice as often as in Mark
and Luke together.
95 such words and phrases are here collected and tabu-
lated. On the grounds explained on page 2, 15 of them
are bracketed, 9 are marked with f, and 14 with *.
Chapters i and ii, containing 48 verses, have a column
to themselves. The other passages regarded as * peculiar '
to Matthew, because without parallels in Mark or Luke,
contain about 290 verses, viz. iii. 14, 15; iv. 13^-16;
v. 7-10 ; 14 ; 16, 17 ; 19-24 ; 27, 28 ; 31 ; 33-38 ; 41 ; 43 ;
vi. 1-8 ; 16-18 ; 34 ; vii. 6 ; 12 b ; 15 ; viii. 17 ; ix. 13 a ;
27-33 ; x - 5,6; 8 ; i6; 23 ; 36 ; 41 ; xi. 28-30 ; xii.5-7;
17-21; 36, 37; 40; xiii. 14 a- 24-30; 35; 3 6 ~53 5 xiv -
28-31 ; xv. 12, 13 ; xvi. 17-19 ; xvii. 24-27 ; xviii. 10 ; 14 ;
16-20; 23-35; xix. 10-12; xx. 1-16; xxi. 4, 5; 10, n ;
14-16; 28-32; 43; xxii. 1-14 (P) 1 ; 40; xxiii. 1-3; 5;
7-10; 15-22; 24; 30; 32, 33; xxiv. u, 12; 2o; 300;
xxv. 1-12; 14-30 (?); 31-46; xxvi. 15 ; 25; 50; 52-54;
xxvii. 3-10 ; 19 ; 24, 25 ; 36 ; 43 ; 51 -53 ; 62-66 ; xxviii.
2-4; 9-20.
1 The doubt only extends to verses i-io.
E 2
I
.0
NHOf
sxoy
uoiuiuoQ
X
% U.CT
3 C C
M
*C
S '7
-
1
N " ^2 M c< M \o co***
M i>- M * TJ- ' ON ty
H 'i -sdB43
10 5 ^- VO ** 10 VO
1
rf
.*)
Hh
*>>o uT
rt 'Z <N
8 .2
^5 ^t*
til
u <
e o
a c
CO <
I
"X "N
NHOf
sxoy
8 12
0.0""
co a cr =
o c ^ >
OPJ <U l> >
WrH | g M u
* ^ v 2 ^ s *i *"
*> .SJ? vo a | r ^
m ?- _ e
G "O V S hp)
* U-o- <
& 0*0
M 00 N CO
CO M . . M M hH fO N
ON t*
^
^
-noaj aaq 1O
CO t> W N CO M ^f ^J" -t CO
: ,^^
: 10 ^ :
eo
^ V s
5 S rt
fHii?;iiU1
I- w b ^ ^5 ^rn vw ij ^ 5, g cj js
s 5. V 2 3^,^ ^ a.-
5.O 5 i. 5. 3.0-tO "O "O H
co .5
.- <*
> s
5o
J2 u
< *J
10
S *S 2 5 "" n T 1
i ^ ***
2" 6 5 g .6 .S
1 H w 0>WI<
S a o a
; ; ;
1-1 IO CO 00 VO O
i~- . . io co w M .
. .
* . H
. . . . . . . .
^ M ' M ^ ' ' '
TJ-
.
" H
M
o
' ; 11
00 : :
N j^MO^TflMM
::*>::"
M M
M M M 1C N CO ; M ;
M M IO M
2 *--*
2 o ro
M co'x-^ M ^ t^ a\ cooo -<*
CO""t->-iCOCO^MwVO
s
^ M M
O
M
?
1^ N
H
to^ xo
<M
\d
CO Tj-
^a
> tO"^--^-r^iOTj-^"u
rf '
o
ih
M M
co co
CO
CO
CO
CO
-I"
<3
o '
(*
a
c
'_2 S
-..- -a S
* * S &4 I 9 C S
Cl^etmii
c-'-Q. (^ o b b Qb 5? N
,
^1
vw b
b +-
to
1
t:
o
oo
8
Words and Phrases characteristic
continued)
^
1
^
...O T5
Sfr
M Tf
X -
M CO ^ CO-IO
NHOf
10
00
M 10
: - S3
sxoy
M N CO
SJJ-BJ JBIJ
-noaj aaq^o
Hi
MVO CO
VOVOVO 2,^0 r? t^ 2? 10 t^ 10 vo
Wi "*
CO
o
H
i
8
I
f
0>
73
SJ
I
1O
00
10
ON
i. Mt of each of the Synoptic Gospels 9
Other words and phrases, which do not fall under the
above rules, but nevertheless are to be noted as more or
less characteristic of St. Matthew's Gospel, are 8ta TOUTO,
fOvLKos, eratpoj, Kara = * against ', Ko'oyzo?, fjLa6rjTVO), ftaXaxta,
OVK or ovbeiroT* aveyvtoTt ; 0^X01, irovr]p6s (besides the cases
with the article noticed above), aetco, ^^L And see addi-
tional note on the fewness of imperfect tenses (p. 51).
Some Remarks on the above Matthaean Words and
Phrases.
Out of the 95 different words and phrases, 25 are found
once or more in chapters i, ii ; 42 of them in Mark and 56
in Luke ; 46 of them in Acts, and 1 1 in the ' We '-Sections
of that book (see pp. 176, 184).
Chapters i, ii contain 48 of the 1,068 1 verses of this
Gospel, i. e. only about one twenty-second part of the
whole. But they contain considerably more than one-
ninth of the occurrences of the c characteristic ' words and
phrases, viz. 107 out of 904. This is partly accounted for
by the use of yezwaco 40 times in the genealogy ; but even if
those 40 items are deducted from both numbers, chapters i,
ii are found to contain upwards of one-thirteenth of such
occurrences, viz. 67 out of 864. It appears, then, that these
' characteristic ' words and phrases are used considerably
more freely in these two chapters than in the rest of the
book.
1 According to the ordinary numbering 1,071 ; but the best texts and
R. V. omit xvii. 21 ; xviii. n; xxiii. 13 or 14, thus reducing the number
to i ,068.
io Word and Phrases characteristic Pt. i
C
Taking the whole of the ' peculiar ' or unparalleled
matter in this Gospel, including chapters i, ii, 1 it fills about
338 out of the i ,068 verses, i. e. less than one-third, which
would be 356 verses. It thus appears that the occurrences
of * characteristic ' words and phrases are very much more
abundant in the ' peculiar ' than in the ' common ' portions
of the Gospel ; for there are 482 of them in the ' peculiar '
division and only 422 of them in the ' common ' division,
while the latter is more than twice as large as the former.
It should be observed, however, that several of the words
which do most in producing this predominance (e. g. aTrodi-
8ft)^t, ya/xo?, yeiwaa), &&VLOV, o/xwa>, raXavrov) are words which
are required by the subject-matter, and which therefore are
not important as evidences of style.
SECTION II
WORDS AND PHRASES CHARACTERISTIC OF
ST. MARK'S GOSPEL
As this Gospel is shorter than either of the other two
by more than one- third, the standard for determining what
words and phrases are ' characteristic * of it should be
different from that which is applied to Matthew and Luke.
I will therefore take as such the words and phrases which
occur at least three times in Mark, and which either
(a) are not found at all in Matthew or Luke> or (b) occur
in Mark more often than in Matthew and Luke together.
Of these, 41 2 are here collected and tabulated : 2 of them
1 For the differences both in form and substance between the two
genealogies are so great that they cannot be regarded as dependent on
a common source, though they contain many of the same names.
3 This number would be reduced from 41 to 31 if we took (as in Matthew
and Luke) only those occurring 4 times and upwards.
ii. Mk of each of the Synoptic Gospels n
are bracketed, 5 are marked f, and 7 are marked * (see on
these marks p. 2, above).
The parts of the Gospel here regarded as ' peculiar ',
because without parallels in Matthew or Luke, amount to
about 50 verses, viz. i. i ; 33 ; ii. 27 ; iii. 9 ; 17 b ; 20, 21 ;
iv. 26-29; 36 #; vi. 20 #; 31; 37 #; 52; vii. 2-4; 24 #;
32-37 ; viii. 14 b ; 22-26 ; ix. 15 ; 21 ; 23, 24 ; 30 ; 48, 49 ;
50 b ; x. 10 ; 32 b (not c) ; xi. 16 ; xii. 32, 33 ; xiii. 34 b ;
xiv. 51, 52 ; 56 /^ ; 59 ; xv. 8 ; 21 b ; 25 ; 44, 45 ; xvi. 8 b.
12
i
*>
CO
^
.co
$
!rl3
" |.9o
ic
B
\L 'N
NHOf
invj
sxoy
P
UOUIUJ03
SJJBJ
CJ 10 CO tCOO CO ^
^ CO 10 10 XOOO "* ^
^ VO ^5 W Tj- M rt-xs
N M CO M j N ! V>
2*7- 5- o Tt- co **
AV3HXXVj/\[
PH g*G
*o o ^
>-* , " ^.r
<u P .
,.
>s * -a co co S * -5 5 w * w * ^> -i- S -*-
10 o to
1
E-3
J CD
hb -S
2 *
<u (i.
^ *|.s v
^ crt J *
t^SI
^> i ^ ^
o o a o-
* Used theologically
8 Also in the doubtfu
* Also in Appendix,
a Both in iv. 28.
O T" ' to
g
2
< ^M : : a M : : : : co^. : N
. hi
N : : N
o\
M
. 01
. . N
M
. M
: i : co N
M
SN ^. : M M : : : : : : ^ :
: : :
MM : e, *g
00
%>|C<MMJM| 'cOMCO'M
M
:,***
00
13 to ^ co co covo ^t- ^cocot^iolP^to
PH CJ
O COOO
totOMVOvo
o
CO
* :"*'.;; m ' 'COMM
. M
^tO^COCOCOvOvo Jr^COCOJ^iO^^vo
O CO ON
"^ lO COVO vo )
lO
co
*M I : cc : io : :NM^CO-
i - :
^ N M \ CO 1O
N
M
C to
c ^^ ^
-B ^^ -S
CO
3
- ^9 o ^ 1
Is
w . "~
o
H
^ ' | T3 ^O; ' ' '
^ >
t
n
f- j -i va
ItljF
1^?"
14 Words and Phrases characteristic Pt. i
There are some other words, &c., which do not quite fall
under the above rules, yet which deserve consideration as
being characteristic of Mark, viz. d\Aa, CK (compared with
ewro), eTTfpcorda), foa, 1 KCU where Matthew and Luke have 8^,
the historic present in other words besides cpyopai (e.g.
Ae'yco, <epo), arvvdytoj &c.), 7ra>pow, and Trwpoxrtj.
The omission of Tropevo/xcu, 2 except in ix. 30 WH (not
Tisch or R) is remarkable, since it occurs in Matthew 28,
Luke 50, Acts 37, John 13 ; also in Appendix to Mark 3,
and in Pericope de Adultera 3. Observe also the entire
omission of Kat Ibov, and, in narrative, of Ibov 3 ; and the
absence of the form eoro)? and of the word vopos ; also the
rarity of KaXclv (Matthew 26, Mark 4, Luke 43, but cf. also
John 2), and of ovv (Matthew 56, Mark 4 ; Luke 31, John 194). 4
Some Remarks on the above Marcan Words and Phrases.
A
Out of the 41 different words and phrases, 16 are found
in the 50 ' peculiar ' verses, while 25 of them are found in
Matthew, 2 2, in Luke, 22 in Acts, and 7 in the 'We'-
Sections of that book (see pp. 176, 184).
B
The 50 verses which have been regarded as ' peculiar '
to this Gospel constitute nearly one- thirteenth of the 66 1 5
verses contained in the whole Gospel (excluding the
Appendix, xvi. 9-20). But they contain nearly one-tenth
1 The numbers in the historical books are Mt 41, Mk 65, Lk 45, Acts
15, John 145. It must be remembered always, in estimating the significance
of such numbers, that Mk is less than two-thirds of the length of Mt or Lk.
Bearing this in mind, we may notice that tfpa.To, fipavro are found in Mt 9
times, Mk 25, Lk 19, Acts 5, Jn 1.
a The simple verb is not used ; but on the other hand we have seen
above that tla-rroptvoiMi and (Kiropevopai are more or less characteristic of Mark,
and he uses also irapa-, irpoff-, cruv-, and probably Sianoptvoftai.
3 On ISov see J. H. Moulton, Gram, of N. T. Greek, i. u.
4 See Abbott, Joh. Gram., 2191, and Joh. Foe., 1885 d.
5 According to the usual numbering 666 ; but the best texts and R. V.
omit vii. 16; ix. 44, 46 ; xi. 26 ; xv. 28, thus reducing the number to 661.
ii. Mk of each of the Synoptic Gospels 15
of the occurrences of the characteristic words and phrases,
viz. 37 out of 357. So those words and phrases are rather
more frequent in the ' peculiar ' than in the * common '
parts of the Gospel.
For further discussion of the language of this Gospel,
see below, Part III, especially pp. 143 ff. on the uses of the
historic present and KOI.
SECTION III
WORDS AND PHRASES CHARACTERISTIC OF
ST. LUKE'S GOSPEL
Here, as in the case of Matthew, I take as ' characteristic '
the words and phrases which occur at least four times in
this Gospel, and which either (a) are not found at all in
Matthew or Mark> or (b) are found in Luke at least tivice
as often as in Matthew and Mark together.
Of these 151 will be found here : 8 of them are bracketed,
ii are marked f, and 21 are marked *, for the reasons given
on p. 2.
Chapters i and ii, containing 132 verses, are placed in
a column by themselves. The other portions of the Gospel
which are here regarded as ' peculiar ', because without
parallels in Matthew or Mark, amount to about 367 verses,
viz. iii. 10-14; 23-38 > iv. 16-30 (?); v. i-n(?); vi. 24-26; vii.
11-17 ; 3 6 -5 (?) J viii. 1-3 ; ix. 31 ; 51-56 ; 61, 62 ; x. i ;
17-20; 28-42^x1.5-8; 12; 27,28; 37,38; xii. 13-21;
47-5; 57; xiii. 1-17; 31-33 ;xiv. 1-14; 15-24 (?) ; 28-33;
xv. 6-32 ; xvi. 1-12 ; 14, 15 ; 19-31 ; xvii. 7-19 ; 28, 29 ;
32; xviii. 1-14; xix. i-io ; n-27(?); 39~44 \ xxi. 23 #,
24; 28; xxii. 15; 27-32; 35~3 8 ; 5i; 53 ^; xxiii. 7-**;
27-3 1 ; 39-43 5 46 ; *xiv. T3-53- 1 (See also pp. 194 ff. on
some smaller Lucan additions not included here.)
1 xii. 54, 55 and xx. 18 have to be added (bringing up the number of verses
to 370), if the parallels to them in Mt xvi. 2, 3 and xxi. 44 are rejected from
the text. Perhaps, indeed, the former passage should be added in any case.
i6
i
I
X -
NHOf
IIIAXX-IUX
: oo M M | cog
I
i
8!
l
uoui 11103
-noaj JaqiQ
u 'i -s
M M m . M
*** to *< *>*<>
<* ^- ^ rt- ^
XHVJ.\[
fei
*l
|s
3
M " r " 1 "~ S
.* 'E ji M . K s
X S
i
.1
a
. . . . . g
: t t i : * i ; t **
. . ON vo M . . M co
~ : : : : : ^ ' : : M
^
N M ? :
jvovo : vo :vo loS-vc
> ; M co o\ ^4-
: : : : M : M M '
: : : vo : : M M : : :
M *$ CO VO i>- -< t-^ CO VO
: N ^.^N^ ' JO | N 1O CO'LOCO
^"""""^ . * O
o , ~,^ :^> : -. o M : vo .
^M M COCOCOCOr^ i^" 1 ^ ' M <* N Tj-^-OA^fOVOOO COM-^J>-
^
"N IO M MOONMCOCOTfCOCOl'-VOMWM'^- M CO ^ CO
^j ^'wMCOl I M M -* -M IM -00 'MCO M -COfO
v> ^ IOOO -^VOVOOO O
M ^^ M N "^
I I^lMMMCOfOM -MMNNMIO-N -CO * '
C0^2 ^
^ V
d - J
* v - B
q
' * 'ON
o
a
"t^ 5^ 'S
q
ocT o
O\ fO
CO .
^^ ^h^~~*
co *p!
. . A .
p,*Q
^d,^
01
h ' p, 5. , - '3 ^ -B S * ^
' ' *.r^ ' ' *^^b3b3 * h o vg: rt -5 0> 3"3S '
I i ,<; ST 1 1*4 |4A s * s ^l-'S 2 ^ r
if, v- S ~ l \Z * 9. * 9 ? ?< -3 ** ^S x\u w . * CU R 1 >e
fe.2 S
o
HAWKINS
^ A o V u3 xvw K S H vrr- C ">J> < x '^
^C o ^w co ^ 2 2 S -!5 * o "w w
?* ?^eo v_^* cocococococo* * * M
vo O vo
N CO CO
c
18
^> uiT i,
.
^ o g
Si CO - *?^ ^*
I S|
?
$
Z
>
v
1 5 aS.
s
.5
OT
1 \ \\l
^
s
* ^ 5'" ^
*3
J ; o ^ J :=
vo
?
> co ^ U <J "*
^"^
d
JS o -0
"-0
'X *N * ^s^H
C3
H -00 "* O>
: M : : Tt- co ^ s
J*^H
^
NHOf
; ; - ; ; -
... <*
s>
invj
M i-c : o ^ t-
M N CO O N 1 ^-' s *
*>
SUOI1D3S
: . : : :
: : : : -^
s
nuxx-inx
2 ' 'sdeqf)'
M ; ; M f<+
%
<^ nx-i "sdnqQ
: : : ro^ o
^COU, N M^ ^^
,<o
^
uotutao3
-* - ^ : +~ ~2
^2M*o*>s
c
SJJBJ JBIJ
C> 10 M M M M fr-
M roiococoM N t^^.
*
g no 3d aaqiQ
co M
r*
t_3 n '; -sdBq3
: : to M 10 10
s
"1
Wl
* ^o,^.o^S
^ ^vo 10 -4- 10 t^ ^ v,
85
XXVJ\[
g
M3HX1VJ\[
M M CO CO
: XOM M N M : ^
!
^
^ .... s-~~
o o\ ^* o
^S
rC CO . **
ri
** *^^s C/* ^'^^
^
-* S <u
*^*
(^
M ^ .^
. <U . ^^ V P -S .
^
"^
0^
T^
K^>
S roj^ 1 gl
aT . I-
$
* |^ "rf^ ,
$1- 3,4 1
f|l}if!f|
IlMflJi
lO O
s
.: I
> > * a
. s f &
* - 8 85" co
S lif'al "
2 &-
If 3
N W g
-
. o
8
3 .S T3
ill
COOO M 1O M
g M co : : M
-CO M
hH
"*> 2O J^ CO CO M
d M i~- M M N N -Ml/
5 CO
*i CO \ M | M I
' ON iO t~ 'O to
NN M-^It^M vo;M
N
M CO
N
W Tf N
tf)
.
.
; co '
.
.
*
00
M M '
I M
! I M
^ : S
M
I "^-
I M
CO N M
M
CO M
*
* "
<N
* *
o
M M
O
^- Tj-
CJ
-^ CU &H
h^
M-
o*
x-x^
"t- . .
G ?
DH
M Th
^^^
/> c S
"
' .>
Tf .
. ex
_^_^
^
5^
~ n
^
w*
M
^
.22 , n
fe 01
a
H
H
*"*"'*'' V O
^" i.
-s. }
o cJ c3
g
I'
c
.i ^
^
o
1
*<J> _
.^J
^1
s r-|
h > ?
^ u> W U/
S.-S
h"^
1,1
4>^i .
V =L IT
8*1
=Lp 2-
v O O H i
1
^
s
^
(~) . (/ J/T
* V g
.S " fr
v l '1 'I
it
i
fOZO/UDJLTDX
O/nvyD-MJJf
o
s * &
5.^1 3
*S 5 ^
-5-5
H
!!
o
1C
10
o
vo
00
C 2
20
i
%
8
-s
1
NHOf
suoipas
I1IAXX-1HX
ii <i -sdeqo
HHVJ^[
Hi.:
I
j
M M OO CO
M M M ' ' ON
N j M 10 vo M ^<
1010^0^,^^"^ C>
1>-
^ .TT ^ .
ft ' *7o **M- *2 "
~~> ^ "M
i*_ ^^ CX O
g '-' '^''fo -b *
'S Hs- (? - [g
3 ^2 e( 2 &i S ^
M . -2 ' ^ > ^' C5 . . . c
o < >Q. i. .^^ p
*T"t Q.. ^^ s? itf O r^ *.
?2 . g P. 2 B 1 -4 .3 .vg-, ?
I * 1 l^illil - 1? ^ ^ 5 A
r ,r;^d^ iS^Ss*!^
TO O IO
00 O\ ON
21
8s-
'E o^
f~{ j^ pH
SB
c o
CtJ
S 00
ro M o\
ro ro M -oo
g ro ro oo M > ^
: ^ ^ M N ro ; M -ON
M
M roroio>-< H t--ro;;
^- j>. ro to ""t* vo vo
O^H VO
"" N ^ tO^O M M ON ^r
: M S 5 ^
: N 10 ^
ro M
M IO
s^ro MC^IOM NIO
%>oo Mri-Tfro^'Mro
"^ ' 10 1-1 N M * '
oo 100 ro ^i- ON ro
M M ^** N M VO OO
M : : oo N : '
o ^. o vo o
ro ON
MMM ! '. : M !t-i : M M : <M HH ci : IOM '. *- '.a
ro M M N
ro MMM
<N
I ?
OH
o Q, 3
v ><
fa
" b bCrf b b v
* -f- t= Hr- -i- V j
10
o
2 .3
N N *
IO
. CO
a, b
*3 3
1
22
NHof
invj
suoirpas
IllAXX-lllX
'"-s.dBq'5
UOUIUJO3
SMBJ JBH
0*(0
M MMCO
tj OO
"
00 CO
OO O
MM
ro Ma M
1000 M
: M M o M .' ; c> IN! N ' ^
AV3HiXVJ\[ <^ :MM-M::CO:NM: MVOM
1
. Tf*
o^.o -
00 S | J |
*i 5 s 2 a f?
4j nn M 'O . s
ij '55-3 a S:g
~ !!, *H ^ 8 *
o PL, H -5 S *"* C J2 ^
J2 'S "c O'TJ .5 B "* rt
'^ 3! ?. ^ |
SVOMMN JTf NTf-^ IO^"M | W
ON
CO
vo
VO VO -COM 00^;^;
M
CO
"- M w : M : : H oo ^ SS M M
vo
ON
*SJ2"^" MN " M COMCO COVO COOO ^*"
co^M^ 00 :^ vooo^ ^^^"co^vo
M
VO
ON
VO
O
M
s^oo M^ii^ NCOCO >* co covo vo
^^"^ :7o M M ^^ i vONVOOO'To
bo
vo
0_
vo } ^
w !*
* E? N ^^ ^"1 VOVOTJ- ^ .00 ON 2 s "ON
co
00
x x
vo
~
^COli-iCOlM MM! CO^'.'CO
vo
'o ^
?!
b Q. -^ ^
.S ^ ON
. . * S G ex.
5
. 3 . . , ^*S*"6fl .
1 -^ 3 -S ^ -S f
3^0.^ ^. 1. 5 | "g ^5 g
^ ^ ^"f CH> 4- 4--G- >< *^><* 3 3
O vo O
^- TJ- xo
24 Words and Phrases characteristic Pt. i
And, besides the instances which will be found entered
in two subsidiary lists in an Appendix (pp. 27, 28), there
are some other words and phrases which, though not quite
falling under the above rules, are to be observed as more
or less characteristic of Luke, viz. CLKOVU with TOV \6yov,
a\r)6&$ with Aeyw vfuv, ajuaprcoAo's, avO' <5z>, aTra? (but the
readings are often uncertain), Set, 8ta rd with infinitive,
eyyi'fw (especially in narrative), efrjy, at e/)?j/Aoi, evXoye'co, YJV
and i]<rav with participles, 0eoV Ka0ef?J9, Ka0a>y, KCU ya/>,
Kare'xco, ^rdvoia, juoroyezn/s (always with datives), o8wdo/icu,
OIKOS (as against ot/cta), Trpoo-e'xcre eauroty, (TTrcvSco, avv\aipa),
vyiaiva, </>o'/3os.
Observe also the extreme rarity of the historic present in
the narrative (only in vii. 40 ; viii. 49 ; xi. 37, 45 ; xxiv. i 2 (?),
36 (?), in contrast with Matthew 78, Mark 151) 2 ; the rarity
of Q.\M\V (Matthew 31, Mark 13, Luke 6), and of -na\iv
(Matthew 17, Mark 28, Luke 3), and of vTrayw (Matthew 19,
Mark 16, Luke 5 ; see Abbott, Joh. Voc.> 1653 f.); the
absence of pafSpti (Matthew 4, Mark 3, John 8 only).
Some Remarks on the above Lucan Words and Phrases.
A
Of the 151 different words and phrases, no less than 77,
being more than half of them, occur once or more in
chapters i, ii ; 91 of them are found in Matthew and 69 of
them in Mark; and there are no less than 115 of them
in Acts, and 45 in the brief * We '-Sections of that book
(see pp. 176, 184).
B
74 of them are absent from chapters i, ii ; only 15 of
them are absent from the ' other peculiar ' portions (see
below), and only 6 of them from the whole of the ' peculiar '
1 There are some uncertainties as to readings, but the numbers in the
historical books are approximately Matthew 52, Mark 47, Luke 122, Acts
162. John 77. (Only the references to the One God are included.)
2 See more on this below, pp. 149 flf.
in. Lk of each of the Synoptic Gospels 25
portions including chapters i, ii ; and only 12 of them from
the ' common ' portions.
C
The number of verses in Luke i, ii is 132, being rather
more than one-ninth of the M49 1 verses into which the
Gospel is divided. But they contain 212, i. e. almost exactly
one-seventh, of the occurrences of the ' characteristic '
words and phrases. So we find here (as in the case of
Matthew, but not to so large an extent) that such ex-
pressions are used more abundantly in the first two chapters
than in the rest of the Gospel.
D
In the other 22 chapters there are 367 verses which have
here been classed as ' peculiar ' to Luke, as being apparently
drawn from sources not used by Matthew or Mark. When
the 132 verses of chapters i, ii are added to these, we have
altogether 499 ' peculiar ' verses against 650 ' common '
verses in this Gospel. That is to say, the peculiar portions
constitute very little more than three-sevenths of the whole
1,149 verses. But they are found to contain 777, or more
than half of the 1,483 occurrences of the 140 ' characteristic '
words and phrases, which are thus seen to be scattered
considerably more thickly over the ' peculiar ' than the
' common ' portions.
And here we find, to a much larger extent than we
found in the case of Matthew, that the ' characteristic '
expressions which thus predominate are on the whole 2
such as are indications of the author's style, not being
merely words required or suggested by the subject-matter :
see e. g. eyeWro KCH ; KO! CLVTOS ; Kvptos ; OJUOI'ODJ ; ris with
nouns ; rov before infinitives ; w? = when. 3
1 According to the ordinary numbering 1,151; but the best texts and
R. V. omit xvii. 36 and xxiii. 17, bringing down the number to 1,149.
2 Not exclusively, for Sftca and yum are exceptions.
3 See also eros, (ixppaivaj, KoiXia, m/XTrX^yuf, ir\ovaios, (f>i\os.
26 Words and Phrases characteristic Pt. i
SECTION IV
GENERAL REMARKS ON THE WORDS AND PHRASES
CHARACTERISTIC OF THE THREE SYNOPTIC GOSPELS
A
The chief result of an examination of the above lists
is a very strong impression that the compilers (or at any
rate Matthew and Luke, for probably Mark is mainly
a source) dealt very freely with the sources which they
used. To a large extent they clothed the narratives, and
to some extent they clothed the sayings, 1 which they
derived from those sources, in their own favourite language.
Therefore it is less surprising to me than it would other-
wise be to fail, as after a careful search I have failed, to find
any expressions which can be certainly set down as charac-
teristic of any source (whether Logian, Marcan, or specially
Lucan). See also p. 113 below.
B
The following is a comparative summary of results as to
the distribution of the characteristic words and phrases :
1. In Matthew, they are scattered more than twice as
thickly over the peculiar portions (including chapters i-ii)
as they are over the common portions. 2
2. In Mark, they are rather more thickly scattered over
the small peculiar portions than they are over the large
common portions.
3. In Luke, they are scattered slightly more than half
as thickly again (but very much less than twice as thickly)
over the peculiar portions as they are over the common
portions.
1 On the far greater frequency of verbal coincidences in the recitative
than in the narrative portions of the Gospels, see Westcott, Introduction
to Study of Gospels, pp. 198-200 (8th ed. 1895).
2 But this is largely caused by the special subject-matter of some of
the parables, and by yevvata : therefore 15 of the Matthaean words are
bracketed, as comparatively unimportant, against 2 of the Marcan and 8 of
the Lucan ones.
A P px.i.Lk of each of the Synoptic Gospels 27
PH
O
H
I I r . O
X
Ht
Q
W
PH
co
cj
H
co
i i
P4
W
H
CJ
<
P4
<
K
cj
<
CJ
D
hJ
CO
H
CO
CO
o
equirements
characteristic
^ v
<D >> _9
s'sS
^ ^ .|3
rt O 43
gD^H
"" 2 43
I
S-4 > M I
cj O
*j ^ CO
O aT *
c 13 a
(-1 git <U
") o ^
g rh co
_0 VJ rt
"5 ^ co
43 44 13
CJ 3 CO
Vs-S
CO IT-I CU
^ ^ -5
rt cJ M _ H
43 OT
ft ^ w
41!
rt rt <u
CO '
H3
"* CO S_
<U O o
1 1 "i
co QJ cS
"tn O ^
1? J *
CD CJ ^
S 5
CO
cq
.a-al
1 1 ?
"^ {=! OT
<U t2 *"
co 4)
W $3 43
r~] ^
u-i "Eb
OJ
J(_ > .Ti
00^
^ s
a s -2
H E *
C/3
tl
3
I!
^
5^
43
O
g ^
s 5 .1
CO
I
Cu
s
b
11
"
NHOf
,0
M
00
Os
IJIAXX-IUX
H x -!
uouj 11103
CO
O
COVO GO
IO N M
1C
CO
J>- CO CO CO
10
'E "^
O S3
O
O <u
28 Words and Phrases characteristic Pt. i
H
cn
Q
S
CO
c a
cJ
i!
O
O
o *_,
v 05
<U *G
<L> en
51
>V T QH
c3 ^
J^
G /
oJ
S 3
-a
!*
3-
^
i
>s ^Q
^ o
^ G
G
o
I
.0
J
CO
G
O
co
c
o
CO
*t3
- fl
cu o5
.9 II
^ cn
l-ScS
o s ^ o g
^ .| 2 ^ c/3
H
n
l
1 11
X -j^ jo xsa- M HH M : : : M : so
NHOf
SUOUD3S
-^M.^MX
UlAXX-IllX
jix-i
SJ4BJ
UOUIIUO3
ro ro
M N "^J
i. Lk of each of the Synoptic Gospels 29
c >
m
N
-C '>
g
10
30 Words and Phrases characteristic Pt.
APPENDIX II TO PART I
I HERE give the references to the occurrences of those of the
'characteristic words and phrases' on pp. 4-21, which do not
stand consecutively in a Concordance, and which therefore cannot
be quite easily traced there.
I. WORDS AND PHRASES CHARACTERISTIC
OF ST. MATTHEW'S GOSPEL
uk oupacui'.
Mt iii. 2 ; iv. 17 ; v. 3, 10, 19 bis, 20 ; vii. 21 ; viii. n ; x. 7 ; xi. n,
12; xiii. n, 24, 31, 33, 44, 45, 47, 52; xvi. 19; xviii. i, 3,
4, 23 ; xix. 12, 14, 23 ; xx. i ; xxii. 2 ; xxiii. 14; xxv. i.
Compare /3ao-iA'a ro\> Geoi), or eeoi), Mt 4, Mk 14, Lk 32, Acts
6, Paul 8, Jn 2, Rev 1. See Allen, Intr. to Matt., Ivi and
Ixxi.
See additional note, p. 52, on the use of ovpavos and ovpavoi.
Mt vi. 10 ; viii. 13*; ix. 29*; xv. 28*; xxvi. 42.
Acts i, 20 (LXX).
Rom xi. 9 (LXX).
* These three times with reference to miracles of healing.
Mt i. 24; ii. 13, 14, 20, 21 ; viii. 26 ; ix. 7, 19 (also 6 in TRWH
mg).
Lk xi. 8.
Jn xxi. 8 of the risen Christ.
Rom vi. 9; vii. 4 (-m); viii. 34; 2 Cor v. 15 (-J/TI) : all of the
risen Christ.
Compare the Lucan awards.
eis = TIS (or our indefinite article).
Mt viii. 19; xviii. 24 (?) ; xxi. 19; xxvi. 69. (Perhaps also ix. 18,
which, if els is the right reading, would correspond to els rS>v
in Mk v. 22 as xxvi. 69 does to /xia rS>v in Mk xiv. 66.)
. ii. Mt of each of the Synoptic Gospels 31
Rev viii. 13; ix. 13; xviii. 21 ; xix. 17.
See "IHK (under headings 3 and 4) in BDB Heb. Lex. ; also
Blass, Gram., p. 144; J. H. Moulton, Gram., i. 96 f.
Compare the use of ets- n? in Mk xiv. 47 (?), Lk xxii. 50,
Jn xi. 47, and dvo nvds in Lk vii. 18.
Mt v. 21, 27, 31, 33, 38, 43.
Rom ix. 12, 26 (LXX). (Also fppedrjffav in Gal iii. 16.)
Rev vi. 1 1 ; ix. 4.
Mt x. 15 ; xi. 22, 24 ; xii. 36.
2 Pet ii. 9 ; iii. 7 ; i Jn iv. 17.
See also Kiais.
I8ou after genitive absolute.
Mt i. 20; ii. i, 13, 19 ; ix. 10 [WH KO.\ I8ov, Tisch with ND latt
&c. idou] 18, 32; xii. 46; xvii. 5; xxvi. 47; xxviii. n.
Lk xxii. 47.
Xy6fXi/os, used with names.
Mt i. 16; ii. 23; iv. 18; ix. 9; x. 2; xxvi. 3, 14, 36; xxvii. 16,
17, 22, 33&>.
Mk xv. 7.
Lk xxii. i, 47.
Acts iii. 2 ; vi. 9.
Jn iv. 5, 25 ; ix. n ; xi. 16, 54 ; xix. 13, 17 ; xxi. 2.
Or ear.
Mt vii. 12 ; xviii. 18 ^w ; xxi. 22 ; xxii. 9 ; xxiii. 3.
Mk iii. 28 ; vi. 56.
Lk ix. 5.
Acts ii. 39; iii. 22.
Jn xi. 22.
Rev- iii. 19; xiii. 15.
rjpuy, ujuiwi/, aou,
Mtv. 16, 45, 48; vi. i, 4, 6 &j, 8, 9 (jj/zSi/ here only), 14, 15,
18 bis, 26, 32 ; vii. n ; x. 20, 29 ; xiii. 43 ; xxiii. 9.
Mk xi. 25 (on this case as unique in Mk, see Abbott, Joh. Vocab.,
1697, 17110).
32 Words and Phrases characteristic Pt.i
Lk vi. 36; xii. 30, 32.
Rom i. 7 ; i Cor i. 3 ; 2 Cor i. 2 ; Gal i. 4 ; Eph i. 2 ; Phil i. 2 ;
iv. 20; Col i. 2 ; i Thes i. 3 ; iii. u, 13 ; 2 Thes i. 2 ; ii. 16;
Philem 3. (Always fi^5>v in Paul.)
Jn xx. 17.
riaTTjp 6 eK (rots) oupayois.
Mt v. 16, 45; vi. i, 9; vii. u, 21; x. 32, 33; xii. 50; xvi. 17;
xviii. 10, 14, 19.
Mk xi. 25.
n<XTT)p 6 oupduaos.
Mt v. 48; vi. 14, 26, 32 ; xv. 13; xviii. 35 ; xxiii. 9.
(ovpdvios besides in N. T. only Lk 1 (?), Acts 1.)
Altogether nar^p is used of God in the Synoptic Gospels
Mt 45, Mk 5, Lk 17. (See Dalman, Words of Jesus, E. T.,
pp. 1 84 if.)
ow, of Scriptures being fulfilled.
Mt i. 22 ; ii. 15, 17, 23 ; iv. 14 ; viii. 17 ; xii. 17 ; xiii. 35 ; xxi. 4 ;
xxvi. 54, 56 ; xxvii. 9.
Mk xiv. 49 (parallel to Mt xxvi. 56).
Lk iv. 21 ; xxiv. 44.
Acts i. 1 6 ; iii. 18 ; xiii. 27.
Jn xii. 38 ; xiii. 18 ; xv. 25 ; xvii. 12 ; xix. 24, 36.
Jam ii. 23.
iroi'Tjpog, 6 ; ironrjpoV, TO, of the evil one, or evil.
Mt v. 37*, 39* ; vi. 13* ; xiii. 19, 38*.
Rom xii. 9 ; Eph vi. 16* ; 2 Thes iii. 3*.
Jn xvii. 15*.
i Jn ii. 13, 14 ; iii. 12* ; v. 18, 19*.
* In these cases the word may be either masculine or neuter.
Lk vi. 45 ; i Cor v. 13 refer to men, so are not included here :
see however the former passage.
(We have now seen that the parts of the Lord's Prayer which
are peculiar to Mt contain three expressions which are
' characteristic ' of him, viz. yfyijftf$rt, Ilar^p o eV rols ovpavois
and this one.)
irpos TO with infinitive.
Mt v. 28 ; vi. i ; xiii. 30 ; xxiii. 5 ; xxvi. 12.
ii. Mt of each of the Synoptic Gospels 33
Mk xiii. 22.
Lk xviii. i.
Acts iii. 19.
2 Cor iii. 13 ; Eph vi. n ; i Thes ii. 9 ; 2 Thes iii. 8.
(els TO with infinitive occurs Mt 3, Mk 1, Lk 1, viz. Mt xx. 19 ;
xxvi. 2 ; xxvii. 31 ; Mk xiv. 55 ; Lk v. 17 ; also Acts 1, viz.
vii. 19 ; and frequently in the Pauline and other Epistles.)
jb]0lp, and once ptjGets.
Mt i. 22; ii. 15, 17, 23; iii. 3 (faeds ) ; iv. 14; viii. 17; xii. 17;
xiii. 35 ; xxi. 4 ; xxii. 31 ; xxiv. 15 ; xxvii. 9.
Cf. TO cipif/ieW Lk 1, Acts 2, Paul 1 only.
<7Kak8aXiofxcu iv.
Mt xi. 6; xiii. 57; xxvi. 31, 33.
Mk vi. 3.
Lk vii. 23.
crufXJBouXiOf XajJL^di'w.
Mt xii. 14; xxii. 15; xxvii. i, 7; xxviii. 12.
Mt v. 29, 30 ; xviii. 6 ; xix. 10.
1 Cor vi. 12 ; x. 23 ; 2 Cor viii. 10.
Jn xi. 50; xvi. 7 ; xviii. 14.
The participle is used in the same sense in Acts xx. 20 ; i Cor
xii. 7 ; 2 Cor xii. i ; Heb xii. 10.
Tl 001, Or UfJUV, 80K1 ;
Mt xvii. 25* ; xviii. 12* ; xxi. 28* ; xxii. 17, 42* ; xxvi. 66.
Jn xi. 56.
* These four in sayings of Jesus.
Compare also m . . . fioKI o-oi KT\. in Lk x. 36.
Tu<t>\6s used metaphorically.
Mt xv. 14 a [in Tisch and WH mg bis\ ; xviii. 16, 17, 19, 24, 26.
Rom ii. 19.
Jn ix. 39, 40, 41.
2 Pet i. 9 ; Rev iii. 17.
Mt xv. 1 4 b (bis) and Lk vi. 39 bis are not included, because
they form part of the material of a ' parable ', and thus are
used in the literal sense.
HAWKINS D
34 Words and Phrases characteristic Pt. i
Mt i. 20; ii. 7, 13, 19 ; vi. 5, 16, 18; ix. 33; xiii. 26; xxiii. 27,
28 ; xxiv. 27, 30.
Mk xiv. 64. (Also in Appendix, xvi. 9.)
Lk ix. 8 ; xxiv. n.
Rom vii. 13 ; 2 Cor xiii. 7 ; Phil ii. 15.
Heb xi. 3 ; Jam iv. 14; i Pet iv. 18.
The active <tuW is used Jn 2, 2 Pet 1, i Jn 1, Rev 4. See
Thayer's Lex., s. v.
wpa with Kwr), in narrative.
Mt viii. 13*; ix. 22*; xv. 28*; xvii. 18* ; xviii. i ; xxvi. 55.
Lk vii. 21.
Acts xvi. 33.
Jn iv. 53 ; xix. 27.
Elsewhere only in discourses Mt 3. 19 ; xxiv. 36 ; Mk xiii. ii,
32 ; and in Rev xi. 13.
* In these 4 cases used of instantaneous cures : cf. also
Jn iv. 53.
II. WORDS AND PHRASES CHARACTERISTIC
OF ST. MARK'S GOSPEL.
i, epxomu, historic presents.
Mt xxvi. 36, 40, 45.
Mk i. 40; ii. 3, 18 ; iii. 20, 31 ; v. 15, 22, 35, 38 ; vi. i, 48 ; viii.
22; x. i, 46; xi. 15, 27 bis; xii. 18; xiv. 17, 32, 37, 41, 66;
xvi. 2.
Lk viii. 49.
Jn iv. 5/7 ; vi. 5 (?) ; xi. 20 (?), 38 ; xii. 12 (?), 22 bis ; xiii. 6 ; xviii.
3 ; xx. i, 2, 6, 18, 26; xxi. 13.
In LXX (B-text) only 27 times, of which 26 are in Kingdoms
and 18 of these in i Ki.
o earn', without a participle.
Mk iii. 17 ; vii. ii, 34 ; xii. 42 ; xv. 16, 42.
Col i. 24 (?).
Heb vii. 2 ; Rev xxi. 17 (?).
. ii. Mk of each of the Synoptic Gospels 35
oiKia and OIKOS without mention of owner.
Mt ix. 28 ; xiii. i, 36; xvii. 25.
Mk ii. i; iii. 20 ; vii. 1 7, 24 ; ix. 28, 33 ; x. i o.
orav with indicative.
Mk iii. ii ; xi. 19, 25.
Rev iv. 9 ; viii. i.
WH mg and Tisch also have the indie, future after QTO.V in
Lk xiii. 28.
Compare onov av with indie, in Mk vi. 56 and perhaps in
Rev xiv. 4.
on = TI interrogative (why ?).
Mk ii. 1 6 (but the reading and the interrogative sense are not
beyond doubt); ix. ii, 28.
See Thayer's Lex., s. v. ocrns (4) ; Abbott, Corr. of Mark,
357 #; Moulion's Winer, p. 208 note.
ntranstve.
Mk iv. 29 ; xiv. 47, 69, 70 ; xv. 35 (?), 39.
Lk i. 19 ; xix. 24.
Acts i. 10 ; iv. 10, 26 (LXX) ; ix. 39 ; xxiii. 2, 4 ; xxvii. 23, 24.
Rom xiv. 10 ; xvi. 2 ; 2 Tim iv. 17.
Jn xviii. 22 ; xix. 26.
iroXXd, adverbial.
Mk i. 45; iii. 12; v. 10, 23, 38, 43; vi. 20; ix. 26; xv. 3.
Rom xvi. 6, 12 ; i Cor xvi. 12, 19.
Jam iii. 2.
In all other cases iroXXd is more probably an accusative.
III. WORDS AND PHRASES CHARACTERISTIC
OF ST. LUKE'S GOSPEL.
av with optative (see Additional Note, p. 53).
Lk i. 62 ; vi. 1 1 ; ix. 46 ; xv. 26.
Acts v. 24; viii. 31; x. 17; xvii. 18; xxvi. 29.
Mt ix. 9; xxvi. 62.
Mk i. 35; ii. 14 ; vii. 24 ; x. i ; xiv. 57, 60. (Also in Appendix,
xvi. 9.)
D a
36 Words and Phrases characteristic Pt. i
Lk i. 39; iv. 29, 38, 39; v. 25, 28; vi. 8; xi. 7, 8; xv. 18, 20;
xvii. 19; xxii. 45, 46; xxiii. i ; xxiv. 33. (Also in the very
doubtful verse, xxiv. 12.)
Acts i. 15; v. 6, 17, 34; viii. 27; ix. 18, 39; x. 13, 20, 23; xi.
7, 28; xiii. 16; xiv. 20; xv. 7; xxii. 10, 16; xxiii. 9,
Lk v. 20; xii. 14 ; xxii. 58, 60.
Rom ii. i, 3 ; ix. 20.
Jam ii. 20.
In Paul and James with, in Luke without, o>.
Also in the addition to Lk vi. 5 in Codex D.
\
diro TOU vuv.
Lk i. 48; v. 10; xii. 52; xxii. 18, 69.
Acts xviii. 6.
2 Cor v. 1 6.
(Also in Pericope de Adultera, Jn viii. ii.)
apxoyres, of the Jews.
Lk xiv. i ; xxiii. 13, 35; xxiv. 20.
Acts iii. 17 ; iv. 5, 8, 26; xiii. 27.
Jn vii. 26, 48 ; xii. 42. (Cf. also iii. i.)
And it is Lk only (xviii. 1 8) who speaks of the rich (in Mt
young) man as apxa>v.
ycyokos, TO.
Mk v. 14 (= Lk viii. 34).
Lk ii. 15 (with prjp.fi); viii. 34, 35, 36. (xxiv. 12 is not reckoned.)
Acts iv. 21 ; v. 7 ; xiii. 12.
yfropai with eirt and accusative.
Mt xxvii. 45.
Mk xiv. 33.
Lk i. 65* ; iii. 2 ; iv. 25, 36f ; xxiii. 44 (the parallel to Mt and
Mk) ; xxiv. 22.
Acts iv. 2 2 ; v. 5*, 1 1 * ; x. 10 ; xxi. 35.
* (frofios eyevfTo (cf. also Acts ii. 43). t Qapftos fyevcro.
Acts iv. 5 and xix. 10, referring to time, are not included
here ; see p. 187.
eW is followed by a genitive in Lk xxii. 40; Jn vi. 21 ;
Rev xvi. 1 8 (Acts xi. 28 is not in point).
ii. Lk of each of the Synoptic Gospels 37
C v '
Oe K(Xl.
Mt x. 30 ; xviii. 17 ; xxv. 24. (xxiv. 49 is not reckoned.)
Mk xiv. 3 1 (?) ; xv. 40.
Lk ii. 4; iii. 9, 12; iv. 41 ; v. 10, 36 ; vi. 39 ; ix. 61 ; x. 32 ; xi.
1 8 ; xii. 54, 57 ; xiv. 12 ; xvi. i, 22 ; xviii. 9 ; xix. 19 ; xx. ii,
12, 31 ; xxi. 16; xxii. 24; xxiii. 32, 35, 38.
Acts ii. 26; v. 16 ; xiii. 5 ; xix. 31 ; xxi. 16 ; xxii. 28 ; xxiv. 9.
Rom viii. 26 ; i Cor i. 16 ; iv. 7 ; vii. 3, 4, 28 ; xiv. 15 ; xv. 15 (?);
2 Cor iv. 3 ; v. n ; vi. i ; viii. n ; xi. 6 ; Eph v. n ; Phil iii.
18; iv. 15; i Tim v. 13, 24; 2 Tim ii. 5; Tit iii. 14; Philem
9, 22.
Jn ii. 2 ; iii. 23 ; xv. 24 ; xviii. 2, 5 ; xix. 19, 39 ; xxi. 25.
Jam ii. 2, 25; 2 Pet i. 15 ; ii. i ; Jude 14.
These references can only be verified in Bruder, for Moulton
and Geden's Concordance omits both &f and KM.
TOI> 0Ol>.
Mt ix. 8; xv. 31 adding 'loymqA. (Cf. also v. 16.)
Mk ii. 12.
Lk ii. 20; v. 25, 26 (the parallel to Mt and Mk) ; vii. 16; xiii. 13;
xvii. 15; xviii. 43; xxiii. 47.
Acts iv. 21 ; xi. 18 ; xxi. 20. (Cf. also xiii. 48.)
Rom i. 21 ; xv. 6, 9 ; i Cor vi. 20 ; 2 Cor ix 13 ; Gal. i. 24.
Jn xiii. 31 ; xxi. 19. (Cf. also xiv. 13 ; xv. 8 ; xvii. i, 4.)
^ycVero, followed by /eat.
Mt ix. 10.
Lk v. i, 12, 17; viii. i, 22; ix. 51; xiv. i; xvii. u; xix. 15;
xxiv. 4, 15.
Acts v. 7 (?).
eyeVero, followed by finite verb.
Mt vii. 28; xi. i; xiii. 53; xix. i ; xxvi. i. (In all 5 cases with
ore eVe'Xecrei/, after discourses of Jesus.)
Mk i. 9 ; iv. 4.
Lki. 8, 23, 41, 59; ii. i, 6, 15, 46; vii. ii ; ix. 18, 28, 33, 37 ;
xi. i, 14, 27; xvii. 14; xviii. 35; xix. 29; xx. i; xxiv.
30, 5i.
eyeVero, followed by infinitive.
Mk ii. 23. (Cf. also ytvcrai, Mk ii. 15.)
Lk iii. 21. vi. i, 6, 12 ; xvi. 22.
38 Words and Phrases characteristic pt. i
Acts iv. 5 ; ix. 3, 32, 37, 43 ; xi. 26 ; xiv. i ; xvi. 16 ; xix. i ; xxi.
i, 5 ; xxii. 6, 17 ; xxvii. 44 ; xxviii. 8, 17.
The total occurrences of e'ycWo in the historical books are
Mt 13, Mk 16, Lk 71, Acts 52 (besides eyV 2), Jn 17.
We find eyeWo &?' Lk 17, Acts 21 only. Cf. Plummer's note
in Int. Crit. Commentary on Luke, p. 45 ; and Dalman's
Words of Jesus, E. T., p. 32 ; and J. H. Moulton, Gram, of
N. T., i. 1 6, 70.
el Be H^Y 6 *
Mt vi. i ; ix. 17.
Lk v. 36, 37 ; x. 6 ; xiii. 9 ; xix. 32.
2 Cor xi. 1 6.
ct Se /i?; occurs Mk 2, Jn 2, Rev 2.
it], optative (see Additional Note, p. 53).
Lk i. 29; iii. 15 ; viii. 9 ; ix. 46* : xv. 26*; xviii. 36; xxii. 23.
Acts viii. 20; x. 17*; xx. 16; xxi. 33.
* With av, see p. 35.
elju, &c., with dative.
Mt xii. 45 ; xvi. 22 ; xix. 27.
Mk xi. 23, 24.
Lk i. 14; ii. 7, 10; vi. 32, 33, [34]; vii. 41 ; viii. 30, 42; ix. 13,
38 ; x. 39 ; xii. 20, 24 ; xiv. 10.
Acts iv. 32 ; vii. 5, 44; viii. 21 ; x. 6 ; xviii. 10; xxi. 9; xxiv.
i o (?), 1 1 ; xxv. 1 6.
Rom ix. 2, 9 ; i Cor ix. 16.
Jn xviii. 10 ; xix 40.
Jam iv. 17; Rev xxi. 7 bis.
In this case the classification of instances is uncertain and
unsatisfactory, because of the difficulty of determining
whether the dative is governed by the verb or by the
accompanying noun. Therefore such passages as Lk i. 45;
Acts ii. 39 ; xxii. 15 ; Rom ii. 14 ; i Cor i. 18 ; ii. 14 ;
xi. 14, 15 ; 2 Cor ix. i ; Phil i. 28 ; iii. 7 are omitted here,
though suggested by Bruder, pp. 244-260. But it is
clear that this use of the verb substantive is characteristic
of Luke and Acts.
As is often the case with Lucan characteristics, it is frequent
in LXX ; see, e. g., fy and rjo-av in Gen xi. 3 b ; xii. 20 ;
. ii. Lk of each of the Synoptic Gospels 39
xiii. 5; xvi. i ; xxiii. 20; xxiv. 29, 36; xxv. 24; xxix.
16; xxxviii. 27 ; xxxix. 4, 5, 6; xl. 5; xlvii. 26.
, after preposition and article.
Lk ii. 4, 6 ; v. 12 ; ix. 18 ; xi. i, 8 ; xix. 1 1.
Acts xviii. 3 ; xix. i ; xxvii. 4.
Rom i. 20; iii. 26; iv. n, 16 ; viii. 29; xv. 16 ; i Cor x. 6;
Eph i. 12 ; Phil i. 23. (In Paul always efc TO.)
Jn xvii. 5.
Jam i. 1 8.
Mk xii. 12.
Lk vi. 39 ; xii. 16 ; xv. 3 ; xviii. 9 ; xix. n ; xx. 19 ; xxi. 29.
CITTCC 8e, ei-iray 8e.
[Mt xii. 47 is excluded, being placed in margin by WH and
bracketed by Tisch.]
Lk i. 13, 34, 38 ; iv. 3, 24 ; vi. 8, 9, 39 ; vii. 48, 50 ; viii. 25 ; ix.
9, 13, 14, 20, 50, 59, 60, 61, 62 ; x. 18, 28; xi, 2, 39; xii. 13,
15, 16,20, 22, 41; xiii. 7,23; xv. 3, n, 21, 22; xvi. 3, 25, 27,
31 ; xvii. i, 6, 22 ; xviii. 6, 9, 19, 26, 28; xix. 9, 19; xx. 13,
41 ; xxii. 36, 52, 60, 67, 70; xxiv. 17, 44.
Acts iii. 6 ; v. 3 ; vii. i, 33 ; viii. 29 ; ix. 5, 15 ; x. 4; xi. 12 ; xii.
8; xviii. 9; xix. 4; xxi. 39; xxiii. 20; xxv. 10. (Cf. also flirov
&, xi. 8 ; xxii. 10.)
Jn xii. 6. (Also in Pericope de Adultera, viii. n.)
See some remarks on this usage in Lake, The Resurrection, &c.,
p. 108.
eXdxioroy, neuter without noun.
Lk xii. 26; xiv. 10 bis-\ xix. 17.
i Cor iv. 3.
cXY6P Se, eXeyok Se.
Mt xxvi. 5.
Mk vii. 20.
Lk v. 36* ; ix. 23 ; x. 2 ; xii. 54* ; xiii. 6 ; xiv. 7, 12 ; xvi. i* ;
xviii. i.
Jn vi. 71 ; x. 20.
* fie *m.
40 Words and Phrases characteristic pt. i
f.v JJUOL TWk.
Lk v. 12, 17*; viii. 22*; xiii. 10; xx. i*.
* fv /ata T>V r)p.epS)i>.
Iv rats Yjfxepais raurais.
Lk i. 39; vi. 12; xxiii. 7 ; xxiv. 18. (Cf. also i. 24 /iera.)
Actsi. 15; vi. i ; xi. 27.
(ei> rats 77/1. eKeivais is more usual, viz. Mt 3, Mk 4, Lk 5, Acts 3,
Rev 1 ; but of these 16 only 7 are in narrative, viz.
Mt iii. i ; Mk i. 9 ; viii. i ; Lk ii. i ; iv. 2 ; ix. 36 ;
Acts ix. 37.)
Iv TW, with infinitive.
Mt xiii. 4, 25 ;. xxvii. 12.
Mk iv. 4 ; vi. 48.
Lk i. 8, 21 ; ii. 6, 27, 43 ; iii. 21 ; v. i, 12; viii. 5, 40,42 ; ix. 18,
29> 33, 34, 3 6 > 5i; x. 35, 38; xi. 1,27,37; xii. 15; xiv. i ;
xvii. n, 14 ; xviii. 35; xix. 15; xxiv. 4, 15, 30, 51.
Acts ii. r; iii. 26; iv. 30; viii. 6; ix. 3 ; xi. 15; xix. i.
Rom iii. 4 (LXX); xv. 13 ; i Cor xi. 21 ; Gal iv. 18.
Heb ii. 8; iii. 12, 15; viii. 13.
For (i> TW in LXX see Hatch and Redpath's Concordance, s.v.
fv, and for statistics of the 'articular infinitive' in the
N. T. generally, J. H. Moulton, Gram., i. 216.
diro.
Mt xii. 43; xv. 22(?); xvii. 18; xxiv. i, 27.
Mk xi. 12.
Lk iv. 35 bis, 41 ; v. 8 ; viii. 2, 29, 33, 35, 38, 46 ; ix. 5 ; xi. 24 ;
xvii. 29.
Acts xvi. 1 8, 40; xxviii. 3.
i Cor xiv. 36; Phil iv. 15.
Jn xiii. 3 ; xvi. 30.
Rev xix. 5.
Cf. t&pxn<u Mt 6, Mk 10, Lk 0, Acts 4, Paul 2, Jn 5,
Heb 2, Jam 1, i Jn 1, Rev 8.
KX, with infinitive.
Mt xviii. 25.
Lk vii. 40, 42 ; xii. 4, 50 ; xiv. 14.
Acts iv. 14; xxiii. 17, 18, 19; xxv. 26; xxvii. 19.
ii. Lk of each of the Synoptic Gospels 41
Eph iv. 28 ; Tit ii. 8.
Jn viii. 26 ; xvi. 12. (Also Pericope de Adultera, viii. 6 (?).)
Heb vi. 13. (See also i Pet iv. 5 in Tisch, &c.)
0auja.du) em.
Lk ii. 33 ; iv. 22 ; ix. 43 ; xx. 26.
Acts iii. 12.
Cf. eicdavfJLdfa eVt, Mk Xli. 1 7.
Oepaireub) dird.
Lk v. 15 ; vi. 18 (?) ; vii. 21 ; viii. 2.
In vi. 1 8 arro may perhaps depend on eVo^Xou/ifi/oi. viii. 43
is not a parallel case. The phrase is only found once in
LXX.
iSou y^P-
Lk i. 44, 48 ; ii. 10 ; vi. 23; xvii. 21.
Acts ix. ii.
2 Cor vii. ii.
K<x6' Yjne'pay.
Mt xxvi. 55.
Mk xiv. 49.
Lk ix. 23; xi. 3; xvi. 19 ; xix. 47 ; xxii. 53.
Acts ii. 46, 47; iii. 2 ; xvi. 5 ; xvii. n; xix. 9. (Cf. also xvii. 17
Kara Tiacrav fffiepav.}
1 Cor xv. 31 ; 2 Cor xi. 28.
Heb vii. 27 ; x. n. (Cf. also iii. 8, 13.)
KCU, in apodosis.
Lk ii. 21 ; vii. 12 ; xi. 34 &> (?). (Cf. also xiii. 25.)
Acts i. 10.
2 Cor ii. 2.
Jam iv. 15 ; Rev xiv. 10 (?).
For other cases in Luke, see under eyeVe-ro followed by KCU.
KCU aurds, &c. (nominatives).
Mt xx. 10 ; xxi. 27; xxv. 44; xxvii. 57.
Mk iv. 38 ; vi. 47 ; viii. 29 ; xiv. 15 ; xv. 43.
Lk i. 17*, 22*, 36; ii. 28*, 37, 50; iii. 23*; iv. 15*; v.i*,
14*, !7*> 37; vi - 20 *; vii. 12; viii. i*, 22, 42 ; ix. 36, 51*; xi.
46; xiv. i, 12; xv. 14*; xvi. 24*, 28; xvii. n, 13*, 16; xviii.
34; xix. 2&F*, 9; xxii. 23,41; xxiv. 14*, [15], 25, 28, 31,
35, 52.
42 Words and Phrases characteristic pt. i
Acts viii. 13; xv. 32 ; xxi. 24; xxii. 20; xxiv. 15, 16; xxv. 22;
xxvii. 36.
Rom viii. 23 bis; xi. 31; xv. 14 bis; Gal ii. 17; Eph iv. n;
Phil ii. 24 ; Col i. 17, 18 ; i Thes ii. 14 ; 2 Tim ii. 10.
Jn iv. 12, 45; vii. 10; xvii. 8, 19, 21 ; xviii. 28.
Heb i. 5; ii. 14; iv. 10; v. 2; viii. 10; xi. n(?); xiii. 3; Jam
ii. 6 ; i Pet i. 15 ; ii. 5 ; i Jn ii. 2, 6 ; iv. 13, 15 ; Rev iii. 20 ;
vi. ii ; xii. ii ; xiv. 10, 17; xvii. ii; xviii. 6; xix. 15 bis]
xxi. 3, 7.
It is the use of *at avros where no special emphasis is intended
that is specially characteristic of Lk. Instances of this may,
I think, be seen in the passages marked * above ; but it is
sometimes difficult to decide which cases should be dis-
tinguished as emphatic and unemphatic. In the other
historical books the only case that can be decidedly called
unemphatic is Mk viii. 29. And it is remarkable that there
are no such cases in Acts.
The preponderance in Lk of the nominatives avros, &c., without
Kai is perhaps too slight to be significant ; the numbers in
the historical books are Mt 17, Mk 11, Lk 23, Acts 19,
Jnl6.
KCU OUTOS, &c. (nominatives).
Mk iv. 1 6.
Lk i. 36 ; ii. 12 ; viii. 13 (?), 41 (?); xvi. i ; xx. 28 ; xxii. 56, 59.
Acts xvii. 7.
Romxi. 31; i Tim- iii. 10.
Jn xvii. 25.
Heb xi. 39 ; i Jn iv. 3.
Cf. also KCU TOVTO in Rom xiii. 1 1 ; i Cor^vi. 6, 8 ; Eph ii. 8 ;
Phil i. 28 ; 3 Jn 5, and ai ravra in Heb xi. 12.
KaXoupe^os, with names or appellations.
Lk i. 36*; vi. 15; vii. ii ; viii. 2 ; ix, 10; x. 39; xix. 2, 29 ;
xxi. 37; xxii. 3; xxiii. 33.
Acts i. 12, 23 ; iii. ii ; vii. 58 ; viii. 10* ; ix. ii ; x. i ; xiii. i ;
xv. 22, 37; xxvii. 8, 14, 16.
Rev i. 9 ; xii. 9; xvi. 16; [xix. ii*].
Always with proper names, except in the three cases marked *.
In Heb v. 4 and xi. 8 the meaning is different, viz.
' summoned '.
ii. Lk of each of the Synoptic Gospels 43
' womb J .
Mt xix. 12.
Lk i. 15, 41, 42, 44 ; ii. 21 ; xi. 27 ; xxiii. 29.
Acts iii. 2 ; xiv. 8.
Gal i. 15.
Jn iii. 4.
In this sense frequent in LXX, but 'very rare in classical
Greek ' (Plummer on Lk i. 1 5).
Ku'pios, 6, in narrative.
Lk vii. 13, 19 ; x. i, 39, 41 ; xii. 42 ; xiii. 15 ; xvii. 5, 6 ; xviii. 6 ;
xix. 8; xxii. 61 bis.
Jn iv. i ; vi. 23; xi. 2 ; xx. 20; xxi. 12.
Also in Appendix to Mk xvi. 19) 20: in the former verse
perhaps with 'tyo-ovs, as in the doubtful passage Lk xxiv. 3.
It is the constant title in the ' Gospel of Peter ', being used
13 times in the fragment known to us.
It is very often used of the risen and ascended Christ in the
other books of the N. -T. : perhaps Acts 20, Epistles 46,
Rev 2, but it is sometimes difficult to say whether Christ
or the Father is referred to. All these are cases in which
6 Kvpios stands alone, not with 'ir/o-oOs or 'l
Lk v. 36 ; xii. 41 ; xiii. 6 ; xiv. 7 ; xviii. i ; xx. 9.
Xoyos TOU ecu, 6.
Mt xv. 6 (?).
Mk vii. 13.
Lk v. i; viii. n, 21 ; xi. 28.
Acts iv. 31 ; vi. 2, 7 ; viii. 14; xi. i ; xiii. 5, 7, 44 (?), 46, 48 (?) ;
xvi. 32 ; xvii. 13; xviii. ii. (Perhaps also xii. 24.)
Rom ix. 6 ; i Cor xiv. 36 ; 2 Cor ii. 17 ; iv. 2 ; Phil i. 14 ; Col i.
25 ; i Thes ii. 13 bis ; i Tim iv. 5 ; 2 Tim ii. 9 ; Tit ii. 5.
Heb iv. 12 ; xiii. 7 ; i Pet i. 23 ; 2 Pet iii. 5 ; i Jn ii. 14 ; Rev i.
2 ; vi. 9; xix. 13; xx. 4.
raura.
.
viii. i.
xxi. i. (Cf.
[ATa raura.
Lk v. 27 ; x. i ; xii. 4 ; xvii. 8 ; xviii. 4.
Acts vii. 7 (LXX); xiii. 20; xv. 16; xviii. i.
Jn iii. 22 ; v. i, 14 ; vi. i ; vii. i ; xiii. 7 ; xix. 38 ;
fiera TOVTO, ii. 12 ; xi. 7, 1 1 ; xix. 28.)
44 Words and Phrases characteristic pt. i
Heb iv. 8 ; i Pet i. n ; Rev i. 19 ; iv. i, 2 ; vii. 9; ix. 12 ; xv.
5 ; xviii. i ; xix. i ; xx. 3. (Cf. /*era TOVTO, vii. i.)
Also in Appendix to Mk xvi. 12.
oticos = ' household ' or ' family '.
Ml x. 6 ; xv. 24 (both OIKOU 'lo-pnijA).
Lk i. 27, 33, 69 ; ii. 4 ; x. 5 (?) ; xvi. 27 (?) ; xix. 9.
Acts ii. 36; vii. 42 (LXX), (both OIKOS 'loyjaqX); x. 2; xi. 14;
xvi. 15, 31 ; xviii. 8.
i Cor i. 16; i Tim iii. 4, 5, 12; v. 4; 2 Tim i. 16; iv. 19;
Tit i. ii.
Heb viii. 8 bis (LXX), 10 (LXX, all three of Israel and Judah) ; xi. 7.
oVojma, nom., in ' whose name was ', &c.
Mt xxvii. 57 (rovvopa, perhaps an accusative).
Mk xiv. 32.
Lk i. 5, 26, 27 bis] ii. 25 ; viii. 41 ; xxiv. 13.
Acts xiii. 6.
Jn i. 6 ; iii. i ; xviii. 10.
Rev vi. 8; viii. 1 1 ; ix. ii.
= by name.
Mt xxvii. 32.
Mk v. 22.
Lk i. 5 ; v. 27 ; x. 38 ; xvi. 20; xix. 2 (with KaKovpevos) ; xxiii.
50; xxix. 18.
Actsv. i, 34; viii. 9; ix. 10, IT, 12, 33, 36; x. i; xi. 28; xii.
13 ; .xvi. i, 14 ; xvii. 34; xviii. 2, 7, 24 ; xix. 24 ; xx. 9 ; xxi.
10 ; xxvii. i ; xxviii. 7.
05, in attraction.
Mt xviii. 19 ; xxiv. 50.
Mk vii. 13.
Lki. 4; ii. 20*; iii. 19*; v. 9 (?) ; ix. 36, 43*; xii. 46; xv. 16 ;
xix. 37*; xxiii. 41; xxiv. 25*.
Acts i. i*, 22; ii. 22; iii. 21*, 25; vii. 16, 17, 45; viii. 24; ix.
36 ; x. 39* ; xiii. 39* ; xvii. 31 ; xx. 38 ; xxi. 19, 24 ; xxii. 10*,
15 ; xxiv. 21 ; xxv. 18 ; xxvi. 2, 16, 22.
Rom iv. 17 ; xv. 18 ; i Cor vi. 19 ; vii. i, 39 ; 2 Cor i. 4, 6 ; x. 8,
13; xii. 17, 21 ; Eph i. 6, 8; ii. 10; iii. 20; iv. i; 2 Thes
i. 4 ; Tit iii. 6.
. ii. Lk of each of the Synoptic Gospels 45
Jniv. 14; vii. 31, 39(?); xv. 20; xvii. 5 (?), 9, 1 1 ; xxi. 10.
Heb v. 8; vi. 10; ix. 20 (LXX); Jam ii. 5; i Pet iv. n;
2 Pet ii. 12 ; i Jn iii. 24 ; Jude 15 bis\ Rev xviii. 6.
The only ' attraction ' here considered is that of the relative
pronoun to a noun (expressed or understood). On the
various kinds of attraction see Winer, xxiv. 1-3.
* In these cases with navrav, naa-cov, or Trao-iv: cf. also
Jude 15.
ouxt, d\Xd.
Lk i. 60; xii. 51 ; xiii. 3, 5 ; xvi. 30.
Rom iii. 27 ; i Cor x. 29.
Jn ix. 9.
irapci = beyond.
Lk iii. 13; xiii. 2, 4; xviii. 14 (but with some doubt as to the
text).
Rom i. 25; iv. 18 ; xii. 3 ; xiv. 5 ; i Cor iii. ii ; 2 Cor viii. 3;
Gal i. 8, 9 (see Lightfoot, in foe.).
Heb i. 4, 9 ; ii. 7, 9 ; iii. 3 ; ix. 23 ; xi. 4, 1 1 ; xii. 24.
Acts xviii. 13 ; Rom i. 26; xi. 24; xvi. 17 are omitted, because
the sense seems rather to be ' contrary to ' ; and this may
possibly be the case also as to one or two of the cases given
above from the Epistles.
irapd TOUS iroSas.
Mt xv. 30.
Lk vii. 38 ; viii. 35, 41 ; xvii. 16.
Acts iv. 35, 37 ; v. 2 ; vii. 58 ; xxii. 3.
Cf. irpbs TOVS nodas Mk 2, Lk 1, Acts 1, Jll 1, Rev 1.
Trds, or aims, 6 Xaos.
Mt xxvii. 25.
Lk ii. 10; iii. 21*; vii. 29; viii. 47; ix. 13; xviii. 43; xix.
48*; xx. 6*; xxi. 38; xxiv. 19.
Acts iii. 9, ii ; iv. iof; v. 34; x. 41 ; xiii. 241%
Heb ix. 19.
Also in P eric ope de Adultera^ Jn viii. 2.
arras. "\" nets 6 Xaos '
irpos, used of speaking to.
Mk iv. 41*; x. 26 ; xii. 7*; xv. 31*; xvi. 3*. (xii. 12 is excluded.)
Lk i. 13, 1 8, 19, 34, 55, 61; ii. 15*, 18, 20, 34, 48, 49; iii. 12,
46 Words and Phrases characteristic Pt. i
13; iv. 4, 21, 23, 36*, 43; v. 4, 10, 22, 31, 33, 34, 36; vi. 3,
9, ii- vii. 24, 40, 50; viii. 21, 22, 25*; ix. 3, 13, 14, 23, 33,
43, 50, 57> 59> f 62 ] ; x - 2, 26, 2 9 J xi. i, 5, 39 J xii - i 3 ( ? )> '61
16, 22, 41 for (?); xiii. 7, 23; xiv. 3, 5, 7 foj, 23, 25; xv. 3,
22 ; xvi. i; xvii. i, 22; xviii. 9, 31 ; xix. 5, 8, 9, 13, 33, 39;
xx. 2, 3, 9, 23, 25, 41 ; xxii. 15, 52, 70 ; xxiii. 4, 14, 22 ; xxiv. 5,
10, 14*, 17, 18, 25, 32, 44. (i. 28 and xx. 19 are excluded.)
Actsi. 7; ii. 12, 29, 37, gSt; iii. 12, 22, 25; iv. i, 8, 19, 23; v.
8, 9t, 35; vii. 3; viii. 20, 26; ix. 10, lit, 15; x. 28; xi. 14,
20; xii. 8, 15, 21 (?); xv. 7, 36; xvi. 37; xviii. 6, 14; xix.
2, 2t; xxi. 37, 39; xxii. 8, 10, 21, 25; xxiii. 3 ; xxv. 16, 22t;
xxvi. i, 14, 26, 28t, 31*; xxviii. 4*, 17, 21, 25. (xxiii. 30 is
excluded.)
Rom x. 21 ; i Thes ii. 2.
Jn ii. 3 ; iii. 4 ; iv. 15, 33*, 48, 49 ; vi. 5, 28, 34 ; vii. 3, 35*, 50 ;
viii. 31, 33, 57 ; xi. 21 ; xii. 19* ; xvi. 17* ; xix. 24*.
Heb v. 5 ; vii. 21 (?) ; 2 Jn 12 (?) ; 3 Jn 14 (?)- (Heb i. 7, 8, 13 ;
xi. 1 8 are excluded.)
In Mt iii. 15 WH mg and Tisch have eiTrei/ Trpos avrov.
* irpbs aX\r)\ovs, eavrovs, cavrds. t In these 6 Cases in Acts
the verb is understood, not expressed.
<rrpa<J>eis.
Mt vii. 6 (o-TpatpfVTe s) ', ix. 22 ; xvi. 23.
Lk vii. 9, 44 ; ix. 55 ; x. 23; xiv. 25 ; xxii. 61 ; xxiii. 28.
Jn i. 38 ; XX. l6 (orpa^eio-a).
Always used of Jesus, except in Mt vii. 6 and Jn xx. 16.
Mk, who never uses arpafais, has fniarpafpfls twice (v. 30 ; viii.
33) ; Jn also has it in xxi. 22.
TI'S ; with optative (see Additional Note, p. 53).
Mk viii. 37(?).
Lk i. 62; vi. ii viii. 9; ix. 46; xv. 26 ; xviii. 36; xxii. 23.
Acts v. 24; x. 17 ; xvii. 18 ; xxi. 33.
Mk viii. 37 is more probably a subjunctive. So Swete and
Gould, in /oc., WH Notes, p. 168, and Moulton's note on
Winer, p. 360.
TIS e upwf ;
Mt vi. 27 ; vii. 9 (with avQpowos).
Lk xi. 5; xii. 25; xiv. 28; xv. 4 (with aftfpwTros) ; xvii. 7. (Cf.
xi. 1 1 Tiva ( vfjLo>f ', and xiv. 5 TWOS v/io>i> ;)
. ii. Lk of each of the Synoptic Gospels 47
TIS, with nouns.
Mt xviii. 12. (Contrast his more frequent use of ds with nouns,
P- 30-)
Mk xiv. 51 ; xv. 21.
Lk i. 5; vii. 2, 41 ; viii. 2, 27 (?) ; ix. 8, 19 ; x. 25, 30, 31, 33,
38 bis; xi. i, 27, 36; xii. 4, 16 ; xiii. 31 ; xiv. 2, 16; xv. n ;
xvi. i, 19, 20; xvii. 12; xviii. 2, 18, 35; xix. 12; xxi. 2;
xxii. 56, 59 (aXXoy TIS); xxiii. 8, 19, 26 ; xxiv. 22, 41.
Acts iii. 2 ; v. i, 2 ; viii. 9 w, 34 (-'pov riwSs), 36 ; ix. 10, 19*, 33,
36, 43; x. i, 5, 6, u, 48*; xi. 5; xiii. 6, 15; xiv. 8 ; xv. 2
(TIWW aXAous), 36* ; xvi. i, 9, 12*, 14, 16 ; xvii. 5, 6, 20, 21, 34;
xviii. 2, 14, 23, 24; xix. i, 14, 24, 32 (XXo ); xx. 9; xxi.
10 (?), 16, 34(aXAoTi); xxii. 12; xxiv. i bis t 18, 24* ; xxv. 13*,
14, 16, 19 foj, 26 ; xxvii. i, 8, 16, 26, 27, 39 ; xxviii. 3.
Rom i. n, 13; viii. 39; ix. n ; xiii. 9 ; xv. 26; i Cor i. 16 (TWI
aXAoi/) ; vii. 12 ; ix. 12 ; xi. 18 ; xiv. 24 ; xvi. 7 ; 2 Cor x. 8 ;
xi. i, 1 6 ; Gal vi. i ; Eph vi. 8 ; Phil ii. i quater ; iii. 4 (TIS . . .
oXXos) ; iv. 8 bis ; Col ii. 23 ; i Tim v. 4, 16, 24.
Jn i. 46 ; iv. 46 ; v. 5, 14 ; xi. i ; xii. 20 ; xxi. 5.
Heb ii. 7, 9 (both LXX) ; iv. 7 ; x. 27 ; xi. 40 ; xii. 15 (LXX), 16;
Jam i. 1 8 ; v. 12 ; Jude 4.
* With fjfjiepai. in these 6 places only.
Some adjectives as well as substantives are here included
under ' nouns '.
TIS is also used with ds in Lk xxii. 50 ; Jn xi. 49 ; and
perhaps in Mk xiv. 47, 51; and with 8vo in Lk vii. 19;
Acts xxiii. 23.
TO before the interrogative TIS or TI ;
Lk i. 62; ix. 46; xix. 48; xxii. 23, 24.
Acts xxii. 30.
Rom viii. 26.
And there is a similar use of TO before nws in Lk xxii. 2,4;
Acts iv. 21. Cf. also i Thes iv. i.
TO, T<X, before prepositions.
Mt xxiv. 17.
Mk ii. 2.
Lkii. 39 ; viii. 15 (?) ; x. 7 ; xix. 42 ; xxii. 37* ; xxiv. 19*, 27*, 35.
Acts i. 3*; (iv. 24; xiv. 15 ; xvii. 24 LXX); xviii. 25* ; xxiii. ii*,
15*; xxiv. 10*, 14, 22*, 22; xxv. 14; xxviii. 7*, 10, 15*.
48 Words and Phrases characteristic pt. i
Rom i. 15 ; ix. 5; xii. 18 ; xv. 17 ; i Cor xiii. 10 ; 2 Cor v. 10 ;
x. 7; Eph i. 10 bis ; vi. 21, 22*; Phil i. 12, 27*, 29; ii. 19*,
20*, 23* ; iv. 18 ; Col i. 20 bis; iii. 2; iv. 7, 8*.
Heb ii. 1 7 ; v. i ; 2 Pet i. 3 ; i Jn ii. 1 5, 1 6 ; (Rev x. 6 ter LXX).
* TO ire pi (in Lk xxii. 37 TO
TOU, before infinitives.
Mt ii. 13 ; iii. 13 ; xi. i ; xiii. 3 ; xxi. 32 ; xxiv. 45.
Lk i. 74, 77, 79; ii. 2ia(?), 24, 27; iv. io(LXX); v. 7 ; viii. 5 ;
ix. 51 ; x. 19 (?); xii. 42 ; xvii. i ; xxi. 22 ; xxii. 6 (?), 31 ; xxiv.
16, 25, 29, 45.
Acts iii. 2, 12; [v. 31 ;] vii. 19; ix. 15; x. 47 ; xiii. 47 (LXX) ;
xiv. 9- xv. 20; xviii. 10; xx. 2o(?), 27 (?), 30; xxi. 12; xxiii.
20; xxvi. 1 8 bis ' y xxvii. i.
Rom i. 24 ; vi. 6 ; vii. 3 ; viii. 12 ; xi. 8 bis, 10 (LXX) ; i Cor x.
13 ; Gal iii. 10 ; Phil iii. 10.
Heb x. 7 (LXX), 9 (LXX) ; xi. 5 ; Jam v. 1 7 ; i Pet iii. 10 (LXX).
From the above list are excluded 14 cases (viz. Mt vi. 8;
Lk ii. 2 1 b ', xxii. 15; Acts viii. 40; xxiii. 15; 2 Cor vii.
12; viii. ii b ' } Gal ii. 12; iii. 23; Jn i. 48 ; xiii. 19; xvii.
5 ; Heb ii. 15 ; Jam iv. 15) in which the TOV is governed by
a preposition (usually irpo) or by ew? used as a preposition ;
also 1 6 cases (viz. Lk i. 9, 57 ; ii. 6 ; iv. 42 ; Acts xiv. 18 ;
xx. 3 ; xxvii. 20; Rom xv. 22, 23; i Cor ix. 10; xvi. 4 ;
2 Cor i. 8 viii. ii a ; Phil iii. 21 ; Heb v. 12 ; i Pet iv. 17)
in which this genitive is mainly or entirely dependent upon
the previous noun or verb, which may perhaps be more or
less true of the cases marked (?) above. But even so the
telic use of roO with the infinitive remains a decidedly Lucan
characteristic.
The Grammars of Winer ( xliv. 4), Blass (p. 235), J. H.
Moulton (i. 216-18) maybe consulted.
= ' him '.
Mt xxvii. 32.
Lk ix. 26 xii. 5 ; xix. 14 ; xx. 12, 13 ; xxiii. 2, 18.
Acts ii. 23 ; iii. 16 ; v. 31, 37 ; (vii. 35 b) ; x. 40 ; xiii. 27 ; xv. 38 ;
xvi. 3 ; xxv. 24.
i Cor ii. 2 ; iii. 17 ; Phil ii. 23 ; 2 Thes iii. 14.
Jn v. 6 ; vi. 27 ; vii. 27 ; ix. 29 ; xviii. 40 j xix. 12 ; xxi. 21.
Heb viii. 3.
n.Lk of each of the Synoptic Gospels 49
So also TavTrjv, Lk xiii. 16 ; and cf. the use of TOVTOV,
Acts xiii. 23, 38.
4>of3eojAcu, used of fearing God.
Mt x. 28.
Lk i. 50; xii. 5 bis ; xviii. 2, 4 ; xxiii. 40.
Acts x. 2, 22, 35 ; xiii. 16, 26.
Col iii. 22 (where, however, TOV Kvpiov, not rov Qfov, is the better
reading).
Rev xiv. 7 ; xix. 5. (Cf. also xv. 4.)
fyuvri, with ytkojxai.
Mk i. 1 1 (?).
Lki. 44; iii. 22; ix. 35, 36.
Acts ii. 6; vii. 31 ; x. 13 ; xix. 34. (Cf. also ii. 2 fo f -)
Jn xii. 30.
Rev viii. 5 ; xi. 15, (19) ; (xvi. 18).
Plural in Rev.
X<xtpw, of rejoicing, not of greeting.
Mt ii. 10 ; v. 12 ; xviii. 13.
Mk xiv. n.
Lk i. 14 ; vi. 23; x. 20 bis ; xiii. 17 ; xv. 5, 32 ; xix. 6, 37; xxiL
5 ; xxiii. 8.
Acts v. 41 ; viii. 39; xi. 23 ; xiii. 48 ; xv. 31.
Rom xii. 12, 15 bis ; xvi. 19; i Cor vii. 30 &',$; xiii. 6; xvi. 17;
2 Cor ii. 3; vi. 10; vii. 7, 9, 13, 16; xiii. 9; Phil i. 18 i>is;
ii. 17, 1 8, 28; iii. i (?) ; iv. 4 bis (?), 10 ; Col i. 24; ii. 5 ;
i Thes iii. 9 ; v. 16.
Jn iii. 29; iv. 36 ; viii. 56; xi. 15 ; xiv. 28 ; xvi. 20, 22 ; xx. 20.
i Pet iv. 13 ; 2 Jn 4 ; 3 Jn 3 ; Rev xi. 10; xix. 7.
Bp. Lightfoot renders ' farewell ' in Phil iii. i, and suggests
a combination of the two senses in iv. 4.
Cf. fvtypaivti) on p. 19 above. And see Harnack, Acts of
App., Excursus III (E. T., pp. 277 ff.).
ws = ' when '.
Mk ix. 21.
Lk i. 23, 41, 44 ; ii. 15, 39 ; iv. 25 ; v. 4 ; vii. 12 ; xi. i ; xii. 58 ;
xv. 25; xix. 5, 29, 41; xx. 37 (?); xxii. 66; xxiii. 26; xxiv.
32 bis.
Acts i. 10 ; v. 24; vii. 23; viii. 36; ix. 23 ; x. 7, 17,25; xiii. 25,
HAWKINS E
50 Words and Phrases characteristic pt. i
29; xiv. 5; xvi. 4, 10, 15; xvii. 13; xviii. 5; xix. 9, 21;
xx. 14, 18; xxi. i, 12, 27; xxii. n, 25; xxv. 14; xxvii. 1,27;
xxviii. 4.
Rom xv. 24 ; i Cor xi. 34 ; Phil ii. 23 : with &v in all three cases.
Jn ii. 9, 23; iv. i, 40; vi. 12, 16; vii. 10; xi. 6, 20, 29, 32, 33;
xviii. 6 ; xix. 33 ; xx. 1 1 ; xxi. 9. (Also in Pericope de Adultera,
viii. 7.)
In some of these cases o>? can be best rendered by ' as ', but in
all of them there is some reference to time.
Harnack (Sayings of Jesus, E. T., p. 160) observes that such
'temporal clauses with $ are entirely absent from' the
passages which he assigns to ' Q '.
6, &c., with words inserted between the article and noun.
Mt vii. 3.
Mk iv. 19 ; v. 26 ; vi. 36.
Lk i. 70; vi. 42 ; ix. 12, 37; xvi. 10, 15; xix. 30.
Acts v. 16; viii. 14; x. 45; xiii. 42; xv. 23; xvi. 2; xvii. 13,
28; xix. 25, 38; xx. 21, 26; xxi. 21, 27; xxii. i; xxiii. 21;
xxv. 27; xxvi. 3, ii ; xxvii. 2.
Rom i. 12; ii. 27 bis ; iii. 26; iv. 12; vii. .22; viii. 18; ix. ii,
25 (LXX); xi. 5, 8, 21, 27 ; xvi. 5, 14, 15; i Cor iv. ii ; vi.
19; xvi. 19; 2 Cor i. n ; iv. 16 ; vii. 10 bis; viii. 2, 7, 14;
ix. 2; xii. ii ; Gal i. 2, 17; iv. 25, 26; Eph i. 15; iii. 16 ;
Phil ii. 30 bis; iii. 14; iv. 21 ; Col i. 2; ii. 5, 14; iii. 22; iv.
15 bis; i Tim iv. 14; v. 3, 5, 16 ; vi. 3, 19; 2 Tim i. 3, 5;
iv. 9; Tit i. 9; ii. 12; iii. 15; Phileni2.
Jn ix. 13.
Heb ii. 2 ; ix. 15; x. 32 ; xi. 7 ; Jam iii. 17; i Pet i. ii ter, 14 ;
iii. 2, 3, 15, 16, 19; iv. 2, 8, 12; v. 2, 9; 2 Pet i. 4, 9; ii. 7,
13 ; iii. 6, 7, 10 ; Jude 7 ; Rev ii. 12 (?) ; iii. i (?), 7 (?), 14 (?) ;
v. 13; xvii. i4(?).
This list, mainly derived from Bruder, p. 598, might perhaps
be enlarged. Adjectives agreeing with the substantive are
not included among the ' words inserted ', nor are conjunc-
tions and particles.
r)|j.e'pa with
Lk iv. 42 ; vi. 13 ; xxii. 66.
Acts xii. 18; xv. 35; xxiii. 12 ; xxvii. 29, 33, 39.
Appx.ii.Lk of each of the Synoptic Gospels 51
TroXiK or iroXeis after K<XT< distributive.
Lk viii. 1,4; xiii. 22 (the only plural).
Acts xv. 21, 36 ; xx. 23.
So KOT KK\r)aiav, Acts xiv. 23; and perhaps KHT ol<ov Acts ii.
46; v. 42.
:IS, OTdd^Teg.
Lk xviii. ii, 40 ; xix. 8.
Acts ii. 14; v. 20; xi. 13; xvii. 22; xxv. 18; xxvii. 21.
Xpo^oi (plural).
Lk viii. 29; xx. 9 ; xxiii. 8.
Acts i. 7 ; iii. 21 ; xvii. 30.
Rom xvi. 25 ; i Thes v. i ; 2 Tim i. 9 ; Tit i. 2.
i Pet i. 20.
xpovoi rat Kaipoi are coupled together in Acts i. 7 and i Thes
v. i only.
ADDITIONAL NOTES TO PART I.
Additional Note on the use of the Imperfect Tense (p. 9).
(a) The comparatively unfrequent use of this tense by Matthew
deserves notice, the numbers (excluding for the present the verb
substantive) being in the historical books Mt 94, Mk 228, Lk 259,
Acts 329, Jn 163. These figures include ffprj, though it is imperfect
in form only and not in force ; the occurrences of it are in Mt 15,
Mk 6, Lk 7, Acts 15, Jn 12.
No doubt the rarer use of the imperfect in Mt and Jn than in the
other historical books is in a considerable degree due to the larger
amount of discourse in proportion to narrative which they contain.
(&) The imperfect of the verb substantive with participles is also
rare in Mt, the numbers being
Mt Mk Lk Acts Jn
With any participles 6 22 45 36 17
With present participles only 4 16 28 24 8
For some of the many instances of this in LXX see Gen iv. 2,
17; vi. 12*; xiii. 10; xiv. 12; xviii. 22*; xxvi. 35; xxxix. 23;
xl. 6*; in all these cases except the three marked * the present
participle is used.
E 1
52 Words and Phrases characteristic Pt. i
On the subjects of this note may be consulted Allen's St.
Matthew, pp. xx-xxiii (showing Mt's changes from Mk) ; Dalman,
^- /> PP- 35 f- > besides the usual Grammars (J. H. Moulton's
figures slightly differ from the above, Gr., i. 227).
Additional Note on IXcyei/, cXeyoi' (p. 12).
The extremely few 1 occurrences of these imperfects in LXX are
as follows : IXey/ or eAeyt is found in Judg xix. 30 ; 2 Ki xv. 2 ;
xvi. 7 ; [3 Ki iii. 22 ;] 2 Chro xx. 2 1 ; i Esdr viii. 70 (74) ; [Esther
ii. 15 ; iii. 4 ;] Job i. 5 ; [Tobit x. 6 ;] 2 Mace iii. 13 ; xiv. 26 ; xv.
22; 4 Mace iv. 2, 6, 12; ix. 28; xi. 12, 20; xiii. u, 12; xviii.
6, 12 (23 cases). And the plural eXeyov is found in Gen xix. 5;
Numbxxxii. 5, 16 ; Deut i. 25; [Judg xviii. 8 ;] i Ki xii. 10; xviii.
7 ; xix. 24 ; 2 Chro v. 13 ; Prov iv. 4 ; Is vi. 3 ; Jer xlv. 22 ; Dan
Theod vii. 5 ; 4 Mace vi. 13 ; xiii. 13, 18; xvii. i (17 cases).
The five cases enclosed in square brackets are not found in the
B-text. Pss Ixxii. (Ixxiii.) 15 and xciii. (xciv.) 16 and 2 Mace iv.
47 were purposely omitted as conditional sentences ; and 4 Mace
xvi. 15 as being a mere mistake for eXfyes-.
The above list of (23 + 17 =) 40 cases is of interest as showing
in the later books, as compared with the earlier, the gradual loss on
the whole (for Numb xxxii. 5, 16; Deut i. 25 may be exceptions)
of the ' imperfect ' sense of continuity or repetition in eXeyei/ and
c \fyov in narrative. It is to be remembered as to 4 Mace, in which
14 out of the 40 instances are found, that according to the latest
and best authority it ' must be placed at the close of the first century
of our era' (Thackeray, Gram, of 0. T. in Greek, p. 6).
Compare the use of e^, mentioned in the preceding note.
Additional Note on oupayos and oupavoi (p. 30).
The singular and plural are used as ' follows by the various
writers in the New Testament. It will be seen that Matthew,
Hebrews, and 2 Peter are the only books in which the plural is
more frequent than the singular ; but in the Pauline Epistles they
are almost equal.
1 Extremely few in comparison with ftwcv, &c., as maybe seen by glancing
at the 50 columns occupied by tltrtiv in Hatch and Redpath's Concordance.
Add. Notes of each of the Synoptic Gospels 53
it 2 i 3
Mt Mk Lk Acts Paul Jn Heb Jam i Pet 2 Pet Jn Rev
ovpuVoa 271231241118 3 2 2 I O 51
ovpavoi 55 542 10 070150 I
The one case in Rev is xii. 12, a quotation from or reminis-
cence of LXX, in which ovpavoi occurs 4 times with
(vtypaivciv, viz. Deut xxxii. 43; Ps xcv. n; Is xliv. 23;
xlix. 13 (eixpp. is also found with the singular in i Chro
xvi. 31 ; Is xlv. 8).
The plural is not frequent in LXX : it only occurs about 50
times against more than 600 occurrences of the singular. It is
least uncommon in the Psalms, where it is used about 30 times,
and the singular about 50 times.
Additional Note on the use of the Optative Mood.
Besides the 17 (? 18) instances of the optative which have been
entered once or more under the headings of av (p. 35\ c"rj (p. 38), and
r/V (p. 46), the only cases of that mood in the historical books are
Mk xi. 14 (<f>dyoi, see p. 133), Lk i. 38 (ye'i/otro) and XX. l6 (/u?) ye'i/oiro),
and Acts xvii. n, 2*1 bis, xxiv. 19, xxv. i6bis, 20, xxvii. 12, 39
(the last two cases being in a ' We-Section '). When we add together
all these occurrences of optative forms, they amount to Mt 0,
Mk 1 (?2), Lk 11, Acts 17, Jn a remarkable result. In the
Epistles there are about 34 instances, of which the Pauline
exclamation /u?) yeVon-o supplies 14. It is well known that the optative
was obsolescent in the ordinary Greek of N. T. times.
PART II
INDICATIONS OF SOURCES
SECTION I
IDENTITIES IN LANGUAGE
THESE are so numerous and so close, and in many cases
they contain constructions or words which are so very
unusual or even peculiar, that the use of written Greek
documents is prima facie suggested by them. Certainly
they throw very serious difficulties in the way of an
exclusively 'oral theory'. 1 And, so far as they extend,
they render the hypothesis of independent translations 3
1 They would make such a theory impossible if we did not know that the
memories of teachers and learners were trained and cultivated in Judaea to
an extent far beyond anything within our own experience. See Schiirer,
Hist, of Jewish People, II. i. 324 (E. T.) ; and Schiller-Szinessy on the
Mishnah in Enc. Brit., xvi. 504. Some interesting parallels and illustrations
from the East may be seen in Driver's Genesis, p. xliv ; Max Muller's Last
Essays, Series I, pp. 122-37 > Geden's Studies in Eastern Religions, pp. 13,
26, 251. And there is a western parallel in Caesar's account (B. G., vi.
14) of the exclusively oral teaching of ' a great number of verses' by the
Druids, referred to by York Powell (Life, ii. 242), who thought that ' in
these days of print we are apt to undervalue the possibilities of human
memory' (ib. i. 206). But it may be doubted whether the matter committed
to memory in these cases was often parallel in kind to the contents of
our historical Gospels ; see Burkitt, The Gospel History, &c., p. 145.
2 The past tense used by Papias (fofdpHnur* o' avra cliy fy Swards eVatrroj,
see p. xiii above) tells us that such independent translations of the Matthaean
Logia had been made at first, but does not say that they continued in use
during his own time (and we must remember that Eusebius may be giving
us but a very small and incomplete fragment of what Papias wrote).
Josephus tells us at the beginning of his Jewish War that he himself trans-
lated it into Greek, after writing it in the language of his country (TT) irarp'up).
And i Mace 'was written originally in Hebrew (or Aramaic)', though 'it
has come down to us only in the form of a Greek translation, which was
probably in existence as early as the time of Josephus ' (Schiirer, op. cit.,
II. iii. 8f.). So there may have been similarly an early and generally
accepted translation of the Logia.
1
Identities in Language
55
from the Logia, or from any other Aramaic source, ex-
tremely improbable.
These identities are of three kinds (A, B. C) :
A. In the construction of sentences.
(i) In Mark, Matthew, and Luke (Mark is placed first, as
being admittedly the oldest document) :
i.
Mk ii. IO Iva 5e (IdrJTf
xrX. Xe'yei rw irapa-
2ot Xe'yeo,
KT\.
eyetpe
Mt ix. 6 Iva 8e fldfJTe
KT\. rdre Xeyei r
TT a pa\vT (,<(>' eyeipe
KrX.
Lk v. 24
KrA. fi
TO) Trapa-
2.
Mk iii. 19 Kctl 'Iov8av
nap-
a\JTQV.
Mt X. 4 feat 'lou^as 6
8ovs avrov.
KT\.
Lk vi. 1 6 eat 'lou
)^, 6s cycvcro
Observe also in Mk xiv. 10; Mt xxvi. 14; Lk xxii. 3, and
again in Mk xiv. 43; Mt xxvi. 47; Lk xxii. 47 the
repetition of the fact that Judas was ( one of the twelve ' or
' of the number of the twelve '.
Mk xii. 14; Lk xx. 21 eV aX??- Mt xxii. 16 rfjv 68bv roC O*oC
jy 666r rov 0eoO
a\r]6ciq 8i8d
(ii) In Mark and Matthew :
Mk i. 1 6 ; Mt iv. 18 rjaavyap aXeels.
2 1 .
Mk V.
KrX.
Mt IX. 21 e'Xeyfy yap eV favrfj } 'Ecu/
yap OTL 'Ecu/ a\l/w-
a^cufjLai KT\.
Parenthetical additions of explanations.
56
Indications of Sources
pt. ii
Mk viii. 2 ; Mt XV. 32 r}8r] fjfifpai Tpels npoo-ufvovo-iv fioi KT\.
On the construction see Winer's Grammar, Ixii. 2 and note ;
Blass, p. 85; J. H. Moulton, i. 70. In Mk WH mg has
ialv with B onl.
4-
Mk xiii. 14; Mt Xxiv. 156 dvayivwo-Kwv vofiTti).
5 1 -
Mk xiy. 2 ehfyov ydp } Mi] cv rfi
foprft, fJLTjrroTe carat 0dpvj3os TOV
\aov.
Mt XXVi. 5 fXeyof oV, Mr) cv rrj
fOpTrj, Iva p.f] 66pv/3os yfvrjrai (V
TOJ Xaa>.
6 1 .
Mk XV. IO (i
yap ort ia
bOovov napadedwKfio'av avrbv oi
Mt XXVii. 1 8 rjdd yap on 8ta
(iii) In Mark and Luke :
Mk i. 7 ^ ^ K *'/** iKavbs
\vo~ai TOV IfiavTa T)V v
Lk iii. 1 6 ov OVK dp\ IKOVOS \vtrai
rov Ifj-avni TO>V vnoorjpdTwv avrov.
[But D and other Western authorities omit
Cf. also Jn i. 27. The only other instances of this construc-
tion (ou . . . avrov) seem to be Mk vii. 25 ; Acts xv. 17;
[i Pet ii. 24 Tisch but not WH or R ;] Rev iii. 8 ; vii. 2, 9 ;
xiii. 8, 12 ; xx. 8. See Blass's Gram., p. 175, and J. H.
Moulton's, i. 94, 237.
Lk viii. 29 irapr)yye\\v yap
TO) aKaQapTO)
OTTO TOV dv0a>7rov.
Mk V. 8 (\fyev yap
TO TTVei'fJM TO aKadapTOV K TOV-
dvQpwTrov.
The appeal of the demons having been first recorded, the
cause of it is thus added afterwards, in both Gospels.
1 Parenthetical additions of explanations. Also notice r\v ydp KT\. in
Mk x. 22, Mt xix. 22, and (though not with identical words following)
Lk xviii. 23.
i Identities in Language 57
(iv) In Matthew and Luke :
i.
Mt Vil. 3 TT)V 8f CV TW (TO) 0<f)da\fJl(j)
Lk vi. 42 rrjv fv TW o(0aX/zo> crov
Such an insertion of words between the article and its noun
is found here only in Matthew, but 3 times in Mark, and
frequently in Luke, Acts, and other books. See pp. 27
and 50.
B. In single words and short phrases. 1
(i) In Mark, Matthew, and Luke :
i.
ipdfi Mkii. 20; Mt ix. 15 ; Lk v. 35.
or anaipopai here only in N. T. : but the active dnaipo)
is frequent in LXX.
2.
Mk ii. 21 ; Mt ix. 1 6 ; Lk v. 36 bis.
Here only in N. T. : LXX 1. Used in Classical Greek of
a cloak or of hangings, not of a patch.
3-
Mk ii. 23 ; Mt xii. i ; Lk vi. i.
here only in N. T. : LXX 4.
4-
ri\\ovTfs Mk ii. 23 ; TiXXett- Mt xii. i ; ertXXov Lk vi. i.
n'AXw here only in N. T. : LXX 3. In Greek generally, rt'XXo>
is used of hair, fy>e'rro> of flowers and fruit.
1 As a rule, the identities in language which seem to the compiler most
remarkable have been placed first in the following lists. But this rule has
not been uniformly observed, for it has been thought best to group together
instances taken from the same passage, e.g. the two from Mk ii. 20, 21, and
the four from Mk viii. 3-7. The appended notes draw attention to the
rarity of the word, and to the consequent degree of unlikelihood that any-
thing but a common written origin can account for its use in more than one
Gospel. In these notes, as elsewhere, the figures printed in thick type
denote that the word or phrase occurs so many times in the New Test, or its
various books, or in the Septuagint.
58 Indications of Sources pt. n
irtpov
5-
( Mk ii. 9 ; Mt ix. 5; Lk v. 23.
only once besides in N. T. (evKomarcpov Lk xvi. 1 7) :
LXX 2. Apparently not common in Classical Greek.
6.
Mk x. 23 ; Mt xix. 23 ; Lk xviii. 24.
The adverb here only in N. T. : 8vo-Ko\os only in the following
verse of Mark: LXX 1. But both adjective and adverb
are in classical use.
7-
68oi> (rov Mk i. 2 ; Mt xi. io ', Lk vii. 27.
In quotation from Mai iii. i where LXX has eVi/SAe'^n-ai.
Karao-Kcvafa also Lk 1, Heb 6, i Pet 1, LXX 30, but nowhere
with 6d6s or any similar word.
8.
Mk viii. 36 ; fy/u^// Mt xvi. 26 ; ^iwBfis Lk ix. 25.
o> elsewhere only Paul 3 ; LXX 7.
9-
rm Mk xii. 6 ; Mt xxi. 37 ; Lk xx. 13.
elsewhere in this sense with ace. only Lk 2, Heb 1,
and LXX about 6 times.
io.
v avrov Mk v. 40 ; Mt ix. 24 : Lk viii. 53.
o) here only in N. T. : LXX about 22.
ii.
ou pr] y(v<TO>VT<u Gavdrov Mk IX. I ; Mt Xvi. 28 ; Lk ix. 27.
The phrase is also used in Jn viii. 52 and Heb ii. 9 : never in
LXX, but cf. 2 Ki iii. 35 ou p.r) yeucrw/itu aprov.
12.
d<pel\(v Mk xiv. 47 ; Mt xxvi. 51 ; Lk xxii. 50, with vrdpiov, &>Tt'oi>,
and ovs respectively.
d<paip(v also Lk 3, Paul 1, Heb 1, Rev 2, but never in a physical
sense as here. dnoKonTw would have seemed a more likely
word, as in Jn xviii. io, 26, and in Judg i. 6, 7. In
i Identities in Language 59
LXX, however, a^atpeeo is used of cutting off the head in
Gen xl. 19; i Kixvii. 46, 51 ; 2 Ki iv. 7 (?) ; xvi. 9 ; xx. 22;
4 Ki vi. 32; Judith xiii. 8; xiv. 15; i Mace vii. 47 (of
right hand also) ; xi. 17 ; 2 Mace i. 16 (?). Cf. also Lev:
16; i Ki xxiv. 5, 6, 12.
fj.axaipS)v KCU v\a>v Mk xiv. 43, 48 ; Mt xxvi. 47, 55 ; Lk xxii. 52.
in this sense here only in N. T. : and very rare in LXX,
and paKTrjpta being the usual words : see, however,
2 Ki xxiii. 21; Is x. 15; also 2 Ki xxi. 19; xxiii. 7;
i Chro xx. 5 of the staff of a spear.
14.
v/x&n/ Mk ix. 19 ; Mt xvii. 17 ; Lk ix. 41.
Here only in Gospels : but Acts 1, Paul 10, Heb 1 :
LXX 12.
is*.
viol TOV vvp(pa)vos Mk ii. 19; Mt ix. 15 ; Lk v. 34.
wfjifpav here and Mt xxii. 10 (?) only in N. T. : in LXX only
Tobit 2.
I6 1 .
ee'6ero Mk xii. I ; Mt xxi. 33 ; Lk XX. 9 ; also eK&BO-erat
Mt xxi. 41.
tie&tdo/Mu here only in N. T. : LXX 18, but not in this sense of
'letting out', which, however, is classical (Swete on Mk
xii. i).
The unusual grammatical form e&6ro (see WH, Notes,
pp. 167 f.) occurs in the A-text of Ex ii. 21 and i Mace x.
58 : it is also paralleled in the papyri (J. H. Moulton, Gram.,
i- 55)-
V*.
Ka.Tao-Krjvo'iv Mk IV. 32 ; Mt xiii. 32 j KaTfa-KrjvaHrev Lk xiii. 19.
KdTCKTKrjvoa) besides in N. T. only Acts ii. 26 from LXX : in
LXX it is very frequent.
1 These three words or phrases being such as would be required, or at
least such as would be naturally suggested, by the subject-matter, not much
stress is laid upon them.
60 Indications of Sources pt. n
(ii) In Mark and Matthew l :
i.
KctTtov(Tidovaiv avrwv Mk X. 42 ; Mt XX. 25.
a'a> is not quoted as occurring anywhere else.
2.
Mk vii. 13 ; Mt xv. 6.
co besides in N. T. only Gal iii. 17. In LXX 7 (6 of the
cases being in 2 Mace) ; and several times in the fragments
of the other Greek versions.
3-
Mk vii. 27 ; Mt xv. 26; Kvvdpia Mk vii. 28 ; Mt xv. 27.
here only in N. T. , and never in LXX.
4-
OTTO Ta)i> \lfixiwv Mk vii. 28 ; Mt xv. 27.
tytxtov here only in N. T. : never in LXX or in Classical
Greek.
5-
Mk viii. 3 ; Mt xv. 32.
vf)<rTis here only in N. T. : vfjarr^s or vfja-ns LXX 1.
6.
fK\v0f)<rovTai eV rf) 6So> Mk viii. 3 ; (K\v8)(nv ev rfj 65<5 Mt XV. 32.
eVXuo) besides also Paul 1, Heb 2: frequent in LXX, and
about 8 times in exactly the same sense as here.
7
tay Mk viii. 4 ; (v eprjfjiia Mt XV. 33.
ia here only in Gospels, and Paul 1, Heb 1 : LXX 7. In
N. T. eprjuos TO'TTO? and jj ep^/zoy are the usual forms.
8.
Mk viii. 7 ; Mt xv. 34.
here only in N. T., and never in LXX.
9-
Mk xiv. 2O ; 6 cupfyas Mt XXVI. 23.
here only in N. T., and never in LXX.
1 It would be very easy to lengthen this list.
Identities in Language 6r
? TO rpu/SlXioj/ Mk XIV. 2O ; eV r< Tpuj3Xto> Mt XXvi. 23.
here only in N. T. : LXX 19.
ii.
p.v\os OVIKOS Mk ix. 42 ; Mt xviii. 6.
o'ff here only in N. T. and never in LXX or elsewhere.
But J. Lightfoot (quoted by Swete on Mk) and others show
that there was a Jewish phrase of which this would be
an obvious rendering. (See Enc. Bill., iii. 3094.) And
the word itself occurs in the papyri cited as BU 913
(ist century A. D.).
12.
Mk xiii. 2O bis ; e'oAo/3u>$/7(rai>, Ko\o/3(a6f)(rovTai
Mt xxiv. 22.
KoAo/3oa> here only in N. T. : LXX 1, but more frequent in the
fragments of the other Greek versions.
vfuv Mk xiii. 23 ; Mt xxiv. 25.
S) here only in Gospels : Paul 4, Heb 1 (?), 2 Pet 1,
Jude 1 : LXX 12.
14.
dvTa\\ayfj.a Mk viii. 37 ; Mt xvi. 26.
Here only in N. T. : LXX 10. The parallel in Sir xxvi. 14
is remarkable.
15-
vviv at dvva/j.fis ft* niro) Mk VI. 14 ; m dwafifif evfpyovaiv fv aura
Mt xiv. 2.
fo) here only in Gospels, but in Epistles 18 : LXX 7.
1 6.
ls Mk viii. 33; Mt xvi. 23.
w here only in Gospels ; but Acts 1, Paul 23 : LXX 15.
e'/i^s KOI aKoas TroXe/xwi/ Mk xiii. 7 ; Mt xxiv. 6.
In this sense, the plural dicoca' here only in N. T., and LXX 2.
62 Indications of Sources Pt. n
18.
pi>r)fji6(rvvov Mk xiv. 9 ; Mt xxvi. 13.
Besides this, in N. T. only Acts x. 4. But LXX 70 : so it is
perhaps the obvious word here ; cf. e. g. Ex xvii. 14 LXX.
19.
o-uXXa|3eii> fie Mk xiv. 48 ; Mt xxvi. 55.
avXXa/Lt/3aj/a> here only in Mark and Matthew ; but also in this
sense Lk 2, Jn 1, Acts 4, and frequently in LXX.
20.
rrpoa-\a^6fjii>os avrov Mk Vlii. 32 ; Mt xvi. 22.
7rpoffXa/u/3ai/< here only in Gospels ; also Acts 5, Paul 5, and
LXX 8, but never with exactly this meaning.
21.
fjSrj &pas iro\\rjs yfi>op.fi>T]S * . . 77877 &pa no\\r) Mk vi. 35 ; f) wpa fj8r)
irapri\6fv Mt xiv. 15.
&pa, with this meaning of ' daytime ', apparently here only in
N.T. (cf., however, Mk xi. n).
22.
ou j3X7ret? fls Trpoffairov Mk xii. 14; Mt xxii. 1 6.
Here only in N. T., and not in LXX, for i Sam xvi. 7 is not
an exact parallel. Lk has the more usual ov \appdvcis irpov-
(Gal ii. 6 and LXX).
23-
Mk xiv. 13 ; Mt xxvi. 37.
eo) in N. T. only here and Phil ii. 26. Not in LXX, but
Aq. and Symm.
(iii) In Mark and Luke :
T.
Mk V. 15 ; Lk viii. 35.
iparifo here only in N. T. : not in LXX, nor elsewhere.
2.
vvTa Mk v. 15 ; Lk viii. 35.
<ra><ppov(a) here only in Gospels : also Paul 3, i Pet 1. Not
in LXX.
Identities in Language 63
3-
Mk vi. 41; Lk ix. 16 (Mt xiv. 19 has the more usual
here only in N. T. : LXX 1.
4-
Mk xiv. 15 ; Lk xxii. 12.
Here only in N. T. : not in LXX. (vnepaov is used for an
1 upper room*, Acts 4; also LXX 24.)
5-
v. 35 ; /^m o-KvXXe Lk viii. 49.
besides in N. T. only Lk vii. 6 (/^ o-^XXov) and Mt ix. 36 :
not in LXX. In Classical Greek usually in a physical sense.
6.
I Mk i. 25; Lk iv. 35.
co also Mt 2, Mk 1, Paul 2, i Pet 1 : LXX 3.
7-
Mk xiv. 47 ; Lk xxii. 50.
A remarkable case, ifrts is genuine in both places, for it is
only found elsewhere in N. T. with a numeral in Lk vii. 19 ;
Jn xi. 49; Acts xxiii. 23 and perhaps Mk xiv. 51 : but
WH bracket it in Mk xiv. 47, it being omitted by NAL
and a few other authorities.
(iv) In Matthew and Luke :
i.
Mt vi. 1 1 ; Lk xi. 3.
not elsewhere in N. T., nor in LXX, nor anywhere
else. But perhaps this identity may be accounted for by
liturgical use.
2.
Mt viii. 20; Lk ix. 58.
(f)a>\(6s here only in N. T. : not in LXX.
3-
Mt viii. 2o ; Lk ix. 58.
here only in N. T. : LXX 5, but always of the
temple or of the Divine Presence.
64 Indications of Sources pt. n
4-
cv ycvvriTois yvvatK&v Mt xi. II ; Lk vii. 28.
ywr)Tos never elsewhere in N. T. : in LXX only ycvv^To^ ywainos
Job 5.
5,6*.
Ktipfos, SoKoV, each 3 times in Mt vii. 3-5 ; Lk vi. 41, 42.
Both here only in N. T. : in LXX Kdpfos 1, 8o<6s 1O.
7 1 -
SiajSAe'^ei? Mt vii. 5 ; Lk vi. 42.
8ta/3XcVa) besides in N. T. only Mk viii. 25 : not in LXX.
8.
an\oi>s Mt vi. 22 ; Lk xi. 34.
Here only in N. T. : LXX 1, but more frequent in Aq.,
Symm., Theod.
9-
<f)o>Tiv6i> Mt vi. 22 ; Lk xi. 34 ; also 36 bis.
6s besides in N. T. only Mt xvii. 5 : LXX 2.
10.
v Mt vi. 23 ; Lk xi. 34 ; also 36.
here only in N. T. : LXX. 16.
ii.
crt<rapa>pfi>uv Mt xii. 44 Lk xi. 25.
o-a/306a besides in N. T. only Lk xv. 8 : not in LXX.
12.
IKOVOS tva . . . ct<r&0gs Mt viii. 8 ; Lk vii. 6.
iKavos with Iva here only in N. T. : not in LXX.
13-
p.r) (froprjQrjTe airb rS>v Mt X. 28 ; Lk Xli. 4.
(po^fofiai dno here only in N. T. : but in LXX 49 times (25 of
them with H-poo-owou) out of about 440 occurrences of the
verb.
1 It is'remarkable thaf in this list these are the only cases found in the
Sermons on the Mount and on the Level Place.
i Identities in Language 65
14.
fV f'/zoi . . . o/ioXoy/yo-o) Koyoo (Lk 6 vlos TOV avQpanov 6po-
ev (ivra, Mt X. 32 ; Lk xii. 8.
6/ioXoy/a> eV here only in N. T. (for the sense is different in
Rom x. 9) ; and not in LXX. See J. H. Moulton, Gram.,
i. 104, and Allen on Mt x. 32.
Iva fj,ov vno rrjv o-Ttyrjv elrreXdys Mt viii. 8 ; tva vno rr\v a-rcy>]v
flffeXQys Lk vii. 6.
eyri besides in N. T. only Mk ii. 4 : LXX 5.
16.
dire Xdyw Mt viii. 8 ; Lk vii. 7.
There seems to be no close parallel to this dative in N. T. :
Alford refers only to Gal vi. 1 1
Mt xii. 25 ; Lk xi. 17.
fpr)[ji6a> besides in N. T. only Rev 3 : frequent in LXX.
18.
ffpdaacv e'0 J upas Mt xii. 28 '; Lk xi. 2O.
<pddva> besides in N. T. only Paul 5 : LXX 29 : with eW only
Paul l, LXX 6.
C. Longer passages in which many words are identical.
Here especially it should be borne in mind that in the
earliest Christian days there was undoubtedly a habit and
a power of accurate oral transmission, to which there is no
parallel now. We therefore may not say of any closely
similar passages that they cannot be thus accounted for.
If however such passages as the following are examined
together, as they may be, e. g. in Tischendorfs Synopsis
Evangelic d) or, better still, in Rushbrooke's Synopticon^ it
seems difficult to believe that they owe nothing to a
written Greek source. As to the narratives especially, it
66 Indications of Sources pt. n
appears very unlikely that they could have been handed
on so exactly without the use of documents, even if this
was the case with the discourses.
Tisch Synop-
(i) Narratives (including sayings). Syn. EV. ticon.
Mk i. 16-20; Mt iv. 18-22: Calling of Peter,
Andrew, James, and John . . . 31 4
Mk i. 21-8; Lk iv. 31-7: The Demoniac in the
Synagogue at Capernaum . . . . 32 5
Mk i. 40-4 ; Mt viii. 2-4 ; Lk v. 12-14 : Cleansing
of the Leper . . . . . . 35 8
Mtviii. 9, 10 ; Lk vii. 8, 9 : The Centurion's Faith 1 42 148
Mk vi. 41 ; Mt xiv. 19; Lk ix. 16: Feeding the
5,000 . .; 59 41
Mk viii. 1-9; Mt xv. 32-9 : Feeding the 4,000 . 66 49 f.
Mk xiv. 32-4 ; Mt xxvi. 36-8 : Gethsemane . 153 108
Mk xiv. 48, 49 ; Mt xxvi. 55, 56 : ' Are ye come
out,' &c. (cf. Lk xxii. 52, 53) . . . . 154 in
Mk xv. 29-32 ; Mt xxvii. 39-44 : Jesus mocked on
the Cross 165 121
(ii) Discourses.
Mk ii. 9, 10 ; Mt ix. 5, 6 ; Lk v. 23, 24 : * Whether
is easier,' &c. . . . . . . .36 10
Mk ii. 19, 20 ; Mt ix. 15 ; Lk v. 34, 35 : ' Can the
children of the bridechamber/ &c. . . -37 12
Mk xiii. 1923; Mtxxiv. 21-5: ' Shall be tribula-
tion, such as,' &c. . . . . . -139 95 f.
Mt xii. 27, 28 ; Lk xi. 19, 20 : 'By whom do your
sons/ &c 47 *7
Mt xii. 41, 42; Lk xi. 31, 32: 'The men of
Nineveh ' and ' the queen of the south ' 2 . . 91 158
Mt xxiv. 43-51 ; Lk xii. 39-46 : * If the master of
the house had known/ &c. . . . . 95 168
The above are instances which have impressed the compiler
of these lists, but there are other similarities as prolonged. 3
1 This is the only non-Marcan narrative.
2 But with change of order.
3 Some of them are named by Bacon, Introd. to N. T. } p. 179 note.
i Identities in Language 67
From these * identities of language ', which seem all but
unaccountable unless we admit some use of written Greek
documents, we have now to turn to other phenomena,
which point, at least as distinctly, to the influences of oral
transmission. 1
SECTION II
WORDS DIFFERENTLY APPLIED
WE not infrequently find the same, or closely similar,
words used with different applications or in different con-
nexions, where the passages containing them are evidently
parallel. How could these variations have arisen ? Copy-
ing from documents does not seem to account for them ; 2
but it is not at all difficult to see how they might have
arisen in the course of oral transmission. Particular
words might linger in the memory, while their position in
a sentence was forgotten ; and in some cases they might
become confused with other words of similar sound. 3
1 On the combined use of these two kinds of sources see p. 217.
2 I do not forget the valuable caution against making a priori assertions
' as to what a serious writer will do, or will not do, in the way of dealing
with the documents which he embodies in his work', which is supplied
by the Rev.- C. Plummer's article in the Expositor, July, 1889 (3rd Series,
vol. x. pp. 23 ff.), entitled 'A Mediaeval Illustration of the Documentary
Theory of the Origin of the Synoptic Gospels'. But after carefully
examining his illustrations of the freedom which mediaeval chroniclers
allowed themselves in adapting, altering, and combining the MSS, which
lay before them, I still hold that the numerous instances of l words differently
applied' which I have collected in this Section (though Mr. Plummer does at
the bottom of p. 28 give one interesting parallel to them), and the ' trans-
positions ' which I have collected in the next Section, are, on the whole and
when taken together, inexplicable on any exclusively documentary theory.
See Moffatt's Historical N. TV, p. 616, notes; also E. D. Burton, Principles
of Literary Criticism, tfc., pp. 20-2, referring to the literary methods
(i) of N. T. writers as to quotations from O. T., (2) of the author of the
Appendix to Mark, (3) of Tatian in his Diatessaron ; and Hobson, The Diat.
of Tatian and the Synoptic Problem (Chicago, 1904), especially pp. 10 and
75 ff.
3 Some of the cases are such as might be ' clerical errors ', arising either
in the first MSS. or more probably afterwards, if the scribes wrote from
dictation. l The ear would not always be a certain guide to the sense. One
F 2
68
Indications of Sources
pt. ii
Special attention will here be called to words of these
kinds by the use of thick type.
We may trace such variations :
A. In the reports of the sayings of Jesus (though on the
whole these are more accordant than any other
parts of the Synoptic Gospels).
B. In the attribution of the same, or very similar, words
to different speakers.
C. In the use of the same, or very similar, words as part of
a speech and as part of the Evangelist's narrative.
D. In the rest of the Synoptic narratives.
The cases which seem to the present compiler most
forcible will, as a rule, be placed first in the four lists ; but
no stress is to be laid on this order.
A. In the reports of the sayings of Jesus,
i.
Mk IV. 19 e
eiairopcuo-
ownriyouaiy rbv \6yov.
(Mt xiii. 22 (Tvvnviyfi rbv
Xdyoi/.)
Lk viii. 14 OVTOL . . .
owTnayorrai.
2,
Mk xii. 2O OVK
Mt xxii. 25 p) exa>v oWp/ta d<f>Tj-
K.GV rfjv yvvaiKa avrov.
Mt XXiv. 14 Kd\
Lk xxi. 13 ... anopr)-
arerat vfj.lv eis (AapTU-
Mk xiii. 9, 10 ... eis
paprupiov avrois. Kal
fls iravTa TO. fdvrj . . . ruplOK TTCKTIV rols
<rtv. (Cf.alSQX. 1 8,
which more nearly
resembles Mk xiii. 9.)
Thus the words fls papTvpiov have different applications in all
three Gospels.
word would sometimes be mistaken for another of similar sound but different
meaning.' G. L. Gary, The Synoptic Gospels, p. 334.
11
Words differently applied
69
Mk xiii. 14 orav 8e
i8r)T TO /36VXvy/na rrjs
Mt xxiv. 15 orai' ovv
I'Srjre ro ft8(\vyp.a TTJS
is used here only in N. T.
Lk xxi. 2O Gray Se
iSrjTe . . . yvcore ort
fjyyiKev t) epr)p.ajcr<?
Mt X. 27 6 Xe'ya) v/*ii> eV rrj oxoTia,
curare t r
us
Lk xii. 3 oo-a eV rrj o-KOTia
fv ra> (a>ri <XKOua6r]aTCU, Kal o
vrpbs TO ous eXaXqo-are eV roiff
u eVi TWI>
il 6 eiy TO
JeT 5 KYjpuar em TOJK
These two sayings are assigned to different occasions by Mt
and Lk, Mt giving them in a charge to * the twelve ', and Lk
in an address to 'disciples', which starts from a warning
against hypocrisy ; but the immediate contexts are the same
in both Gospels.
6.
Mt xii. 33 TI iroifjaaTe ro 8cv8pov
KaXbv Kal rbv KapTrbv avTOV KaXoVj
YI Troir]aaT ro 8ev8pov o~aTrpbv
Kal TOV Kapnbv avTov aairpov.
See also in Doublets.
Lk vi. 43 ov yap (TTIV
KaXbv TTOIOUC Kapirbv cranpov, ov8e
nd\iv 8ev8pov crcnrpbv iroioui/ Kap-
nbv KaXov. And so Troiei twice
and Troieiv once in Mt vii. 17,
18.
7-
Mt V. 45 OTTCOS yevrjoQe viol
Mt V. 46 riva
Lk vi. 35 Kal eorai 6 juaOos vn&v
iro\vs ) Kal efffffde viol KT\.
Lk Vi. 32 TTOl'a Vp.'lV X^P 1 * fOTlVj
See also Transposition, p. 78.
8.
Lk XI. 40, 41 a(f>povfs } ovx o iroir)-
a-as TO eu>def Kal TO eacadec
fnoir)o- ; 7T\rjv TCI IVQVTO. Sore
(\(r)(j.oo~vi>r)v ) Kal I8ov ndvTa Ka-
vCtpCt VU.il' f(TTlV 9
is only used twice besides by the Synoptists (viz.
Mt v. 8 ; xxvii. 59).
Mtxxiii. 26 Qapio-ale Tv(f)\f, Ka6d-
ptaoc irp&Tov TO ecTOS rou vror^-
piov ^Kal TTJS 7rapo^fi8os!\, Iva.
yevr)Tai Kal TO CKTOS OVTOV K.O.-
0ap6f.
Indications of Sources
9-
pt. ii
Mt X. 25 ... apKerbv TO)
Iva ycwfrttt w? 6 SiSdcricaXos
aurou.
Lk vi. 40 ... KaTripTta-ficvos Se
10.
Mk xiv. 8 o <rxi> eiroiTjaey' ?rpo-
e'Xa/3ej> pvpicrai . . . els rbv tv-
Mt xxvi. 1 2 /SaXoCo-a ... TO iii!
. . . Trpo? TO evTcHpidaui fte eTTOiT]-
II.
Mk xi. 3 *ai u0us auToy diro- ) Mt, xxi. 3 eudus Se dirooreXet
In Mk these words are apparently meant to be said by the
disciples to the owner of the colt as a promise that it
should be returned : in Mt they are a prediction of the
promptness with which the request would be granted. See
also p. 1 20.
Mt xi. 27 . . . ovfie TOV jrorcpd TIS
Lk X. 22 ot/Sfis- yii'oxr/cfi TlS
o vtoj- . . . TlS ca-Tiv 6 narfjp
Mk iii. 28 irapra dfa-
QiprfTat TOIS utois roil'
tu'0pojT7(uk ra a
jj.aTa KOI at
JLiat KT\.
'3 (?)
Mt xii. 31, 32 Trao-a
djuapria Kai ft\acr(f)r]p.ia
Trot? . . . *ai 69 fav
fiTTJ/ Xoyoi/ Kara TOU
UlOU TOU cU'GpOJTTOU,
Lk Xii. IO KOi 7TOS OS
epei \6yov ts 7OV viov
TOU dfdpUTCOU,
acTat avra).
The plural ' sons of men ' is noticeable as being used in N. T.
only here and in Eph iii. 5 ; but often in LXX, e.g.
Gen xi. 5 ; Ps iv. 3 ; Ivii. (Iviii.) 2. (It occurs in the first
Oxyrhynchus Sayings of Jesus, No. III.) See Dr. Abbott in
Enc. Brit., x. 792; Schmiedel in Enc. Bibl, ii. 1848 (</),
where a deliberate alteration by Mk is suggested; Drummond
in/. T. S.,i\. 551-
n Words differently applied 71
B. The attribution of the same, or very similar, words
to different speakers.
i.
In Mk xv. 36 a<J>T i&wjiei' is said by the man who brings the
vinegar : in Mt xxvii. 49 a<f>es tSwjxey is said by 01 XOITTOI. (See
J. H. Moulton, Gram, of N. T., i. 175.)
2.
In Mk x. 3 Jesus asks the Pharisees TI (= 'what') ufuy ^crei-
Xaro Mwuafjs : in Mt xix. 7 they ask Him TI (= ' why') ovv Mwuaijs
^Tl\aTO KT\.
3-
In Mt xxi. 41 diroXeaei (TOVS yecopyovs) *rX. is a reply from the
hearers of the parable: in Mk xii. 9 ; Lk xx. 16 it is the answer
given by Jesus to His own question.
4-
In Mt xix. 20 the young ruler asks TI en uorepw : in Mk x. 21
Jesus says to him ef o-e uorepet (and so Lk xviii. 22 <TI ev o-ot
Xf/TTfl).
5-
In Mk vi. 16; Mt xiv. 2 Herod himself says, in Lk ix. 7 others
have said (Strjiropei 8m TO Xe'yfcr&u imb TIWV), that John was risen
from the dead. (But see Field, Notes on Trans!, of N. T., on
Mk vi. 14. where WH have
6.
In Mt viii. 8 the centurion himself says (airoKpi6\s tyy), in
Lk vii. 6 his friends say as a message from him, the words which
show his great faith.
7-
In Mt xviii. 21 Peter asks how often he shall forgive, and
whether until seven times (cos eirraKis ;) : in Lk xvii. 4 Jesus tells
the disciples to forgive seven times (lirraias).
8.
In Mt vii. 14 the mention of oXi'yw oi forms part of a warning
given by Jesus : in Lk xiii. 23 it forms part of a question put to
Him.
72 Indications of Sources Pt. n
C. The use of the same, or very similar, words as part
of a speech and as part of the Evangelist's narrative.
i.
In Lk iv. 43 Jesus says euayyeXumaOai /xe 6VI rrp jSaaiXcuxc TOV
0<oO : in Mt iv. 23 He is spoken of as Kr//wo-o-o>i> TO cuayycXiok TTJS
j3aaiXeias.
2.
In Lk viii. 46 Jesus says e-yo>
v : in Mk v. 30 the Evangelist says of Him emyyous Iv eaur&>
avrov
3-
In Mt XXvi. I, 2 Jesus says oi'Sare on (juerd 8uo i^jJiepas TO
: in Mk xiv. i ; Lk xxii. i the Evangelists speak of the feast
as approaching (Mk jxeTa 8uo
4-
In Mt xviii. i the disciples come and ask Jesus n's '/>a jAei^wy :
in Mk ix. 34 ; Lk ix. 46 the Evangelists state that they had been,
or were, disputing among themselves as to rt's ^ei^wi/.
5-
In Mt xix. 24 Jesus says iraXw 8e Xeyw ufuy : in Mk x. 24 the
Evangelist writes o 8e 'lya-ovs irdXic dfroKpidf}? Xeyei aurois.
6.
In Mk xiv. 49 it seems that Jesus says aXX' IVa TrXY]pw0wcrn' at
YP<x<|>at : in Mt xxvi. 56 the Evangelist adds TOVTO de o\ov yeyovev tva.
n' at ypa<Jmt TCOI/ 7rpo<pr)T(i>i>.
Other such cases may be seen by comparing Mk i. 37 with
Lk iv. 42; Mt x. 7 with Lk ix. 2; Mk iii. 30 with
Lk xi. 18; Mk xiv. 23 with Mt xxvi. 27; Mk ix. 9,
Mt xvii. 9 with Lk ix. 36 (i. e. the command to the
Apostles to be silent with the fact of their silence about
the Transfiguration).
n Words differently applied 73
D. Variations in the rest of the Synoptic narratives.
i.
aVTOV . , .
Mt iii. 5 f
irdaa r\ irepi^upos TOU 'lopSdcou.
Lk iii. 3 KOI ^\6ev ds irdcray irepi-
TOU
2.
Mk vi. 19, 20 ']
auTOi/ diroKTeli/ai, /cat OVK rjSv-
va.ro' 6 yap 'HpaS^s <{>o|3eiTO
TOV Icodvrjv.
Mk xvi. 7 ; Mt xxviii. 7 irpodyct
as (is TTjy raXiXaia^.
Mt xiv. 5 ['Hpw
dlTOICTeiKai <|>O^T]6T] T.
Lk XXIV. 6 fJ.vfja6r)T as eAci
en &^ eV TT] FaXiXaia.
Mk xvi. 7 Aca0a>s elirct' ujxTy. | Mt xxviii. 7 I8ov elirov uplv.
WH suggest that flnov is perhaps a primitive error for cinfv.
Mk vi. 48 Z5o)j/ avrovs
jxeVous cV TO) eXauvfiv, rjv yap 6
avrois.
Mt xiv. 24 ro dc TrXotoj/ . . . J3aaa-
VTTO rail' KVfjLaTcov,
yap evavrios 6 avp.os.
6.
Mk x. 17, 18; Lk xviii. 18, 19
StSaoncaXe dyaOe, TI noirjcra) (Lk
. rifjLf Xeyeiy dyaSoK ;
Mt xix. 1 6, 17 8iddarKa\f, Ti dya-
QoV TTOi^tTO) . . . Tl /Xf epCDTClf TTfpt
row dyaOou ;
Mk xiv. 7 I OUK oiSa TO//
Mt xxvi. 74 o^/c of
Lk xxii. 60
OVK olda o Xeyeis.
Xeycre.
The vocative uvOpwrc occurs in Lk 4, Paul 3, Jam 1, and not
elsewhere in N. T. (pp. 16, 36).
8.
Mk xi. IO u
f) epxofJifVTi /3a(7tXi'a TOV irarpbs
f)p.&v Aauet'8.
Lk has no mention of Aavet'S.
Mt xxi. 9 axrawa TW vtai AaueiS.
74
Indications of Sources
pt. ii
Mk XV. 1 7 ircpmOlaaif auroJ TrXe-
avT(s aKa.v6t.vov artyavov.
Mt XXvii. 28
KOKKLVTJV
Trepie0T]Kay airy, KUI vX*$aiTCf
(TT<pciVOV KT\.
Cf. also eVStSuoxouo-iv in Mk with eKSuaavrfS- in Mt.
IO.
Mk xv t 21 ; Lk xxiii. 26 . . .
2tf*a>va . . . epxop.efoi' drr' dypou.
Mk iii. 8 aKOuokies ocra Trotel i
TTpov avroj'.
Mt XXvii. 32 e'
ivpov
Mk V. 3 T ^
II.
Lk vi. 17 TJXOay aKOuorai UVTOV
Kal Ia6f)vai KT\.
12.
Lk viii. 27 eV oiKt'a OL-K
dXX eV Toty fjLvf)p.a(riv.
Mk V. 4 ovSei
crat.
Mt viii. 28 a)
Mk i. 23 feat dveKpaev.
Mk i. 26 (pavrjffav <|>a)CT]
Lk iv. 33 Kai uvcKpa(v <J>un'r)
[Lk mentions no cry after the
command
Mk vi. 1 6 oi/ eyo>
a7rK((pa\io'a Icd
OUTOS fjedij.
Mt xiv. 2 OUTOS f(
'latdvrjs 6 j3a7TTia'TT l s'
avros TjyepQr) KT\.
Lk ix. 9 '
OUTOS
16.
Mk vi. 2O 'Hp&i&js- . . . d
auToC TroXXa Tjiropeu
Lk ix. 7 'HpaJSq? . . . finrjiropei fiia
TO \cyfa6ai VTTO TivSav KT\.
[Lk does not give the part ot
the narrative in which Mk
uses
Mk XV. 37 d<f>is (puvrjv p.eya\T)V Mt XXvii. 50 Kpdgas Cpavfj peyd\T)
eenvcvafv.
II
Words differently applied
75
18.
Mk V. 24 KOI TJKoXouOei
avrov.
Mt ix. 19 KCU eyfpde\s 6 'irjcrovs
TjicoXoudei auT<3, KOI ol
avrov.
19-
Mt iv. 13 eX6o>> K.a.Ta>KTjaev (is Lk iv. 31
vaovfj..
2O.
els Ka</>ap-
Mt xi. 1 2 17 jSatrtXeia raw ov
at Staorai
Lk xvi. 1 6 T] jSao-tXeia roO 6eoC
fuayyeXierai, icai vra? fls avrfjv
|3 id^erat.
Lk's is the general classical use of the verb (see instances in
Thayer, and Lid. and Sc.).
21.
Mk i. 45 6 Se ee\6a>v fjpgciTO . .
roi' Xoyoi'.
Lk V. 15
Xoyos TTfp\ O.VTOV.
e fia\\ov 6
There must also have been similarity in sound between
and -r
Mk ix. 6 ov yap fiftd TI
fj' eK(j)o|3oi yap
eyevovro.
22.
Mt Xvii. 6 KCU OKOU-
Lk ix. 34
8e ev T&)
TOVS fis r
av-
Thus the 'fear' is placed at three different points in the
narrative by the three writers.
23-
Mk V. 31
Lk viii. 45 ot 0^X01 auve \ovcriv ae
Ka\ dnoQ\i$ou<riv.
This, however, is only a different arrangement of parts of
words.
24.
I\Ik Vi. 3 OV% OVTOS ffTTlV 6 TCKTWI',
6 utos T7/9 Maplas . . . ;
Mt xiii. 55 ^X. ^TOS fonv 6 TOU
TCKTO^OS utos ; ov% fj fJ.r'jTr]p avrov
\fy(rai Mapiafjt. . . . ; Cf. Lk
iv. 22.
But there is another explanation of this variation ; see below
on Mark, p. 119. Also see JEnc. BibL, ii. 2598.
76 Indications of Sources Pt. n
25.
Mk i. . 38 . . . els TOUTO yap Lk iv. 43 ... ort eVi TOUTO
This instance is placed here on the assumption that etfXdov in
Mk i. 38 must be used as in verse 35 and merely with
reference to that departure (etfXQcv) from Capernaum, and
not as in Jn xvi. 27, 28. So both Gould and A. B. Bruce,
in loc. ; Plummer considers this interpretation ' inadequate ',
but not impossible (Comm. on Lk iv. 43) ; and see Swete on
Mk i. 38.
Among many other instances which have been collected
and examined, but dismissed as not sufficiently certain or
definite for inclusion under any of the above four head-
ings, the following may be worth mention as perhaps
deserving further consideration: (a) Mk iii. 12; Mt xii.
1 6, where the charge of Jesus ' that they should not make
him known ' is in Mark addressed to the unclean spirits
who had confessed Him as Son of God (so also Mk i. 25,
34; Lk iv. 41), but in Matthew to the many persons who
had been healed by Him; (b) Mk iv. 17; Lk viii. 12,
where ctra (a word used only once besides by the Synop-
tists) is applied to different matters ; (c) Mk vi. 35 ; Lk
ix. 12, where the ort introducing the mention of the
* desert place ' is in Mark recitative, in Luke causal ; (d)
in Mk xiv. 35 ; Mt xxvi. 39, the application of irapeXOy and
7rapeA0aro) to the ' hour ' and the * cup ' respectively ; (^) in
Mk xiv. 39 ; Mt xxvi. 44, the employment of the phrase
TQV avrdv \6yov elnwv with reference to the second and to
the third respectively of the prayers in Gethsemane ;
(/) a-neKpivcLTo ovbcv used in Mk xiv. 61 ; Mt xxvii. 12;
Lk xxiii. 9, of the silences before the High Priest, Pilate
and Herod respectively (this first aorist middle being used
besides only in Lk iii. 16 ; Jn v. 17, 19 ; Acts iii. 12 instead
of the far more common passive forms av^pLQ^ &C. 1 ) ; (g) the
1 In LXX it is proportionately still rarer, being used only four or five
n Words differently applied 77
introduction of 'the sword' in Mk xiv. 47 ; Mt xxvi. 51
compared with that in Lk xxii. 49 ; (h) Mk xv. 9 ; Mt
xxvii. 17, 21 0<=\T aiToXva-u compared with Lk xxiii. 20
6t\tov aTroACo-ai, where Luke alone gives Pilate's own wish,
but omits his question as to the wish of the people ; (i) the
verb dmtmco used with different applications in Mk xv. n
and Lk xxiii. 5, but nowhere else in N. T., nor in LXX
(but in Aq. and Symm.); (k) -ndvras applied in Mk i. 32 to
those who were brought to Jesus, and in Mt viii. 16 to those
who were healed by Him (cf. Lk iv. 40, and see p. 117,
below) ; (/) the different locations of e*et in Mt xxvii. 36
and Lk xxiii. 33 ; (m) the applications of the word Trovrjpov
in Mt v. ii and Lk vi. 22 respectively ; (//) perhaps also ex
vcoTrjros in Mk x. 20 ; Lk xviii. 21 compared with veavia-Kos
in Mt xix. 20, 22. Such variant utilizations of the same
or similar expressions in parallel passages may seem trifling
when regarded separately, and some of them may be
accidental ; but on the whole, and when taken together
with the more important instances on the preceding pages,
they convey an impression of having arisen in the course
of oral transmission, during which (as often happens) the
round of the words adhered to the speaker's mind more
distinctly than the recollection of their original position and
significance.
SECTION III
TRANSPOSITIONS OF THE ORDER OF WORDS AND
SENTENCES
THE influence of oral transmission is suggested by trans-
positions even more forcibly than by the variations collected
in Section II, though the number of the former is much
smaller. There is nothing to make copyists and compilers
likely to invert, either intentionally or accidentally, the
times (Ex xix. 19 ; 3 Ki ii. i ; i Chro x. 13 ; Ezek ix. n ; also avra-nfKpi-
vavro in Judg v. 29).
78 Indications of Sources Pt. n
order of the materials before them, whatever omissions or
abbreviations or adaptations they may make in dealing
with those materials ; but such inversions would take place
naturally and easily in the course of memoriter narration
and instruction. 1
The most important transpositions may be arranged in
five classes :
A. Transpositions of order in Mark and Matthew.
1. Mk vii. 6-13; Mt xv. 3-9: the quotation from Is xxix. 13
and the reference to Corban.
2. Mk ix. 12, 13 ; Mt xvii. 12 : the rejection of the Son of Man
and of < Elijah '. 2
3. Mk x. 3-9; Mt xix. 4-8: the references to the permission of
divorce by Moses and to Gen i. 27.
B. Transpositions of order in Matthew and Luke.
1. Mt iv. 5-10; Lk iv. 5-12: the second and third temptations.
2. Mt v. 40; Lk vi. 29 : x i v and IfuiTtov.
3. Mt v. 42, 44 ; Lk vi. 30, 27, 28 : 'Give to him that asketh,'
&c., and ' Love your enemies and pray for ', &c.
4. Mt v. 45-7 ; Lk vi. 35, 32, 33 : sonship to God who is kind
to good and evil, and ' What thank (or reward) have ye ? '
5. Mt vi. 20; Lk xii. 33: 'moth' and 'thief (Lk omits 'rust').
6. Mt vii. 1 6 ; Lk vi. 44 : ' grapes ' and ' figs '.
7. Mt viii. 21 f. ; Lk ix. 59 f. : the command ' Follow me ', and
the aspirant's plea for delay.
8. Mt xi. 12, 13; Lk xvi. 16 : the kingdom of heaven suffering
violence (taerai), and the law and the prophets being 'until
John'. 3
9. Mt xii. 34, 35 ; Lk vi. 45 : ' Out of the abundance of the
heart/ &c., and ' The good man out of the good treasure ', &c.
1 Cf. Wright, SomeN. T. Problems, pp. 91, 136 f., and his S/. Luke, p. xxii.
2 The passage thus becomes much clearer and easier in Mt than in Mk
(see p. 124).
3 Lk's order seems to be the better, and to be more suitable to the context
in Mt than Mt's own order is. (Cf. Harnack, Sayings of Jesus, E. T., p. 16.)
in Transpositions 79
10. Mt xii. 41, 42; Lk xi, 31, 32 : 'the men of Nineveh' and
' the queen of the south '.
n. Mt xviii. 6, 7 ; Lk xvii. i, 2 : the millstone round the neck,
and the necessity for offences.
Also compare the order in Mt xi. 21-4 with that in Lk x. 12-15
as to Sodom and Tyre, and note the different positions of Mt xii.
43-5 and Lk xi. 24-6.
The transpositions of order in Mk and Lk are merely small
matters of arrangement not worth recording.
C. Mark and Matthew agree, against Luke, as to order.
1. In Mk vi. 44 ; Mt xiv. 21 the number 5,000 is given after ; in
Lk ix. 14 before, the account of the feeding.
2. In Mk xiv. 12; Mt xxvi. 17 the disciples ask ' Where wilt
thou that we make ready ' before, in Lk xxii. 9 after, they are told
to go and prepare the Passover.
3. According to the shorter text preferred by WH in Lk xxii.
17-19, the cup is given before the bread at the Last Supper, and
not after it as in Mk and Mt. 1
4. In Mk xiv. 18; Mt xxvi. 21 the prediction of betrayal is
given before, in Lk xxii. 21 after, the institution of the Lord's
Supper.
5. In Mk xiv. 29-31 ; Mt xxvi. 33-5 Peter's denial is foretold
after, in Lk xxii. 33, 34 before, the departure from the supper room.
6. In Mt xxvii. 51 ; Mk xv. 38 the rending of the veil of the
temple is recorded after, in Lk xxiii. 45 before, the death of Jesus.
D. Mark and Luke agree, against Matthew, as to order.
1. In Mt viii. 26 the disciples are rebuked for want of faith
before, in Mk iv. 36, 40; Lk. viii. 24, 25 after, the stilling of the
storm.
2. In Mtxiii. 12 ' Whosoever hath, to him ', &c., is placed before,
in Mk iv. 25 ; Lk viii. 1 8 it is placed after, the explanation of the
Parable of the Sower.
1 If with Tischendorf and the English Revisers we adhere to the longer
and better known text, we have also a transposition to note ; for the saying
' I will not drink from henceforth ', &c., occurs in Mk xiv. 25 and Mt xxvi. 29
after, but in Lk xxii. 18 before, the institution of the Lord's Supper. (In the
shortened text of Lk, it occurs between the two parts of that institution.)
8o Indications of Sources Pt. n
E. Matthew and Luke agree, against Mark, as to order.
i. In Mt iii. n, 12; Lk iii. 16 'I indeed baptize you with
water ', &c., comes before, in Mk i. 7, 8 it comes after, the description
of Jesus as * He that is mightier than I ', &c.
The above are only the principal cases of transposition.
Other and briefer instances may be conveniently examined
in Veit's Die synoptischen Parallelen, or in Wright's Synopsis
of the Gospels in Greek. They are particularly character-
istic of St. Luke's Passion-narrative, and as such are fully
dealt with in the forthcoming volume of Studies in the
Synoptic Problem referred to below (p. 108, note).
SECTION IV
DOUBLETS
THE 'doublets', or repetitions of the same or closely
similar sentences in the same Gospel, are of great value
in supplying hints as to the sources and composition of the
Gospels, especially when a comparison can be made with
parallels in one or two other Gospels, which is fortunately
the case in most instances (viz. Nos. 1-20 in Matthew and
all the ii in Luke). These doublets will therefore be
brought together here, with a few comments pointing out
their bearing upon the Synoptic Problem. 1 Most of them
contain sayings of Jesus only, but in Matthew there are four
pairs of narrative passages which may also rank as doublets
(Nos. 15-18).
The doublets, or two passages taken from the same
Gospel, are marked A and B, and are placed in the same
column. And the passages from different Gospels which
1 Only one addition to the list (No. 8 in Luke) has been made in the
second edition. For I have thought it best to restrict the name ' doublet '
to such important cases as are collected here, and not to include under it
smaller similarities (see pp. 99, 106), as some other writers would do. See,
for instance, Badham, Formation of the Gospels, pp. 12 ff. It is interesting to
compare the doublets in Tatian, as collected by Hobson, op. tit., pp. 69-74.
iv Doublets 8 1
occur in parallel places (or very nearly so) in the narratives,
are placed opposite to one another. Thus the arrangement
of the passages themselves is quite independent of any
hypothesis or theory, though the 'two-document hypo-
thesis ' is referred to in some of the comments.
No attempt has been made to illustrate by various types
and colours the amounts of resemblance and difference
between the parallel passages in the different Gospels.
This has been done in Rushbrooke's Synopticon, to which
students must be referred for the verification of most of
the following remarks, unless they will go through the
very instructive process of marking for themselves the
resemblances, &c., in a Greek Harmony, such as Tischen-
dorf s Synopsis Evangelica. But Synopticon does not
denote the words that are peculiar to similar passages in
the same Gospel, so such words are here printed in thick
type. And this last matter is of course an important one,
because of its bearing on that use of their own favourite
expressions by the three writers, which occupied us in
Part I of this book.
On the whole I think the evidence from the doublets will
be found to point in these three directions :
1. Doublets in Matthew Nos. 2, 7, 10 (cf. also i, n, 12)
and doublets in Luke Nos. 2 and 7 suggest the general
use of two sources (probably Marcan and Logian). 1
2. But doublets in Matthew Nos. 3, 5, 6, and perhaps 17,
show the occasional use of the same source twice over.
3. Doublets in Matthew Nos. i, 2, 4, 8, 9, 10, 11 and
doublet in Luke No. 10 seem to show that freedom
of editors in using their own phraseology which has
just been referred to.
1 For I venture still to retain the useful adjective Logian as a means of
referring to the source (mainly consisting of sayings) which is known to us
through Mt and Lk only, and which is now (1969) called Q much more
often than Logia (see p. 107).
HAWKINS G
82
Indications of Sources
pt.n
4. Doublets in Matthew Nos. 8, u, 13 and doublet in
Luke No. 10 contain divergences between Matthew
and Luke which may perhaps imply the use of
a ' special source ' by the latter.
5. But the absence of triplets (except as shown in the
brief saying on p. 106) seems to indicate that there
were only two main sources.
Doublets in Matthew.
No. i.
Mt A.
Mt V. 29, 30 el 8e 6 6<p6a\p6s aov
avTov Kttl j3dXe diro CTOU, avfj.-
(pepd yap aoi Iva dir6\TjTai (V TU>V
jieXoov aov Ka\ fifj o\ov TO crco/xa
aov P\T)Qf] (Is y((vvav' Kai d fj
Se^ia o-ov ^elp aKav8a\i(t a(,
%K.KO\lfov avTTjv Kai (3a\( djro o-ov,
avu.<$(pei yap aoi iva dnoXrjTat
(V T<H)v p.(\S>v aov Kai p.f} o\ov TO
aa>ua aov (Is y((vvav dn(\6r}.
MtB.
Mt xviii. 8, 9 el 8e rj
6 TTOVS aov
KO\!/OV avrov Kai
Ka\6v aoi
a>r)v KV\\OV fj \o)\6v ) q dvo \dpas
tj dvo irodas (\ovTa pXrjSrjvat (Is
TO nvp TO alwviov.
aov
O~(, K-
diro aou*
fls TTJV
Kai ci
o(p6a\uos aov
eeXe avrov Kai
Ka\6v o~oi to~Tiv
TTJV farjv ft
uovs (\ovTa
vav TOV irvpos.
ae,
diro aou'
(Is
dvo 6<p6a\-
(Is TTJV y((V-
Mk ix. 43, 45, 47 *a\ (av (ricavoa-
XtV?7 erf f] x c>t P vov > dnoKO-^fov
avTTjv' Ka\6v ((JTtv o~e KV\\OV
do-(\6e'iv (Is Tf)V fafjv TI Tas 8vo
ftdpas e^oj/ra dnfXde'iv (Is TTJV
y((i>vav } fls TO TTVQ TO ao-/3fcrTov.
Kai (av 6 TTOVS o~ov o*Kav8a\iT] o~t )
dnoKO\l/ov avTOV Ka\6v (O~TIV at
flo~(\6<iv (Is TTJV (0f)V xa>\bv f)
TOVS dvo irodas e^owa
(Is Trjv yeevvav. Ka\ (av 6 6(
p.6s arov o~Ka
avTov' KaXov at (o-Ttv p.ovo(f>8a\-
pov do-(\d(iv (Is TTJV (3ao-i\(iav
TOV 6(ov T) 8vo
i (Is ye(vvav.
IV
Doublets
Mt B, which is parallel in position to Mk, 1 is much more similar
to it than is Mt A (which may probably be Logian). In A there
are hardly twenty words or parts of words, in B there are more
than fifty, which agree with the language of Mk, an excess which is
only partially caused by the greater length of the passage : observe
also specially the addition of de&os, 6vta in A only, and its inver-
sion of the order of the eye and hand, besides its omission of the
foot.
It will be seen that a few words are printed in thick type as
peculiar to A and B, but, though worth notice, they are not very
important, or distinctive, especially as in the case of the eye
. . . KOI /3<iAe has to be compared with Mk's ?*/3aXf.
See Bacon's Sermon on the Mount, pp. 1 40-3.
No. 2.
Mt A.
Mt V. 32 e-yo) 8e Xeyw
iras 6 diro\i>ti)v rrjv yvvalita avrov
napcKTos Aoyov iropvctas rroiet
avTrjv fjLot\vd^vai^ } KOI 6s cav
Lk xvi. 1 8 nas 6 dirdXvav rrjv
yvvaiKa avrov KOI yapav ercpav
poixcvei, Kai 6 aTroAfAv/i/i/qi/ aVo
dvdpos yap.S)v
MtB.
Mt xix. 9 XC'YW 8e vplv on 6? av
rr)v yvvaiKa avrov fj.fj
tropveia, /cat ya^arj a\\r)v
Mk X. 1 1 , 1 2 os av airo\var) TTJV
yvvaiKa avrov Ka\ ya^a-rj a\\r]v
eV avTrjv, Ka\ eav avrf]
rov avdpa avTrjs
a\\ov
In the form of the sentence Mt A corresponds with Lk and
Mt B with Mk, as appears in iras 6 dno\vo>v and in the whole of the
second clause. Probably therefore the latter have their source in
1 In these comments the abbreviations Mt, Mk, Lk are often used for ' the
above passage from Mt', &c.
2 It is to be observed that the preceding verse is parallel to the apparently
Logian Mt v. 18 which stands at the commencement of the contrast between
old and new, of which the subject of adultery forms one.
G a
Indications of Sources
Pi. ii
the Marcan, and the former in the Logian document, though they
are differently placed in Mt and Lk, as we shall see to be the case
more often than not with presumably Logian sayings (pp. 108 ff.).
Yet Lk resembles B and Mk in the mention of marrying another
(Lk (Tepav as so often, B and Mk oXX^). And the whole difficult
matter is further complicated by differences of reading: see
especially WH mg of B, and observe that the words in A which
are bracketed by WH form a strongly attested Western omission
(om. D, a b k, codd. Gr. et Lat. ap. Aug.). On Mk see Swete, and
Menzies, The Earliest Gospel, in loc., and Jiilicher, Intr. to N. T 7 .,
E. T., p. 323.
Observe the very important exception as to iropvela among the
purely Matthaean points. Wright in Synopsis 2 , p. 99, and Allen in
loc., are among many writers who regard it as an editorial or later
interpolation in both places.
No. 3.
Mt A.
Mt Vii. 1 6 I 8 OTTO TCOP
avT&v 7riyva><reo~6e avrovs' p.f)Ti
crv\\fyov(riv drro aKavBatv (rra-
<vXas t) afro Tpt/3dXe0i> vvxa ;
OLTO> irav ftfvo'pov dyadbv Kapnovs
KU\OVS frotet, TO 8f arairpbv dfvBpov
Kapnovs irovrjpovs irotfl' ov dvva- Lk vi. 43-5 v y a p fcrnv &ei>
Tat devdpov dyaBbv Kapirovs TTOVIJ- Ka\bv TTOIOVV Kapirbv vairpov, ov8e
povs cvcyKelv, ovSe devdpov aatrpov ira\iv o'evo'pov <ranpbv TTOIOVV Kap-
Kapnovs ffaXovp iroifiv. froi/ Ka\6v. CKOCTTOV yap Sevbpov
fK TOV l8lOV KUpTTOV
ov yap ei
avKa, ovdc fK ftdrov o~Ta(pv\r)V
TpvyS)o~iv. 6 dyadbs avOpairos <
TOV dya6ov 6r)(ravpov TTJS napftias
Mt B. 7rpo<epei TO dya(9oV, KOI 6 irovrjpbs
Mt xii. 33~5 *? rrot^o-aTf TO dtv- fK. TOV irovrjpov
dpov Ka\bv /cat TOV Kaprrbv avTov pov' fK yap Trfpio-o-fvpaTos Kapftic
KO\OV, T) iroiT}(raTf TO Scvdpov (ran- XaXeT TO ord/na OVTOV.
pbv Kal TOV Kapnov avTov (rairp6v
fK yap TOV Kapirov TO dfvftpov
ytVO)(TKTal.
Doublets
dya6a \a\flv7rovrjpol
oiTfS ; IK. yap TOV Trfpio-o-fVfjiaTos
TTJS Kapdias TO o~TOp.a XaAci. 6
dyaBos avOpanos oc TOV dyaOov
Brjaravpov eKj3dXXft ayaOd, Kal
6 TTOVTjpOS ClvQptoTTOS K TOV TCOVT]-
pov 6rjo~avpov eK/SdXXci Troj/ijpd.
Here Lk has been printed opposite Mt A and B, as it partly
agrees with each of them : its agreement with A is chiefly as to
the similitude of the grapes and figs, and with B chiefly as to the
mouth speaking out of the abundance of the heart. 1
Is it not possible that Lk may here give the passage of the
Logia from which Mt drew on both occasions, choosing and adapt-
ing its words in A so as to bring out the criterion of true and false
teachers, and in B so as to bring out the importance of words as
proofs of the state of all men's hearts? The contexts seem to
suggest this.
There are no peculiarly Matthaean points here.
No. 4.
MtA.
Mt X. 15 dfifjv Xrya> vfjtiv } dvtKTO-
Tfpov corai yt) 2o8o/ucoi> KOI
TofAopp&iv cv r]fjLfpa Kpicrews f] TTJ
TroXet fKtivrj.
Mt B.
Mt xi. 2\ ir\rjv Xeyco vp.lv on yrj
2o8o/xcui> dveKTOTCpov ecrTai e'f
Lk X. 12 Xe'yo) Vfjiiv on 2oo6fj.ois
fv TJy jy^iepa fKcivr) dvtKTOTfpov
carat fj TTJ TroXet
Mt A and Lk are placed opposite, as those passages come from
the charges to the Twelve and the Seventy which are so closely
connected. Their origin is probably Logian, and the rare word
suggests that B may come from the same source.
1 It is worth notice that the passage in Mt vii is not nearly so closely
parallel to Lk in wording as that in Mt xii ; for there are but 15 words or
parts of words identical in the former case, while there are 35 in the latter.
Similarly, in No. 17 we shall find that Mt, apparently using twice the
material which Lk uses only once, is verbally closer to him in the case in
which he differs from him in locating the material than in that in which they
agree in attributing it to the same occasion.
86
Indications of Sources
pt. ii
lo-is, one of the two peculiarities of A and B, is characteristic
of Mt, both with f^epa and alone (pp. 5, 31).
No. 5.
Mt A.
Mt X. 22 a Kai tvea&e fju(rovfj,fvoi
vnb 7rdvTO)V 8m TO ovoud fj.ov.
Mt B.
Mt xxiv. 9 b KCU (o-(o-0f
(JLlO-OVfJifVOl VTTO TTaVTWV
Qvatv dta TO ovofjui
Mk xiii. 1 3 a Ka
fJilO-OVfJ-fVOl VTTO
dia TO ovopd fj,ov.
Lk xxii. 17 KOI 0-f<r6c
fJ.KTOVfJ.fVOl Vi
Sta ro oi/o/na
fAOV.
All four are identical, except for the addition of TI i6v3>v in
Mt B.
No. 6.
MtA.
IVIt X. 22 b 6 8e vnofj-eivas els reXos
OVTOS mt&jirerat,
MtB.
Mt xxiv. 1 3 6 8e vnofjifivas els T\OS
Mk xiii. 13^ 6 8e vrropeivas els
All identical : so here, as in No. 5, no inferences can be drawn.
No. 7.
MtA.
Mt X. 38 KOI off ov Aa/zj3ai/ei TOJ
o~Tavpbv avTov Kai aKo\ov6fl orriVa
p,ov, OVK eo-Tiv fj,ov agios.
LkB.
Lk xiv. 27 ooriff ov
o~Tavpbv eavTov Kai p\Tat OTTIO-O)
fjiov, ov ftvvaTai tlvai /zou ua6r]Tf)s.
Lk A.
Lk ix. 23 ei rtff 0e\(i
MtB.
Mt xvi. 246?'
OTTIO-O) /MOV
a napvr)o~do~6a>
Kai aparco roi' o~Tavpbv
Mk viii. 34 t'L TIS
OTTlVfc) UOU ,
cavTov
Ka\ dpdra) TOV o~Tavpov
aVTOV KO.I dKO\OV0lT(i>
dpvr)o~do-6a>
dparo) TOV o~Tavpbv
naff rjpepav, Ka\
fJ.01.
IV
Doublets
8 7
Mt A and Lk B, though differently placed, agree against the
other three in giving a negative form to the precept, and in omit-
ting the mention of self-denial. And they both follow immediately
upon the non-Marcan sayings about natural affection in comparison
with loyalty to Christ. So they may be Logian, and the other three
Marcan in origin.
Neither Mt A and B nor Lk A and B have any distinctive
characteristics of their own, unless the substitution of epxeo-dat for
f\6fiv in Lk B, as being more similar to cpxtrai in Lk A, may be
taken as having any significance.
Observe in Lk A the characteristically Lucan naff
(pp. 19, 41).
No. 8.
Mt A.
Mt X. 39 6 eupcbi; rrjv
avrov oVoXeWi avryv, KUL 6 ano-
XcVas rfjv tyvxfjv avrov evf<cv
cfjLov euprjcrei avrf)v.
MtB.
Mt Xvi. 25 6s yap eaf
6&T] rrjv "fyvxTjV avrov
o~S)o-ai aTroXeVej
6s ft' av dno\o~r)
tyv\r)V avrov eV
cuov euprjcref, avrfjv.
Mk viii. 35 6? yap eat/
Lk A.
Lk ix. 24 or yap av
rrjv
o~S>o~ai
os 6* av avroXeo-j; TTJV
avrov evfKev
, OVTOS o~Q)o~fi av-
Lk
rr]V (avrov
o~)o~ai ctTroXccrfi
6s 8* av ciTroXeVei
avrov
KUJ] rov
Xtou o-oxrci avrr]V.
LkB.
xvii. 33 6s tav
avrov 7Tpnrotr]o-acr0ai dno-
XeVei avrrjv, 6s 8* av diroXto-fi
a>oyovT]o~i avrrjv.
In this case, unlike the preceding one, there are no special
similarities between Mt A and Lk B : indeed the latter differs
remarkably from all the other versions of the saying, by containing
the unusual verbs irtpmoi^aL and faoyovea, both which occur in
N. T. elsewhere only once in Acts and once in i Tim. 1
1 But faoyovea: occurs in LXX 11 times (in 3 Ki xxi. (xx.) 31 with tywxas) ;
and irepiiroicca (usually in middle voice) 33 times (in Ezek xiii. 18, 19, with
88 Indications of Sources Ft. n
But between Mt B, Mk, and Lk A, there is sufficient similarity
to support the suggestion of a Marcan origin ; for tfe'Xco and o-o>a>
are used only in these three versions.
The use of eupumo twice in Mt A and once in Mt B may be
a sign of Matthaean editorship, though the verb is in more general
use by Lk than by Mt.
Observe the characteristic addition of * the Gospel ' in Mk : it
is one of the few instances in which a later editorial insertion
is probable, for it could hardly have been omitted both by Mt
and Lk (cf. p. 152). Syr sin has 'for my Gospel's sake'.
This is the most important saying found in all four Gospels l :
see Jn xii. 25, where however aTroXXu/u is the only verb used in
common with any of the Synoptists.
No. 9.
Mt A.
Mt Xli. 39 yevea Trovrjpa Kat
(rrjp.cov
0-tJfJ.eiOV OV OOUr)(TTtU
TO crTjfj.e'iov 'lava TOV rrpo<p^Tov.
MtB.
Mt xvi. 4 yevea Trovrjpa Kal JAO
tnyttov eTU/ret, Ka O~TJ-
p.elov ov dodr)o~eTai avrfj el /j,fj TO
Lk xi. 29 ty yfvea avTr) yevea no-
vrjp eo-Tiv' vrjpeiov fijrei, Ka
ei
TO
Mk viii. 12 T* 17 ycvea avTrj
o-rjfJie'iov ; dprjv Xe'yto, el
rrj yevea TUVTIJ trrj^eiov.
For the introductory narratives, see No. 18 on p. 96 below. And
observe that Mt A and Lk, Mt B and Mk, are respectively followed
by similar contexts ; for the mention of Jonah is not enlarged upon
after Mt B as it is after Mt A and Lk. Perhaps in B it may have
been an importation into a Marcan record from the Logian A
and Lk ; and this may also have been the case with novnpd. Such
transferences are exactly such as would be made naturally and un-
consciously in the course of oral teaching, or even by copyists
familiar with the substance of both documents.
The two peculiarities marked by thick type as Matthaean are
noticeable, though not very important. It is remarkable that the
only other occurrence of potxa\is is not in Mt but in Mk viii. 38.
1 The only other case of any importance is that in Mt x. 40 6, Mk ix. 37,
Lk ix. 48 (cf. also x. 16), Jn xiii. 20 (where, however, Xapftavei and not
is the verb), ' He that receiveth me receiveth him that sent me.'
1V
Doublets
89
Mk and Lk only have fj avrrj with ywd ; this agreement,
though trifling in itself, may be worth notice in connexion with
the other small similarities between them which occur in No. 18.
Mt A.
Mt xiii. 12 oans yap
avrat
No. 10.
Mk IV. 25 os yap
KCU
OO~TIS e OVK X* l > Ka
6 X (L dpOrjo-fTat air
avrov.
Mt. B.
Mt XXV. 29 TO) yap C'XOVTI
do6f}o-frai Kal
TOV de fj.r) CXOVTOS Kal o %X fl dpdfj-
an avrov.
6s- OVK e^ei, Kal 6 e
TT avrov
Lk A.
Lk viii. 1 8 os av yap
*XV> 8odf)(TTai avrai,
Kal 6s av fj,f) e^J/, Kal
6 doKfl eftfiv dp0f)(TTai
aV avrov.
LkB.
Lk xix. 26 Xe'-yco vfiiv on Trayrl ra>
8o6r)<TfTat } OTTO Se TOU /xjj
Kal 6 efi d
The three passages have been printed as parallel, though Mt A
occurs before, and Mk and Lk A after, the explanation of the
Parable of the Sower.
And the same course has been adopted with Mt B and Lk B,
since they are attached to two parables which have very much in
common, whether they are versions of one parable or not.
The use of the verb (e^ft or e'xn) twice in Mt A, in Mk, and in
Lk A, where the participle (ZXOVTI or e^oi/roy) is twice used in Mt B
and in Lk B, seems to point to a different origin, the former group
being presumably Marcan, and the latter Logian. And navri is
a further peculiarity of the latter pair of sayings.
In the Matthaean pair jrepto-o-ei^o-erai is the only editorial
characteristic ; and in the Lucan pair there is none.
No. n
Mt A.
Mt xvii. 2O dfJ,T]i> yap Xe'yw
KOKKOV O~IVU-
Trecos, cpt Ire TU opei TOVTO) Mera/3u
vdev avvaTr)o~i Vfuv.
9
Indications of Sources
pt. ii
Mt xxi. 21
MtB.
djxTjj' Xe'yw fyui>, eav
Kal p.ff StaKpiQiJTC, ov
fJLOVOV TO TT)S (TVKTJS 7TOir]O'T ) dXXa
Kav rw opet TOUTO) elV^re "Apdrjrt
Kal &\r)6r)Ti els rfjv 0dAao-<rai>,
yevrjo-erai.
Lk xvii. 6 ft e^ere TT'HTTIV a>s KOKKOV
o~ wane us, eXeyere av rfj o~VKafjuv<a
ev rfj OaXdavy KOI vnrjKovo-ev av
VfUV.
Mk xi. 23 e\fT nla-Tiv 6eov'
Xcyco {jfuv on os av flirrj rut opfi
rovrtp *Ap6r)Ti Kal @\f)6r)Ti els
TTJV 6d\ao~o~av ) Kal fjif) diaKpidy ev
rf) Kapbia avrov aXAa norcvg on
6 XaXel yfatrtu, eorai aurw.
Though other things are uncertain here, it is at once evident
that Mt B and Mk have strong points of agreement, and cannot
but be derived from the same (probably Marcan) source.
Lk has been placed near Mt A (though a sycamine tree is
instanced in Lk instead of a mountain as in the other three cases),
because those two passages agree in the unique expression irl<mv
as KOKKOV (rivdirews.
With the concluding words of Mt A, compare in the parallel
narrative of Mk ix. 23 the similar saying irdvra dwara r< Trio-revoim.
This suggests that Mt A as well as Mt B may be Marcan in origin,
and that CDS KOKKOV O-IVUTTCWS may have been casually introduced into
it from the (probably Logian) passage in Lk.
dfj-rjv Xeyto vfilv (or trot) is decidedly characteristic of Mt, being
found Mt 31, Mk 12 or 13, Lk 6 times (in Jn 25 times with the
double dfj,f)v).
No. 12.
MtA.
Mt xix. 30 TroXXoi 8e eo-ovrai
TOI ear\aroi Kal eo^aroi
MtB.
Mt XX. 1 6 OVTOJS ea-ovrai ol ecr^aroi
Kal ol npS>Toi eV^arot.
Lk Xlii. 30 Kal Idov el&lv e<r\aToi ol
eo-ovrat, TrpwToi, Kal elo~lv irpG>Toi
OL eo~ovTat eV^nrot.
Here again Mt A and Mk, which are parallel in position, agree
exactly, and probably come from the Marcan document.
Mk X. 3 1 TroXXoi Se f(rovrai
eo~%aToi Kal fotj eitr^aroi TTparrot.
IV
Doublets
9 1
Mt B might either be repeated by the editor after the Parable
of the Labourers in the Vineyard, which illustrates this saying, or
might be brought in with the parable from the Logian source.
The latter is rendered the more probable alternative by the fact
that the clauses are here transposed from the order in Mt A
and Mk, and agree with that in Lk.
A and B have nothing distinctive of Mt.
No. 13.
Mt A.
Mt XX. 26, 2*7 OV% OUTOOff CO~T\V V
Vjjuv* aXX* off av 6e\r) eV vjjuv
/xe'yns yevecrOai ecrrat vp&v dui-
KOVOS, Kal os av 6e\r) cv vjjuv
eivai npuTos co-rat v[jiS>v SovXos.
MtB.
Mt xxiii. ii 6
MkB.
Mk X. 43, 44 ov^ ourcoff df (TTLV
eV Ufuv' aXX* off av 6f\rj fjieyas
yevecrQai fv vfjiiv, corat vpS)V
StaKovos, Kcti os av 6e\r) fv vp.lv tlvai
Trpcoroff, corai it&vrwv dov\os.
MkA.
Mk ix. 35 f i Ttj 6e\i Trpwros eivai
eVrai irdvTW eo~^aroy KU\ irdvrdtv
diaKovos.
Lk xxii. 26 vjjifls 5e oi>x oin-coff, aXX* 6 fififav fv vfuv ytvfo-0Q) ws 6
vfa>Tpos. Kal o rjyovfjicvos a)ff 6 8taKovS)v.
Here again the identity of language in Mt A and Mk B is
almost complete, and points decidedly to a common source, which
would be generally held to be a Marcan one.
In this one case a doublet in Mk is entered, irpSrros and 8id<ovos
being used in both passages though not in the same order. The
combination iravruv fadKovos occurs only in Mk A : it is one of the
very few expressions peculiar to Mk which are found in sub-
apostolic writings, being applied to Christ in Ep. Poly carp, v. 2.
The passage from Lk has a link to Mt A and Mk B in its con-
text and opening, but to Mt B (a probably Logian passage) in
; so its origin is very doubtful.
is used only in Mk A and B : the Matthaean sayings have
nothing peculiar to them.
With Lk's vearepos, cf. Acts V. 6.
Indications of Sources
pt. ii
No. 14.
Mt A.
Mt Xxiv. 42 yprjyopfire ovv, on OIK
oidare rroia TJfxepa o Kupios V
MtB.
Mt XXV. 13 ypriyopdre ovv, on
ol'fiare T)
Mk xiii. 35 yprjyopdre ovv, OVK
ot'Sare yap Trdre 6 Kvpios rrjs
oiKtas
Mt A and Mk are very similar, and are found in the concluding
part of the same discourse, though not exactly in the same con-
nexion. If that discourse comes from the Marcan source, Mt A
may have been modified by Troi'a fjp.fpa as a reminiscence of the TTJV
foepav in the other or Logian version of the saying in Mt B, which
may have been brought from the Logia with the Parable of the
Ten Virgins. But this is only a doubtful matter of detail.
It will have been seen that the use of fjpepa is a mark, though
not an important one, of Mt A and B only.
Observe that Mt here encloses the Parable of the Ten Virgins
between these two almost identical sayings, exactly as he encloses
the Parable of the Labourers in the Vineyard between the two
which form doublet No. 12.
The 14 doublets from St. Matthew that have been given
are records of sayings of Jesus; the next 4 are historical
passages.
No. 15.
Mt A.
Mt iv. 23 Kal ntpiriyev
Mk i. 39 Kai r)\fov KTJ-
Lk iv. 44 Kal r]V KTJ-
ev o\r) rrj TaXiXaia, 6V
pi>o-(T<*)v fls ras o~vva-
pvo~o~(i>v (Is ray o'fi'a-
ddo~Ka>v ev rats o~vva-
ywyas avT&v els oXrjv
ytoyay rrjv 'lovo'aias.
yooyats avrcov KOI KTJ-
rr\v TaXtXatai/ Kal ra
(So WH with NBCL
pvo~o~a>v TO euayyeXioy
Sui/i^ta eKp&\o>v.
QR, i, &c. [and so
TTJS jSaaiXetas KCU 0e-
Syr ein J ; but Tisch
pcnreuwy ircio'ciy VOGOV
and Revisers TaXi-
KCIL TTttO'Cll' IJ-ClXftKLClk
Xatay.)
ei> T<M Xao).
MtB.
Mt IX. 35 Kai nepirjyev o lr]o~ovs
Mk vi. 6 b Kat irepir/yev ray Ka>yu,ay
ras TToXeis ndaas Kal ray Ko>/iay,
KVK\a> O~tddo~K(i)V.
8t.8do-K<av ev rats o~vvayo)yais al-
9
IV
Doublets
93
reoz> Koi Krjpvarcrav TO
TTJS jSaaiXeias Kal
Kal irdaak jxaXa
Ki'ay. (And the words
TTfvftv naorav voo*. KOI iracrav
occur again in x. i.)
These very similar summaries of the ministrations of Jesus occur
in Mt immediately before the first two of the great collections of
His sayings, viz. those in Mt v-vii and x.
The agreement of irfptfyevboth in Mt A and Mt B, and of ras K^as
also in B, with Mk vi. 6 gives some slight probability to the sug-
gestion that B gives the passage in its original situation, and that
in the course of oral teaching its phraseology may have been made
use of to describe the other similar circumstances to which A refers.
Dr. Salmon has made a different suggestion, viz. that Mt in A ' broke
off the use of one document to turn to another; and that the verse
is repeated when he turns back to the former document ', i.e. in B
(Introd. to N. T. g , p. 580).
No. 1 6.
MtA. 1
Mt ix. 27-31 KOI Trapdyoi/rt -
6fv ro> 'iqtroC r)KO\ovdr)(rav 8uo
TV0A<H Kpd&VTCS KOI \yOVTS
J E\Tjcrov T^fJ-as, vie Aaveta, eX-
BOVTL fie et$- ri]V olKiav irpo<rri\6av
avTw ol Tt>(Xoi, Kal Xeyft avrois
6 *Ir)crovs IltcrreveTf ort dvvap.at
TOVTO noirjcrai \fyovcriv avrto
Nat, Kvpie. rore TJ\|/aTO raik
o(p6a\p.S)v avrSiV \eywv Kara
KOI r)Vfa>%8r)crav avrtov ol
Kai i>fftpip,r)0r) av-
rois 6 'lr)(Tovs \eywv 'Opare p.rj-
8fls yivtoffKeTto' ol 8f ef\dovTfs
o"i((pr)p.i(rav avrbv tv 0X17 rfj yy
1 The difficulties connected with the records of this and the following
miracle, as given in Mt ix. 27-34, are ver y serious. I have attempted to
deal with them in Exp. Times, xiii. 24 f., and more briefly on p. 167 below.
94
Indications of Sources
pt. ii
MtB.
Mt XX. 29-34 K0l (K-
77opeuo/zei><av avru>v OTTO
avroi o^Xoy 770X11?.
i8oi 8uo TixXol K
irapa T
6Yi
irapdyet, Kpaav Xe-
yovTfs Kupte, e\cr]crov
, iu6? Aavfid. 6
Xeyoi/Tt? Kupte,
Aavei'8.
oraff [oj '
O.VTOVS KOI
tlnev Tt 6e\cT
o-o) /xti/ ; eyovo-iV av-
ra> Kuptf, iva ai/otyeo-
o-tv oi 6(f)6a\fj.o\ ypuv.
8c 6
T)\}/aTO TWK O/LI-
f \lfav KOI
Mk X. 46-52 KCU ep-
Kai
TOV OTTO
av-
(Cat
UVTOV Kal
fxai/oi) 6 tu6s
BapTi/uatos TU-
irapa.
rrjv 6Sdc. feat
on *I?;a-ov? 6
Naaprjvos ecrrtv rjp^aro
Kpdeiv Kal Xeyeii' Yte
AaveiS '
/jif. KCU
n-oXXoi tw
6 de TToXXaJ
Yte Aauet'8,
/xe. Kat oras
avrdv. /cat <pco-
avrw
eyctpe, (fravel (re. 6 de.
dTro/SaXcbv TO
avrov dva7rr)$r)(ras
^er Trpos TOV '
Kat diroK.pi6f\s ai>ra> 6
6*7761^ Tt 0~0t
6 8e
avrw
rv(f)\bs
PafijSovvei, ivo. dva-
jSXeio). KOI 6 '
airw nayf, j
iri(TTis ffov aecrtoKfv (re.
Kal cvBvs di/e/3Xe\|/'v,
Kat r)KO\ou0i aurw eV
The resemblances between Mt A and Mt B are such as to suggest
strongly that the same miracle may be twice recorded by Mt.
Lk xviii. 35-43 y/-
8f
TO)
avrov fls t lpet^oi TV-
(pXdy TIS (KaOrjTo napa
Tr)v68bv7raiTu)V. UKOV-
(ras df o^Xov 8ta7ro-
Tt tir) TOVTO' anrjy-
yeikav de auTo> OTt
6 Nafcopalo?
Kal tftoT]-
(Tfv Xeyoai' Ir)(rov vie
Aavet'S, cXeqcrov /xf.
Kai oi irpodyovTfs eVe-
TtfjLav ai>T(S tva myijfff
avrbs 8e TroXXo) pa\\ov
Yte Aauei'8
irpbs
avrov. fyyiaavros
avrov fTrrjpwTTjO'ev av-
TOV Tl 0-01 6f\lS
7701170*00 ; 6 8f flnev
Kuptf, iva dva/SXc'^o).
Kat 6 'l?;o-oOff 17761* aii-
rw 'Ai'd/SXe^oi'* 17 77tV-
Tts ffov (T<r<i)Kev (re.
Kal napaxpfjiJLa dW/3Xe-
if/ev, Kal f)Ko\ov6ft av-
TW 8od(i)V TOV Qeov.
Kat 77a? 6 Xao? tScbi/
TO)
IV
Doublets
95
Besides those which are printed in thick type as peculiar to him, 1
there are some remarkable ones which are common to A and the
synoptic narrative generally, viz. vie (or vibs) Aavet'8, and eXe'iya-ci/, both
used twice in B, Mk, and Lk, and the use of Kpa&iv twice in B and
Mk, and once in Lk ; also the reference to ' faith ' in Mk and Lk.
On the other hand an earlier date for A is suggested by the
command not to make the miracle known, as well as by the pro-
bable reference of eWItfe */ to the house of Jairus ; and it may be that
Mt in describing that miracle made use of phraseology familiar to
him in the Marcan account of the later one.
No. 17.
MtA.
Mt ix. 324 avT&v df e
aurw
rov daipoviov e\d\T)(TfV 6 Ko>(f)6s.
KOI edavpaa-av ol o^Xoi Xe'yoirer
OvfieVore c(f)dvr) OVTODS eV r&> *Ia-
par)\. fof fie ^apitratoi eXeyov
*Ev TO) ap^oi/Tt ru>v daifjiovitov CK-
MtB.
Mt xii. 22-4 Tore irpoa^ey-
K.O.V aurco 8aifjLOVi^6fjLfvov rv<p\bi>
Kai KG)0oV Ka\ f6epa.Tr(\)o~fv av-
TOV, u)<TTf TOV Koxfibv XaXeii/ /cat
/3Xe7reii>. Kat /^urrarro iravres ol
Lk XI. 14, 15 Kai rfv e'K/3aXXa)i>
daifj.6viov Ko>(f)6v' eyfvero 8e rov
daifjioviov ef\66vros eXdXrjaev 6
KQ)(f)6s. Kai ftiavfiaaav ol 0^X01*
ff dc e OLVTWV ftTrav *Ev Bee^e-
ra>
v and -acv should also be noticed ; but they have not been
printed in thick type because at the beginning of the narrative the verb is
used by A of the blind men and by B of the multitude : at the end all the
Synoptists use it of the blind man or men.
2 The bracketed words are a ' Western omission ' (WH, Introd,, p. 176).
S vr sin a j so om j ts them.
Indications of Sources
pt. ii
o^Xot Koi eXeyoi> MTJTI OVTOS evriv
6 vlos Anvet'S ; ot 8e 3?apio~aioi
(iKova-avTes clirov OVTOS OVK CK-
fld\\fi TO. 8a.ip.6vta fl p.r) ev ro>
Beff/3ot<X apxovri TMV ftftyUWuVK,
Lk has not been printed exactly opposite Mt A or Mt B ; for
while on the one hand it corresponds to B in being given as the
occasion for the 'defensive discourse' in Mt xii and Lk xi, on
the other hand it more closely resembles A in wording. 1 For
the verb eVc/SaXXco, the use of the genitive absolute, and the sentence
KCU eOavpao-av ot 6'^Xot are found only in Lk and A.
Here, as in the preceding case (No. 16), Mt may have used in A
language which was familiar to him in the record of another
miracle. On the other hand, the mention of blindness as well as
dumbness in Mt xii. 22 has suggested to some writers that Mt may
be there combining reminiscences of the two miracles in ix. 27-34.
No. 18.
Mt A.
Mt Xii. 38, 39 Tore d7TKpi0r)o-av
avTco rives T>V ypa/ifiareW fcai
&apio~aia)v \cyovTfs Ai&a<r/caXe,
6e\OfJLV OTTO (TOV CTTJfJie'ioV ifietV. 6
8e diroKpiOcls curcy aurols *rX.
MtB.
Mt Xvi. I, 2 KCU 7TpOCT\66vTfS [ot]
<f>api(raiot KCU SaSSovKalot
OVTS 7ri]po)Ti]O'nv avrov
e< TOV ovpavov eTTidel^ai avTos.
6 8e diroKpiOcls etirei/ aurots
Lk XI. 1 6 Tpot de ireipdovTS
arrjfjif'iov e^ ovpavov fftrovv trap*
avTOV . . . V. 29 TCOV 8e o^Xcai'
Mk viii. n, 12 KOI egfi\dov 01
<&apLO-aloi Ka\ fjp^avro crvv&]Teiv
aurcS, r)TovvT(S Trap avrov (rrj-
pflov OTTO TOV ovpavov, 7Tfipdov-
res avrov. KOI dvao~Tcvdas ru
Trvevp-aTi avTOv Xc'-yet rX.
For the words of Jesus which follow in each case, see above,
No. 9, on p. 88.
Judging from the position and contexts of the two pairs of
records, it would be natural to class Mt A and Lk as Logian, Mt B
and Mk as Marcan in origin. Probably we are right in doing so,
notwithstanding the fact that as to two expressions, TrcipdfrvTfs
and -e^ ofy>aww,Lk agrees with Mt B and Mk in having them, while
1 Compare the note on doublet No. 3, p. 85.
IV
Doublets
97
Mt A is without them. Also fftrow nap' avrov in Lk only is similar
to &TOVVTCS nap avrov in Mk only. But all these three expressions
are so common, and so much in place here that, as in the case of
No. 9, no importance can be attached to the insertion of them.
And, as in No. 9 again, the words marked in thick type as
peculiar to Mt A and B are also unimportant.
The two following doublets differ from the preceding
ones, in that they bring out identities between Matthew's
records of the Baptist's ministry and that of Jesus.
No. 19.
Mt A.
Mt iii. 2 ... Kr)pv(To~Q)V ev TTJ
TTJS 'lovSaia? Xfywi/ Mera-
fjyyiKfv y&p 57 /3a(7(Xeia
Tb>f oupaco>v.
MtB.
Mt iv. 1 7 . . . rjparo 6 'Irjo-ovs
Kr)pvo-o-(iv Kai Xe'yftv Mfrai/ofirc,
rjyytKfv yAp 17 /3ao-iXet'a Tail'
Mk i. 4, Lk iii. 3 ... Krjpv
Mk i. 14, 15 ... ^X#ei/ 6 'ITJO-OVS
(is rfjv TaXiXaiav Kr)pvo~(ra>v TO
fvayye\iov TOV feov [(cat Xeywi/]
on IleTrX^ptorat 6 Kaipbs Kai
rjyyiKev rj jSatriXeia TOV 6fov'
/uerai/oetTf Kat TrtaTfixTf ev TW
Mt seems in A to be expanding, in B to be summarizing, the
corresponding passages of Mk, but in both he attributes identically
the same proclamation to the Baptist and to Jesus respectively.
Thus it appears that it is only Mt who attributes to the Baptist
the mention of the ' kingdom of heaven ' (or * of God '). Mk first
names it in i. 15, as above, but Lk not until iv. 43.
See also Mt x. 7 ; Lk x. 9, n.
No. 20.
Mt A.
Mt iii. IO nav ovv dfvdpov /LIT)
7TOLOVV KapnOV KO\OV CKKOTTTfTai
Kai els niip /SaAAerai.
HAWKINS H
Lk iii. 9 irdv ovv devdpov
noiovv Kapirbv [fcaXofJ /
Kai els niip /Sa'XXerat.
98 Indications of Sources Pt. n
MtB.
Mt vii. 19 nav 8ei>8(jov fj,i] TTOLOVV
KapTTOIS KO\OV eKKOTTTfTCU Kill (IS
nvp /SuXXerat. 1
Except the omission of the conjunction ovv in Mt B, which is
closely connected with a passage discussed as No. 3 above (p. 84),
there is no difference in these three sayings.
Compare also Mt's use of yevvfoaTa ^x^v&v in xii. 34 and xxiii. 33,
as well as in iii. 7 == Lk iii. 7.
The two remaining doublets in Matthew are not so
interesting to students of the Synoptic Problem as the
preceding twenty, because there are no parallels in Mark
or Luke with which they can be compared.
No. 21.
Mt A.
Mt ix. 13 TTOpfvOevres de /ua&re TI iarnv *E\eos 0eXa> Ka! ou Oucrtac' ov
yap r]\6ov KaXeaeu KT\.
MtB.
Mt xii. 7 ( i & eyvaKfiTe TI earif "E\eos 0\a> Kal ou Qvaiav, OVK av
KaTeStKaaarc TOVS dvairiovs.
Both these are Matthaean additions to narratives which are placed
consecutively in Mk and Lk, and which are apparently Marcan in
origin.
On the quotations from O. T. in Mt, see pp. 154 ff.
No. 22.
Mt A.
Mt xvi. 19 Kal o la.v r\crr\s eir! TTJS y^S corcu SeSejxekoz/ iv rot? oupa-
vols, Kal 6 eaf Xuarjs CTTI TTJS yr\s earat XeXujuiei'oi' iv TOLS oupai^ols.
Mt B.
Mt xviii. 1 8 dfj.r}v Xeya> vp.lv, ocra lav SYjaTjTe irl TTJS yTJs laTai SeSejxej'a
iv oupai'co Kal oaa lav XuorTjre em TTJS Vps I<7Tat XeXujJieVa iv
This promise given to Peter in A, is repeated in B to all whom
Jesus is addressing, apparently ' the disciples ' who came to Him
1 The saying seems to break the connexion here, whereas it agrees well
with its context in the Baptist's teaching.
iv
Doublets
99
in xviii. i. It occurs each time in close connexion with one or
other of the only passages in the Gospels in which the word
fKKXrjaia is found.
The resemblances between Mt v. 34 and xxiii. 22 ; x. 1 7
and xxiv. 9 a ; x. 40 and xviii. 5 ; xi. 27 a and xxviii. 1 8 ;
xxiv. 23 and 26; xxviii. 7 and lo, 1 though worth notice,
have not been regarded as sufficient to constitute doublets.
For shorter repetitions m Matthew, see pp. 168, 170.
Doublet in Mark.
Mk ix. 35 with x. 43, 44 2 : for this see Matthew No. 13,
on p. 91 above.
There is no other instance to be entered here, as it has
been decided to treat ' He that hath ears, Sec/, separately
from the doublets : see p. 106 below. And the resemblances
between Mk ix. 23 and xi. 23, and between xiii. 5, 6 and
21-3 do not come up to the standard of closeness adopted
in these lists. 3
Doublets in Luke.
No. i.
LkA.
Lk viii. 1 6 ouSels Se
Ka\V1TTl aVTOV (TKCVft f)
K\ivr]S Tidrjcnv, aXX eVt \v\vias
TiBr](nv, Iva. ot eunropeuojjiefoi
fiil/as
Mk iv. 21 fj.r)Tt fp^erai 6
Iva VTTO TOV podtov TfOfj ij virb
K\ivr)v, ov% Iva eVt TTJV
LkB.
Lk xi. 33 ouoVis \i>x v ov aij/as cis
Kpvnrrjv Ti6r](nv ov8e i^ro TOV
fjLodiov oXX* eVi TTJV Xv^viav, Iva,
ol etenropeuofAei'Oi TO <|>(us P\e-
TrwatK.
1 Treated by Prof. Lake as a doublet, Resurrection of J. C., p. 86.
2 On the complications of Mk ix. 33-42 see Enc. Bibl., ii. 1864-6.
3 The three predictions of the Passion, &c. (Mk viii. 31, ix. 31, x. 33, and
parallels; Tisch, Syn. Evang.^ 70, 73, 116), are omitted from notice,
because they are so expressly assigned to three distinct occasions.
H 2
100
Indications of Sources
Pt. ii
Mt V. 15 ov8f Kaiovviv \v\vov KOI
Ti6eao~iv avrbv virb TOV /io8ioi>
ttXX* fTTt TT)V \V\viaV, KOI \dfl1Tfl
Tracriv rois ei> rfj oiKia.
Here, as the thick type shows, the strongest similarities are the
editorial ones between A and B. To the last clause in them Mt
has a parallel in substance, but it is so adapted as to lead on to
his next sentence ovras Xa/u\|/-aVa> KT\.
As to the source of the original form of the saying, no decided
conclusion can be drawn. 1 For though Lk A and Mk are found in
the same place and connexion, they do not coincide more exactly
than the other passages do, their agreement as to K\ii>rj being
balanced by the agreement of Lk B with Mk and Mt as to podios.
But the consideration of No. 2 will lend some probability to
a Marcan origin for at least Lk A here, as the passages are con-
secutive both in Lk A and in Mk.
No. 2.
Lk A.
Lk Vlii. iy ou yap ecrrw KpvnTov
o ov (pavfpbv yevrjo-fTai, ov8e
drroKpv(pov o ov /j,f} yvo)o-6rj KO\
cis (pavepov f\6rj.
LkB.
Lk xii. 2 ovftev 8e o~vyKfKa\vfJ.-
ptvov fo-rlv o OVK aTroKa\v(p6rj-
crfrai, Ka\ Kpvnrbv o ov
Mk iv. 22 ov yap (o~riv KpirnTov eav
diroKpvfpov dXV Iva
Mt X. 26 oudei> yap e'orii>
p.fVOV O OVK U7TOKa\V(pdf)0-fTat, KOI
KpvnTOV o ov yvanrdr)O~eTai.
Here the wording is so very similar in Lk A and Mk, and in
Lk B and Mt respectively, and the difference in wording between
the two pairs is so wide, that we seem to have two versions of the
saying, the former handed down through the Marcan, the latter
through the Logian document.
1 See Bacon, Sermon on the Mount, p. 132, on the connexions in which
the saying is found.
IV
Doublets - ioi
Here as so often (see pp. 122, 131) Mk has the most harsh and
difficult form of the saying, for his purposive JW is in Lk A
replaced by a future, the tense which we find in Lk B and Mt.
There is nothing to be marked as limited to Lk A and B, as
yivwvKU) is also used in Mt.
The variation of this saying in No. IV of the New Sayings of
Jesus from Oxyrhynchus (1904) should be compared.
No. 3.
Lk viii. 1 8 with xix. 26.
For this see Mt No. 10, on p. 89 above.
LkA.
Lk iX. 3 . . . fJLT)T TTT)-
pav . . .
V. 4 Kal fls TJV av oiKiav
Kal fKfWfv f^f
V. 5 al oaoi av urj 8f-
p.fVOl OTTO Tr)S
fKfivr]s TOV KoviopTov
drro TO>V 7ro8oi>
aTTOTtmo-o-ere els
rvptov eu O.VTOVS
No, 4.
Mt X. 10 . . . ft^ 7TJ-
pav . . .
VV. II, 12 etp TJV 8' ap
TTO\IV
ea>s av e
V. 1 4 Kal os av pfj
Tai VfJids fJLTj8 aKOlHTT)
TOVS \6yovs VfJ.a>v, eep-
%6fjLevoi e^co TTJS olicias
^ TTjf TToXfWS eKClVTJS
KTlV(igaT TOV KOVlOp-
TOV T
Mk vi. 8 . . . p) TTJ/-
pav . . .
V. IO OTTOU fav flfff\
av f
V. 1 1 Kal os av TOTTOS
vp.as fJ.r)de
vu)V, fKiro-
pfVOp.fVOl fKfWfV fKTl-
vdgaTf TOV XQVV TOV
T(i)V ITodStV
fls uaprvptov av-
LkB.
Lk X. 4 . . . w irfjpav . . .
V. 5 ^ LS *l v ^ ai> e io~e\dr)T oiKiav,
V. 7 V avrrj 8f rfj oiKia
(ffOovres Kal TrivovTfS Ta nap
avratv, agios yap 6 epydrrjs TOV
fjuffOov avrov. p.
oiKias fls oiKiav.
VV. IO, II fls TJV 6' av TTO\IV ftt
6r)Tf Kal /u// Se^uma vuas, ff\-
66vTfS fls TO? TrXareias
102
Indications of Sources
pt. ii
Kal TOV Kovioprbv
KO\\r)6evTa rip.1v CK rr/s
vfjiutv (Is TOVS TroSa? aTro/za
VfUV' 7T\r)V TOVTO ytVW(TKT OTl
fjyyiKfv fj (3<uTi\fiti TOV deov.
We have come to the complicated matter of the charges to the
Twelve and the Seventy, 1 but here we are only concerned with
those portions of them which Lk substantially repeats. Except the
trifling change to the plural which is marked above (cf. aKovo-uo-iv
in Mk), there is nothing exclusively belonging to Lk A and Lk B.
No. 5.
Lk ix. 23 with xiv. 27.
For this see Mt No. 7, on p. 86 above.
No. 6.
Lk ix. 24 with xvii. 33.
For this see Mt No. 8, on p. 87 above.
No. 7.
Lk A.
Lk ix. 26 os yap av f
KOI TOVS fj.ovs Xoyovy, TOVTOV 6
vlbs TOV dvQpuTrov eirai(Txyv6r)-
, orai> fy ei> TTJ j/ avrov
TOV irciTpbs Kai To>v ayiwv
eVa>-
LkB.
Lk xii. 9 6 8c apvr^ara^vos
TI tov Tutv avdptoirav dira
av dyye\(ov TOV 6eov.
Mk Vlii. 38 off yap eav e7rai<rxvvQfj
fJL KO.L TOVS CfJLOVS \6yOVS fV TT)
yevcq TavTfl TTJ /xot^aXt'St /cat
d/MaprcoXo), Kal 6 vlbs TOV avBpat-
TTOV (trai<Tx\)v6r)(TCTai avrov OTav
eX0j/ fv TTJ 86rj TOV jrciTpbs CLVTOV
P.CTU TWV dyyeXtov ra>i> dyiav.
Mt X. 33 oaTis 8c dpvr)<rr)Tai pc
TU>V dvdpa>ir<j)V, dpvr)o~o-
Kayo) avTov ffnrpoo-dev TOV
fiov TOV ev Tols ovpavols.
1 It is to be observed that Luke in xxii. 35 refers to the words 0a\havTiov
and viroSiy/iara, besides ir-qpa, as having belonged to the charge to the
Apostles, whereas he himself had only recorded them as part of the charge
to the Seventy (in Mt x. 10 viroSrjfMiTa is used to the Twelve).
iv
Doublets
103
With some hesitation I have included these verses among the
Lucan doublets, although the leading verb is not the same.
The position of Lk A and Mk, and their general similarity,
point to a Marcan origin. But Lk A has (i) the remarkable addition
of avTov, and (ii) the omission of eV rrj ycvca ravrrj KT\., a limitation
which would be likely to fall out in the course of oral teaching.
It seems likely that in the second pair we have one of many
cases in which Mt collected into his chief bodies of discourse various
Logian sayings which Lk records separately (see pp. 161 ff.).
Though Lk has one of his 'characteristic' expressions in A
(TOVTOV, pp. 22, 48), and another in B (fvannov, p. 18), there is none
to be noted both in A and B.
Lk A.
Lk ix. 46 flcrr)\6fv 8e
SmXoytoyxo? iv auTOis,
TO TIS ttV ("iTJ flflfav
auT<oi>.
LkB.
Lk Xxii. 24 eyeWo 8e
KOI (ftiXovfiKin ev au-
TOIS, TO TIS ttUTWl'
No. 8. 1
Mt xviii. I 7Tpo(rri\6ov
padr)Tal
TIS (t
V ev Tfj
ovpavutv
Xe-
Mk ix. 34 irpos dXXi7-
Xovp yap
ev 717 6Sw TIS
The ro before TIS is a Lucan characteristic, see pp. 22, 47.
There is not much similarity in the sequels of the two Lucan
verses ; compare, however, ix. 48 and xxii. 26.
No. 9.
Lk A.
Lk xi. 43 ovai vplv Tols
on dyanaTf TYJV TTpoa
fv TOIS (rvvaytoyaig KOL TOVS otr-
cv Tols dyopals.
1 This is the only Lucan doublet in narrative, the other ten being in
discourse.
io 4
Indications of Sources
pt. ii
LkB
Lk xx. 46
UTTO Ttof ypauuaTeoiv
T&V 6c\6vTG)v Trcpnra-
Tfiv fv OToXaiff Kal
*v rats dyopals /cat
7rp(0TOKa6f8pias fv rats
(Tvvayotyais /cat Trpcoro-
K\I<TIUS fv TOLS dfiirvois.
Mt xxiii. 6, 7 (ol ypau-
Mkxii. 38, 39
OTTO To>v ypaufj.aTU)v
TO)*' 6(\OVT(jiV (V OTO-
Xats ncptnaTflv KOI d<r-
Traa-uovs ev rais dyopais
Kal 7rpa>TOKaQ(dpias tv
Tals avvayatydls Ka\
irpcaTOKKicrias ev Toils
paTels Kal ol <bapi(rdloi
V. 2) ^tXoOat . . . TTJV
TTptoTOKXldiaV fV TOIS
dfinvois Ka\ TOS Trpco-
TOK.a6f8pias (V Tais
(Tvvaywyais Kal TOVS
acnrao'u.o'vs fv TUIS
ayopais . . .
Lk B is Marcan in character and presumably in origin : note
the analogous Trpoo-exfTe OTTO and /SXeVcr* OTTO in it and in Mk, and
the most complete identity in the rest of the passages.
But Mt, though agreeing with Lk B and Mk in having Trpwro/cXi-
a-iav (they have -as) ev T. dfinvois, Omits their irepmaTfiv ev (TToXals ]
also he agrees with Lk A against them in the order of TrpaTOKaOedpias
and da-nao-uovs ; and his <tXocrt is much less similar to their 6f\6vT<*>v
than to the dyandTe of Lk A.
It appears then that Mt's use of the Marcan source here is
affected and modified by the influence of that record (probably
directly or indirectly Logian) in Lk xi, to which there are so
many parallels in Mt xxiii.
No. 10.
LkA.
Lk xii. II, 12 oTav 8e t
vuds firi TO.S (rvvayayas Kal TOS
dp%as KOI ras e^oucrtay, UTJ pfpi-
TI tlirr]Tt' TO yap ayiov
TTJ
&pa a del
LkB.
Lk XXi. 14, 15 6fTc ovv
Kap8iais t/ucot/
, iya> yap
Mk xiii. 1 1 Kat OTav ayaxTiv vp.ds
S, fJ.rj irpop.epifj.vaTe TI
} dXX* e tav dodfj vulv
1 The bracketed words are omitted by a very strong group of Western
authorities (Syr sin has to be added to those given by Tisch) ; but if they are
retained in the text, the phrase irSts f) TI forms an important coincidence
between Lk A and Mt, and may point to a Logian origin for both.
Doublets
I0 5
vp.lv o-Topa KOI vocpiav y ov bvvr}- eV CKCtvr) rfj &pa TOVTO XaXetre,
(rovrat dvTKTTrjvui rj dvrenrelv ov yap ecrrf vp.fls ol XaXovi/Tfj-
anavres ol avriKfipevoi vp.lv . aXXa TO jrvcvfjia TO ayiov.
Mt X. 19, 2O orav 8e 7rapad>o-iv
vp.as, p.f} fjLfpifj.v^o'rjTe TTCO? rj n
\a\T]o-rjT' doOrjafTai yap vp.lv
cv fKfivy TII eopa n XaXiJcr/jrc'
ou yap {/pels e'are oi XaXovtres'
dXXa TO Trvcvpa TOV Trarpbs vpS)V
TO XaXoCi/ ev vplv.
The Lucan diro\oyeop.ai (Lk 2, Acts 6, Paul 2 only) connects A
and B.
The chief resemblances are between Mk and Mt, though the
passages are differently placed. In Mt it forms part of a longer
passage placed by him in the charge to the Twelve, but hardly
likely to have been spoken so early.
As Lk B and Mk are parallel in position, it is curious that Lk,
who speaks most often of the 'Holy Spirit' (p. 27), should omit
Mk's words TO nvevpa TO ayiov there : but it occurs in Lk A.
No. n.
A.
Lk xiv. 1 1 on iras 6 t
TaiTiv(t)6rjo~Tai KUI 6
B.
Lk xviii. 14 on iras 6 ty&v eavrbv
r ft \ ^
O O
Mt xxiii. I 2 oo-Tts Se v
i, KOI ooris rane iva>-
o~fi favTov
Except for the conjunctions KM and 8e, Lk A and Lk B are
identical.
They agree against Mt in having Tray 6 with a participle, while
he has oo-m with a verb. In Mt No. 2 (p. 83) the former con-
struction marked the apparently Logian pair of passages ; but
here all three are probably Logian.
io6
Indications of Sources
Ft. II
The resemblance between Lk xvii. 31 and xxi. 21 has
not been thought sufficient to constitute another Lucan
doublet, but it is worth notice. Also the narratives in
Lk v. 29, 30 and xv. i, 2 are remarkably similar. And
Lk vi. 9 may be compared with xiv. 3 (to which, however,
the parallel in Mt xii. 10 is more close) ; and viii. 21 with
xi. 28.
APPENDIX TO THE COLLECTION OF DOUBLETS
The saying, ' He that hath ears, &c'
Mt A.
Mt xi. 15 6 fx wv ^ ra
MtB.
Mt xiii. 9 6 ^v ami
MtC.
Mt Xlii. 43 6 ^a>y aira
Mk A.
Mk IV. 9 os exei o>ra
MkB.
Mk iv. 23 ei TIS e
a>ra aKove
Lk A.
Lk viii. 8 6
aira
ttKOVflV dKOVfTO).
LkB.
Lk xiv. 35 6 e\ Q)V ^
As being used 3 times by Mt, and as being merely an adjunct
to other sayings, this brief utterance was not included among the
doublets.
Each Gospel adheres to some peculiarity of form : Mt omits
uKoveiv, Mk has the verb with aKoveiv, and Lk the participle with
axoveiv, on each occasion. So it is to editors and not to sources
that these variations are apparently to be ascribed.
This was evidently a well-known proverbial phrase : it occurs in
Rev ii. 7, n, 17, 29; Hi. 6, 13, 22 6 ?x a)V ^ s aKova-dru . . . , and
Rev xiii. 9 et TIS e^ ovs d/couo-arw. With all those instances com-
pare Mt's omission of aKoveiv, and with the last of them Mk B.
iv Doublets 107
This is the most frequently repeated of the complete * sayings in
the Gospels, as it occurs 7 times. 2 The next in order of frequency
are ' Whosoever will save his life, &c.', 6 times including Jn xii.
25 (p. 87 f.) ; ' To him that hath, &c.' (p. 89), and ' Let him take up
his cross, &c.' (p. 86), each 5 times. No other saying seems to
occur oftener than 4 times.
SECTION V
THE SOURCE LARGELY USED BY MATTHEW AND LUKE,
APART FROM MARK
IN the first edition of this book (1899) tne title of the
present Section was c The Logia of Matthew as a probable
source '. Since then the scholars of England and America
have largely followed those of Germany in designating
this source as Q ( Quelle). For it has been generally
admitted that to call it ' the Logia of Matthew ' was unfairly
' question-begging ', 3 as assuming that Matthew and Luke
certainly used the document named by Papias (p. xiii).
But the abandonment of that name in favour of the neutral
symbol Q need not involve any intention of begging the
question in the other direction, by ignoring the reasons
for holding that the only two documents named by the
earliest writer who deals with sources at all are the two
which bulk so largely in our First and Third Gospels. 4
The exact or almost exact correspondence of some
parallel passages of considerable extent (p. 66) and the use
of not a few peculiar and unusual expressions (pp. 54 ff.)
in both Gospels combine to make it highly probable that
this Q was a written source. And the probability that it
1 ' There shall be weeping and gnashing, &c.,' occurring 7 times, is
excluded, as being only a portion of various sayings (p. 170).
2 In the received text 8 times, but WH Tisch R omit Mk vii. 16.
3 So Dean Armitage Robinson, Study of the Gospels, pp. 69 f.
4 I venture to refer to the Expository Times, vol. xii, pp. 72 ff. and 139.
io8
Indications of Sources
pt. ii
was used by the two Evangelists independently, and not
by either of them through the other as an intermediary
source, is not much lower, and is now very widely re-
cognized.
The only sure means of arriving at sound conclusions as
to the nature and extent of the unfortunately non-existent
Q is to collect and examine such passages l as are found in
Matthew and Luke only, and are sufficiently parallel to give
reasonable ground for supposing that they are drawn from
the same original. I give such a list here, though not with
any feeling of positiveness or even of self-consistency.
For it is rather larger than the list which was offered in
the first edition of this book, but considerably smaller than
another which I am printing elsewhere, 2 my object there
being to give every exclusively Matthaeo-Lucan parallel,
however unlikely some of them may be to have had
a common written origin. But it is only 3 by using, or
making, some such list, that we can advance beyond guess-
work as to Q.
Mt iii. 7-10
= Lk
iii. 7-9.
]
Vltv. 39, 40,
= Lk vi. 27-30,
iii. 12
=
iii. 17.
42, 44-8
32-6.
iv. 3-11
=
iv. 3-13-
vi. 9-13
= xi. 2-4.
v. i, 2, 3,
4,6 =
Vi.20,2l(?).
10
Vi. 20, 21
xii. 33^, 34-
V. II, 12
=
vi. 22, 23.
vi. 22, 23
xi. 34, 35.
* v. 18
=
xvi. 17.
vi. 24
= xvi. 13.
* v. 25, 26
=
xii. 58, 59.
vi. 25-33
= xii. 22-31.
1 The word ' passages' is used, for want of a better term, to include some
shorter sentences than we usually designate by that name.
2 In a forthcoming volume of Studies in the Synoptic Problem, edited by
Dr. Sanday (Clarendon Press). I have there worked out several points
which are passed over either entirely or with slight allusion in this
Section.
3 Perhaps an exception to this statement is supplied by Luke's collocation
of sayings in xvi. 17, 18 ( = Mt v. 18 and 32), taken together with his 'But I
say unto you which hear ' in vi. 27, when he had written nothing to suggest
the contrast involved in ' but ' (dAAd) : it does seem to be thus doubly
implied that Luke had before him, or at least knew, the comparisons
between the old and new law of life in Mt v. 17-48, though he did not
insert them in his Gospel.
v Source used by Matthew and Luke 109
Mt vii. i, 2
= Lk vi. 37,
38.
45 *Mtxi. 25-7
Lkx. 21, 22.
15
vii. 3-5
= vi. 41, 42.
*
xii. 22, 23 5
=
xi. 14.
vii. 7-1 1
= xi. 9-13
.
xii. 27, 28
=
xi. 19, 20.
* x vii. 12
= vi. 31.
xii. 30
*"*
xi. 23.
* vii. 13, 14 2
= xiii. 23, 2 4 (?).
D*
xii. 33-5
=
vi. 43-5-
vii. 21
= vi. 46.
5 D
xii. 38-42
=
xi. 16,29-32.
20
* vii. 22, 23
- xiii. 25-7
xii. 43-5
xi. 24-6.
(??).
*
xiii. 16, 17
i
x. 23, 24.
vii. 24-7
vi. 47-9.
*
xiii. 33
=
xiii. 20, 21.
viii. 5-10
= vii. 1-3, 6-9.
*
xv. 14
=
vi. 39-
* viii. ii, 12
= xiii. 28,
29.
55 D*
xvii. 20
=
xvii.6 6 (?).
!* viii. 19, 20
- ix. 57, 58.
*
xviii. 7
=
xvii. i.
=5
* viii. 21, 22
= ix. 59, 60.
*
xviii. 12-14
=
xv. 4, 5, 7.
* ix. 37, 38
= X. 2.
*
xviii. 15
xvii. 3.
* x. 7
= x. 96. ^
*
xviii. 21, 22
=
xvii. 4 (?).
* x. 8 a
= x. 9 a.
60 *
xix. 28
=
xxii. 28,30(7).
* X. 10 rt
= x. 4.
* .
xxiii. 4
=
xi. 46.
30
* x. 10 b
- x. 76.
D*
xxiii. 12
=
xiv. 1 1 (and
* X. II
= x.8(cf.7)
1 *
xviii. 14).
* X. 12, 13
= x. 5, 6.
II
*
xxiii. 13 (14
D* X. 15
= X. 12.
4) CJ
.3 o
in WH)
=
xi. 52-
* x. i6#
= x. 3 '
5
*
xxiii. 23
xi. 42.
35
* x. 24, 25 a
= vi. 40 3 (?).
6 5 *
xxiii. 25, 26
=
xi. 39, 41.
* x. 26-33
= xii. 2-9.
*
xxiii. 27
=
xi. 44 (W).
* x. 34-6
- xii. 51-
*
xxiii. 29-31
xi. 47, 48.
5
*x. 3 7
= xiv. 26 (?).
*
xxiii. 34-6
=
xi. 49-51.
i
D* x. 38
= xiv. 27 (?).
*
xxiii. 37-9
=
xiii. 34, 35-
40
* x. 40
= x. 16* (?).
7 0*
xxiv. 27
=
xvii. 24.
xi. 2,3, 4-1 1
= vii. 18
J 9>
*
xxiv. 28
=
xvii. 37.
22-8.
*
xxiv. 37-9
=
xvii. 26, 27.
* xi. 12, 13
xvi. 1 6.
*
xxiv. 40, 41
=
xvii.34,35(?).
xi. 16-19
= vii. 31-5.
74 *
xxiv. 43-5 1 a
=
xii. 39, 40,
* xi. 21-4
= x. 12-15.
42-6.
The asterisk denotes some difference of position in the
two Gospels.
1 In this case the change of position is within the limits of the same
discourse.
2 Mt vii. i6-i8 = Lk vi. 43-4 might have been expected to be the next
entry ; but the Lucan passage is so much more similar in wording (though
not in position) to Mt xii. 33-5 that it is entered opposite to those verses.
3 Compare also Jn xiii. 16 ; xv. 20.
* Compare also Jn xiii. 20. This and the preceding note help to show us
that various forms how many we know not of the same saying were
current in the Church.
5 See also Mt ix. 32, 33, [34], which is closer in language to the Lucan
parallel, though placed in a different context.
6 The remarkable expression, < faith as a grain of mustard seed,' occurs
only in these two passages, not in Mk xi. 23, Mt xxi. 21, which are
apparently of Marcan origin. See p. 89 f.
no Indications of Sources Pt. n
In the passages marked D there are complications caused
by the existence of doublets (also in Mt x. 26 = Lk xii. 2,
though not in the rest of the passage combined with them).
If Mt xvi. 2, 3 and xxi. 44 had not been omitted as
almost certainly spurious, the parallels to them would have
been Lk xii. 54-6 (?) and xx. 18 respectively.
In the above list of passages from Matthew there are
contained 188 verses and 6 parts of others; putting these
together we may reckon them as about 191 verses, or rather
more than one-sixth of the 1,068 verses of Matthew.
From Luke are drawn 179 verses and 4 parts of verses,
which similarly we may reckon together as 181 verses,
being less than one-sixth of the 1,149 verses of Luke. If
we were to include, as many would do, the partially
corresponding parables J of the Marriage of the King's Son
and the Great Supper (Mt xxii. i-io, Lk xiv. 15-24), and
of the Talents and the Pounds (Mt xxv. 14-30, Lk xix.
11-27), there would be an addition of (lo-f 17 =) 27 verses
in each case, raising the numbers in Matthew to 218 and
in Luke to 208.
But such reckoning by verses is of course rough and un-
satisfactory ; and it is better to regard the above parallels
as seventy-four separate or separable passages. Fifty-six
of these, or more than two-thirds, are more or less differ-
ently placed in the two Gospels, and are therefore marked *
in the list.
Passages which seemed at all likely to have been derived
from Mark were excluded from the list. But of course it
is quite possible, and it has been suggested in the preceding
1 It seemed to me on the whole that these partial correspondences were
not sufficient to outweigh the differences of occasion and object in these
Parables, so I have placed them in the lists of passages peculiar to Matthew
and Luke, with queries (?) attached to them in each case (pp. 3 and 15).
Harnack (Sayings of Jesus, E. T., pp. 118-26) relegates them to an
Appendix, in company with the imperfect parallel in Mt xxi. 32 and Lk vii.
29, 30.
v Source used by Matthew and Luke in
Section, that some of the sayings omitted on that ground
may have been handed down in variant forms through
Mark and Q independently of one another. If this is
thought to be fairly probable, the following passages might
be ranked as drawn from Q or Logia : Mt v. 13 = Lk xiv.
34 f. ; Mt v. 15 = Lk xi. 33 (?) ; Mt v. 32 = Lk xvi. 18 ;
Mt xxv. 29 = Lk xix. 26 ; and perhaps some others
mentioned above among the doublets, as Mt x. 39 == xvii.
33; Mt xxiii. ii = Lk xxii. 26 (?) (pp. 87, 91).
Again, in two cases some details introductory to sayings
have been excluded as due to Luke (Lk vii. 3, 4, 5, and
20, 21); but on the other hand they may have been in Q,
and their omission by Matthew may be owing to his habit
of shortening narratives (pp. 158 ff.).
For those and other reasons exactness and completeness
are by no means claimed for the above list. It contains
a speculative .element which, it is hoped, has been absent
from the previous tables in this book, and the compiler of
it has had to use his own discretion on several .points as to
which tlwe can be no certainty in the present state of our
knowledge. But, such as it is, it may be offered for use
at least tentatively and in the way of a working hypothesis.
And if it is so used it supplies the following intimations, or
at least suggestions, as to the contents of Q l :
(i) If and it is an important if the whole of Q was
homogeneous with the parts that have been preserved for
us in Matthew and Luke, it consisted almost exclusively of
sayings of Jesus, introduced, when necessary, by explana-
tions of the occasions on which they were spoken. This
description does not cover the first two passages, which
contain records of the Baptist's teaching. These, however,
may have been prefixed in order to explain and account
for the subsequent references to the Baptist in the sayings
1 The general probabilities as to Q are very clearly summed up by
Jijlicher, Introd. to N. T., E. T., pp. 354-60.
112
Indications of Sources Pt. n
of Jesus (Mt xi. 2-19, perhaps also xxi. 31 f., and
parallels). 1
(ii) Sayings belonging to the period of the Passion-
narrative do not seem to have been included in Q. The
only reference to that period in the above list is Lk xxii.
28, 30 ; and in that case the few words identical in both
Gospels seem to be better placed in Mt xix. 28.
(iii) With the one important exception of the general
arrangement of the Sermons on the Mount (Mt v-vii) and
on the Level Place (Lk vi. 20 ff.) the two compilers, or at
any rate one of them, did not regard the sayings in Q as
placed in chronological order or at least they, or he, did
not attach importance to the order in which they found
them. This appears from the fact, already mentioned, that
more than two-thirds of the passages are placed more or
less differently by Matthew and Luke.
(iv) If we agree to exclude, as above, the two pairs of
parables in Mt xxii. i-io, Lk xiv. 15-34, and in Mt xxv.
14-30 and Lk xix. 11-27 from Q, we find in it no parables
of any considerable length. We must attribute to it, how-
ever, the brief parables of the Lost Sheep and of the Leaven
(and not improbably of the Mustard Seed also), besides
many which we may call similitudes rather than parables.
The very interesting and important, but unsolved and
probably insoluble inquiry as to whether the First or the
Third Gospel is the more exact and faithful representative
to us. of Q cannot be. entered upon here. To use Well-
hausen's words, ' Die Frage, ob Q bei Matthaus oder bei
Lukas ursprunglicher erhalten sei, lasst sich nicht rund
beantworten.' 2 Harnack, who discusses the matter very
1 But there are also some reasons for thinking that these records of the
Baptist's teaching may not be drawn from Q, but may have belonged to the
original tradition generally used in our Second Gospel, though omitted from
it in this particular case. So Woods in Studia Biblica, ii. 85, 94 ; Stanton
in Enc. Brit., xxix. 41.
2 Einleitung in die drei ersten Evangelien, p. 67 ; see his following pages.
v Source used by Matthew and Luke 113
thoroughly, gives the preference to Matthew, though re-
garding most of Luke's alterations as merely stylistic. 1
The relative priority of the two great sources of the First
and Third Gospels is another moot point ; Wellhausen 2
regards Mark, Harnack 3 regards Q as the older. Sir W. M.
Ramsay 4 thinks so highly of the antiquity of Q that he
considers it likely to have been ' written while Christ was
still living '.
If, as was above shown, the source which forms the
subject of this Section supplies about one-sixth of each of
the Gospels in which it is used, it might reasonably have
been expected that words and expressions characteristic of
that source could be found and noticed, in the way that
characteristics of the Priestly Code have been observed in
the composite Hexateuch. 5 But it seems to me that such
linguistic evidence is wanting here : with the exception of
words which are required by the special subject-matter, a
renewed examination has failed to produce any expressions
which I could definitely label as characteristic of Q. 6 This
failure does not, of course, disprove the use of Q as a source;
but it does strongly support the view, which the tables on
pp. 4-8, 16-23 suggested, that both Matthew and Luke,
and especially Luke, have so ' worked over ' the sources they
employed that their Gospels frequently represent to us the
substance rather than the words of the original documents.
1 See Sprtiche und Reden Jesu, translated as The Sayings of Jesus, pp. i-
126 passim, especially 112-15.
2 Op. tit., pp. 73 ff., especially 87. 3 Op. tit., pp. 193 ff. (E. T.).
* In his Luke the Physician, &c., p. 89.
5 See Carpenter and Harford-Battersby's Hexateuch, vol. i, pp. 61 ff.,
183 ff. ; Driver's Genesis, pp. vi ff. of Introduction.
6 Harnack writes similarly as to the vocabulary (op. tit., pp. 146, 152) ;
but he finds ' a certain unity of grammatical and stylistic colouring ' in the
passages which he assigns to Q (pp. 162 f.).
PART III
FURTHER STATISTICS AND OBSERVATIONS BEARING ON
THE ORIGIN AND COMPOSITION OF EACH GOSPEL
A. ON THE GOSPEL OF ST. MARK.
IT is well to take this Gospel first, as being almost
certainly the earliest in date and quite certainly the
simplest in structure.
I propose to examine the portions of Mark which are not
found in Matthew or Luke. 1 Though numerous, they are
in most cases very brief, the chief exceptions to this brevity
being the two miracles in vii. 32-7 ; viii. 22-6, and the
parable in iv. 26-9.
What gives interest and importance to these portions,
even in their minute details, is the theory, now very
generally held, that a source corresponding on the whole
with our present Gospel of St, Mark was used by the other
two Synoptists as a basis or Grundschrift^ to which they
added introductions, insertions and conclusions derived from
other sources. For English readers this view is clearly
explained and effectively supported by Mr. F. H. Woods
in Studia Biblica : 2 his arguments 3 seem to me to lead
1 In English they are brought together, in a way very convenient for
reference, in the left-hand column of The Common Tradition of the Synoptic
Gospels, by Abbott and Rushbrooke (London, 1884) ; in Greek they can be
most easily collected by taking note of the ordinary type in the first
column of Rushbrooke's Synopticon.
* Vol. ii (Oxford, 1890). The same view is well expressed and illustrated
by Julicher, Introd. to N. T., E. T., pp. 348 if.
3 The most simple and impressive of them rests on the fact that ' the
order of the whole of St. Mark, except of course what is peculiar to that
Gospel, is confirmed either by St. Matthew or St. Luke, and the greater
part of it by both' (p. 61). The different placing of a quotation in Mk i. 2
and in Mt xi. 10, Lk xi. 27 can hardly be called an exception.
pt. in. A S/. Mark's Gospel 115
irresistibly to the result which he thus expresses, ' We
conclude, therefore, that the common tradition upon which
all the three Synoptics were based is substantially our
St. Mark as far as matter, general form, and order are
concerned ' (p. 94).
But this conclusion, which may now (1909) be called
a practically certain result of modern study of the ' Synoptic
Problem ', at once suggests a further question. What is
the account to be given of the Marcan matter which neither
Matthew nor Luke has incorporated, and which therefore
lies before us as peculiar to Mark ? It might be accounted
for in two ways. Either (a) Matthew and Luke were
ignorant of it, because it was added to the Marcan source
at a time later than the date or dates at which they used
it; or (b) it was before them, but was omitted or altered
either by them when they transferred the other Marcan
matter to their Gospels, or in the course of the subsequent
use of those Gospels. In other words, did those compilers
use an Ur-Marctis (to use the brief convenient German
name for an original and probably shorter Mark which was
altered and supplemented by a later editor), or did they
use a source closely corresponding with our present Gospel
of St. Mark ?
As a contribution towards the study of this question,
I propose to bring together and classify the Marcan
peculiarities, so that we may see how far they are such
as would be likely to be omitted or altered. The stronger
such likelihood is, and the larger the number of instances
to which it extends, the greater will be the weight of
evidence against the suggestion of an Ur-Marcus. For
indeed it is only a suggestion to account for the phenomena
which we are now considering : there is no external support
for it in the words of Papias, 1 nor, I think, is there any
1 Unless, indeed, it is thought that his phrase ov H&TOI raei implies a
less orderly arrangement of materials than We find in this Gospel. But,
I 2
n6 Statistics and Observations pt. in. A
internal evidence for it in the signs of compilation which
some students believe they can detect even in this Gospel.
Of such signs the most remarkable is perhaps that on which
Wendt * has laid stress, viz. the apparent resumption in
xii. 13 of the narrative in iii. 6 about the Pharisees and
Herodians. This may imply a collection of replies made
by Jesus to questions and objections, of which Mark was
making use, and from which he broke off in iii. 6 to return
to it in xii. 13. And a good case for the arrangement of
various materials may be made as to chapter iv, and still
more as to chapter ix, 2 and again as to chapter xiii, where
Colani's suggestion of the insertion of several verses from
a presumably Jewish apocalypse has met with acceptance
in many quarters. 3 But such compilation must have been
prior to that use of Mark by Matthew and Luke which the
hypothesis before us involves. 4
In referring to the Marcan peculiarities it will be best to
begin with those which have most to do with the substance
of the narrative, and from them to pass on to those which
are mainly or entirely linguistic.
As an introduction to Section I, A and B, I quote some
remarks of Dr. A. B. Bruce on this Gospel : ' It contains
even in that case, the re-arrangement must have taken place before the
time to which our hypothesis refers.
1 See his Teaching of Jesus, E. T., i. 21.
2 See especially Schmiedel in Enc. Bibl., ii. 1864 ff.
8 See, for instance, Wendt, Teaching of Jesus, E. T., ii. 278, 358, 366,
where he summarizes what he had said more fully in the untranslated part
of his work, Lehre Jesu i. loff. ; and Charles, Eschatology (1899), pp. 323-9.
The verses generally regarded as insertions from the ' little Apocalypse '
are Mk xiii. 7, 8, 14-20, 24-7, 30, 31, and the parallels in Mt and Lk.
4 Might not Mark himself after Peter's death have been the person who
re-arranged (perhaps not always very carefully or skilfully) the groups of
reminiscences which he had taken down from the lips of Peter in earlier
years ? This would help to reconcile the impression given by Papias (see
above, p. xiii) with the express statement of Irenaeus(//a^r. iii. i) that it was
after the death of Peter and Paul that Mark ' handed down to us in writing
what Peter used to preach '. These and other patristic traditions relating
to the Second Gospel are brought together by Scott-Moncreiff, St. Mark
and the Triple Tradition, pp. 100-8.
pt. in. A 5/. Mark's Gospel 117
unmistakable internal marks of a relatively early date.
These marks are such as to suggest an eye and ear witness
as the source of many narratives, and a narrator unem-
barrassed by reverence. This feeling we know does come
into play in biographical delineations of men whose charac-
ters have become invested with sacredness, and its influence
grows with time. The high esteem in which they are held
more or less controls biographers, and begets a tendency
to leave out humble facts and tone down traits indicative
of pronounced individuality ' ( With Open Face, p. 25).
SECTION I
PASSAGES WHICH MAY HAVE BEEN OMITTED OR ALTERED
AS BEING LIABLE TO BE MISUNDERSTOOD, OR TO GIVE
OFFENCE, OR TO SUGGEST DIFFICULTIES 1
A. Passages seeming (a) to limit the power of Jesus
Christ, or (6) to be otherwise derogatory to, or
unworthy of, Him.
(a)
Mk i. 32, 34 ' They brought unto him all that were sick . . . and
he healed many that were sick', compared with Mt viii. 16 'He
. . . healed all that were sick ', and Lk iv. 40 ' He laid his hands on
every one of them and healed them '. Here Mark's description might
be thought to imply what Paley calls ' tentative miracles ; that is,
where out of a great number of trials, some succeeded '. 2 So also
in Mk iii. 10 ' many*, compared with Mt xii. 15; Lk vi. 19 'all '.
2.
Mk iv. 36 : it might be wondered how the ' other boats '
weathered the storm. (Perhaps however Mark did not mean to
imply that these also crossed the lake.)
1 Cf. Dr. Abbott's art. Gospels in Ettc. Brit., x. 802, from which several of
these instances were taken.
2 Evidences of Christianity, Part I, prop, ii, chap. i.
u8 Statistics and Observations Pt. in. A
3-
Mk vi. 5 'He could (cdvvaro) there do no mighty work, save, &c.',
compared with Mt xiii. 58 ' He did not many mighty works there
because of their unbelief. (Perhaps too the omission by Mt of
the sentence in Mk vii. 24 containing the words OVK rjdvvaa-drj \afalv
may be due to the desire not to suggest inability of any kind.
Compare also Mk i. 45 (/iqKc'rc SvvavOai) with Lk v. 16.)
4-
Mk vii. 32-7 : the use of spittle as a means of healing (cf. also
Jn ix. 6). And perhaps painful effort might seem to be implied in
the words ' looking up to heaven he sighed '. (Compare
avrov in Mk viii. 12, omitted in Mt xvi. 2.)
5-
Mk viii. 22-6: in this miracle also spittle is used as a means; 1
and the cure is represented as gradual. 2
6.
Mk xi. 20 : the statement that the withering of the fig-tree was
not noticed until the next morning might be dropped as obscuring
the signal character of the miracle. Cf. Mt xxi. 19 and 20
7-
Mk xv. 44, 45 a ' Pilate marvelled if he were already dead, &c.'
It might have been thought at least needless to introduce this
question into ordinary teaching.
w
i.
Mk i. 1 1 ' Thou art my beloved Son, &c.', said to Jesus : more
public honour seems to be done to Him by the proclamation con-
cerning Him, ' This is my beloved Son, &c.' in Mt iii. 17. Luke
1 These two are ' the only cases in the Synoptic Gospels in which Jesus
employs any other means than the laying on of hands ' (Gould, Comm. on
Mark, p. 149). The Apostles are said to have 'anointed with oil many that
were sick ' in Mk vi. 13 : cf. James v. 14.
2 Similarly, the cure of the lunatic boy in Mk ix. 20-7 appears more
gradual than in Mt xvii. 18 or Lk ix. 42. And see Allen, St. Matt., p. xxxiii,
on the omission of Mk i. 23-8 by Mt.
i St. Mark's Gospel 119
however follows Mark. (Compare the revelation said in John i. 33
to have been made to the Baptist at this time.)
2.
Mk i. 1 2 ' The spirit driveth him forth (eK/3aXA) ' : it is not
surprising that Matthew and Luke express this guidance by the less
forcible words avyfy and jj
3-
Mk iii. 5 ' With anger '. Matthew and Luke omit this, though the
latter (vi. 10) preserves the nept^\\^d^fvos which goes with it in Mark.
opyrj is nowhere else in the Gospels ascribed to Jesus, except in
a Western reading of Mk i. 41 (opyia-deis) : cf., however, Rev vi. 16.
4-
Mk iii. 21 * His friends . . . went out to lay hold on him, for they
said, He is beside himself (efc'ony) V
5-
Mk v. 7 ' I adjure thee by God ' : it is only in this one of the
three narratives that the unclean spirit dares to adjure Jesus (6pKio>).
6.
Mk vi. 3 ' Is not this the carpenter? ' See, however, also p. 75.
7-
Mk vi. 48 * He would have (fjdf\ev) passed by them '. There
might have been fear of this being taken to mean that He did not
wish, or intend, to help them.
8.
Mk vii. 9 ' Full well (aXo$) do ye reject the commandment of
God '. This irony is replaced in Mt xv. 3 by the graver question,
' Why do ye also transgress the commandment . . . ? '
9-
Mk x. 14 ' He was moved with indignation (^ycn/aKr^o-ev) '. Else-
where this verb always implies more or less blameworthy anger,
Mt xx. 24; xxi. 15; xxvi. 8; Mk x. 41 ; xiv. 4; Lk xiii. 14.
1 The reading in D* l^eVrarat aurous, a b d ff 2 i q exentiat (exsentiat) eos,
&c., is probably an attempt to avoid the difficulty.
120 Statistics and Observations Pt. in. A
10.
Mk x. 17, 1 8 ' Good Master' and ' Why callest thou me good?'
appear in Mt xix. 16, 17 as ' Master' and 'Why askest thou me
concerning that which is good ? ' But Luke follows Mark.
ii.
Mk xi. 3 ' Straightway he will send him back hither '. This
might- seem, and has seemed (see Dr. A. B. Bruce in loc., and
Speaker's Comm.}, to detract from the dignity of the request, and
from the importance of the impression made by it ; * hence perhaps
the change of it to ' straightway he (the owner) will send them ', in
Mt xxi. 3, as also in the received text even of Mark. See also p. 70.
12.
Mk xi. 13 ' For it was not the season of figs '. This may have
seemed, and has seemed to some, to imply an unjustifiable, or at
least ignorant, expectation and consequent disappointment. We
may perhaps compare edavpao-fv in Mk vi. 6, omitted in Mt xiii. 58
(but cf. Mt viii. 10 ; Lk vii. 9).
Mk xii. 32 ' Of a truth, Master, thou hast well said. &c.' : it has
been suggested that these words of the scribe may have seemed to
a later editor ' somewhat patronizing ', and may therefore have
been omitted after Mt xxii. 40 (Allen in toe.).
14.
Mk xiv. 14 'Where is my guest-chamber?' This may have
seemed a harshly expressed claim, and therefore the pov may have
been omitted from Lk xxii. 1 1 which is otherwise identical with
Mark (Matthew has no parallel clause, but cf. xxvi. 18). It has
also dropped out from the received text of Mark.
Mk xiv. 58 ' We heard him say, I will destroy this temple, &c.'
This, though only an accusation by the * false witnesses ' (cf. John
1 < It certainly weakens the miraculous impression produced by the pre-
dicted success of the demand when we learn that no more was asked for
than a loan with the promise of immediate return' (Salmon, Human Element
in the Gospels, p. 425).
i 5/. Mark's Gospel 121
ii. 19), may have appeared to be an unfulfilled prophecy, or pos-
sibly to have justified Jewish hostility, and may therefore have been
softened into ' I am able to destroy the temple of God ', Mt xxvi. 61.
(There is no parallel in Luke.)
B. Passages seeming to disparage the attainments or
character of the Apostles. 1
i.
Mk iv. 13 'Know ye not this parable ? and how shall ye know
all the parables ? ' This reference to dullness in the disciples them-
selves is found only in Mark.
2.
Mk iv. 38 ' Carest thou not that we perish?' seems more ex-
pressive of distrust than the 'Save, we perish' of Mt viii. 25, or
the ' We perish ' of Lk viii. 24. (Compare the use of ou /ze'Xet in
Lk x. 40; Jn x. 13.)
3-
Mk v. 3 1 ( . . . And sayest thou, Who touched me ? ' This ques-
tion, omitted by Matthew and Luke (but implied in Lk viii. 46), may
have been thought disrespectful from the disciples to their Master.
4-
Mk vi. 51 3, 52 'And they were sore amazed in themselves, for
they understood not 2 concerning the loaves, but their heart was
hardened '. 3 There is no parallel to this in Matthew (cf., however,
his record of the weakness of Peter's faith in xiv. 28-33). Luke
is wanting here. (To Mk vii. 18 there is a parallel in Mt xv. 16;
Luke is wanting here also.)
5-
Mk viii. 17, 1 8 'Have ye your heart hardened? 3 Having eyes,
1 Those who had come, or were coming, to regard the Twelve as 'founda-
tions' of the Church (Rev xxi. 14) would be far more likely to soften or
leave out than to strengthen or insert such passages. It has been noticed
that Luke especially ' spares the Twelve ' : see Bruce in Expositor's Greek
Test., i. 46 f., referring to Schanz. Cf. p. 197 below.
2 With Matthew's omission of ou avvT\Ka.v here, compare his insertions of
TOTC avvrJKav in xvi. 12, xvii. 13.
3 Or rather ' blinded ', which seems to be the better rendering of nupovv,
irwpctiffis. See Dean Armitage Robinson, Comm. on Eph., p. 266. As he
says, ' " hardneos" suggests a wilful obstinacy, which would scarcely be in
place in ' either of these two sayings.
122 Statistics and Observations Pt. in. A
see ye not? and having ears, hear ye not?' This is omitted
in Matthew's version of the rebuke (xvi. 8-n). Luke is wanting
here.
6.
Mk ix. 38 ' We forbade him, because he followed not us ' becomes
in Lk ix. 49 ' because he followeth not with us ', which involves less
claim to personal authority on the part of the speaker (John).
Matthew omits the incident.
7-
Mk x. 35 : here the sons of Zebedee themselves make, but in
Mt xx. 20 their mother makes, the ambitious request. Luke omits
it altogether.
C. Other passages which might cause offence or difficulty.
i.
Mk ii. 23 6dov noiflv (WH mg 68o7rote>). This phrase, though
not necessarily (see Judg xvii. 8) meaning that they broke a new
path through the standing corn, might be taken to imply that they
did so. 1
2.
Mk ii. 26 ' When Abiathar was high priest '. This was probably
omitted on account of the historical difficulty : see, however, also
p. 131 on the Proper Names in this Gospel.
3-
Mk ii. 27 ' The sabbath was made for man, and not man for the
sabbath '. This may perhaps have been ' a hard saying ' for Jewish
Christians, 2 and may therefore have dropped out of use, though
here it forms a step in the argument, which is not the case with
the words substituted in Mt xii. 6, 7. In Luke there is nothing
substituted, but a break seems to be implied (vi. 5).
Mk iii. 29 '. . . But is guilty of an eternal sin ', an expression so
mysterious and so much deeper than the usual idea of punishment,
that A-aTraros has been altered into Kio-evs in the received text.
1 See Field's Notes on Transl. ofN. T. in loc. (p. 25).
2 Cf. Rom xiv. 5 f. ; Gal iv. 10 ; Col ii. i6f.
i S/. Mark's Gospel 123
And a similar account may probably be given of the omission of
the whole clause in Mt xii. 32 and Lk xii. lo. 1
Mk iv. 12 * That (iva) seeing they may see, and not perceive, &c.'
For this Mt xiii. 1 4 has the easier ' because (on) '. Luke however
follows Mark.
6.
Mk iv. 26-9 the Parable of the Seed Growing Secretly. Might
there not have been fear of this discouraging activity and watch-
fulness in missionary and pastoral work ? See End. BibL, ii. 1863.
7-
Mk viii. 31 ; ix. 31 ; x. 34 ' After three days'. In the parallel
passages Matthew (xvi. 21; xvii. 23; xx. 19) and Luke (ix. 22;
xviii. 33, there being no parallel to Mk ix. 3 1 ). substitute 'on the
third day ' ; probably because the exactness of the prophecy would
not otherwise be evident to persons unaccustomed to the Jewish
method of computation (see e. g. Gen xlii. 17, 18 ; i Ki xii. 5, 12 ;
Mt xxvii. 63, 64 : cf. Hos vi. 2). 2
8.
Mk viii. 32 ' And he spake the saying openly '. A difficult state-
ment ; for (a) if napprja-ia means plainly and unreservedly, it might
be thought strange that the resurrection should have been so unex-
pected when it occurred ; and (6) if it means that the announcement
was made to others besides ' the disciples ', this seems most unlikely
at this period, and indeed inconsistent with verse 34, which speaks
of the multitude as not being summoned until after this prediction
had been given.
9-
Mk viii. 38 ' In this adulterous and sinful generation ' might be
omitted as seeming to narrow the application of the warning
against being ' ashamed of Christ.
1 Compare the case of the obscure verse Mk ix. 49 ' For every one shall
be salted with fire ', to which the Western text makes an addition (from
Lev ii. 13) which seems to have been meant as explanatory, and which
afterwards became part of the ' Syrian ' text.
3 For other cases see Field, of. cit., p. 13.
124 Statistics and Observations Ft. in. A
10.
Mk ix. 13 * Even as it is written of him '. It is by no means clear
how the ill-treatment of the Baptist had been ' written of. Matthew
avoids the difficulty by dropping the words.
ii.
Mk ix. 15 'All the multitude, when they saw him, were greatly
amazed '. It is very difficult to see what could have been the special
cause of the amazement at this time, for any outward radiance result-
ing from the Transfiguration is most unlikely ; and the statement
is omitted by Matthew and Luke.
f
12.
Mk ix. 22 b-24 ' If thou canst do anything . . . Help thou mine
unbelief '. The fact that the father's prayer was granted, notwith-
standing these confessions of doubt, may have seemed to imply the
acceptance of a lower standard of faith than the Church usually
required ; hence perhaps the omission of this dialogue.
Mk ix. 31 ' The Son of man is delivered up '. A prophetic present:
but the /ze'AAei irapadiftoo-dai of Mt xvii. 22 and Lk ix. 44 is clearer
and more obvious. (Similarly the 6 ey<o TrtVto of Mk x. 38 becomes o
eyo) /leXXo) vlvfiv in Mt XX. 22.)
14.
Mk ix. 39 'There is no man which shall do a mighty woik
in my name, and be able quickly to speak evil of me '. This might
seem to be inconsistent with the teaching of Mt vii. 21-3; and on
that account the words might have been omitted by Luke, and the
whole incident by Matthew.
r 5-
In Mt xii. 8 the killing is said to be before the casting out of the
vineyard ; the interpretation of the parable becomes easier if these
acts are transposed, as is done in Mt xxi. 39; Lkxx. 15.
16.
Mk xv. 45 7rT&>/m. Matthew, Luke, and John use only aa^a in
this narrative : see Swete's note, showing that irrS^a was a word
likely to be avoided here by Christians (as indeed it is in the re-
i 5/. Mark's Gospel 125
ceived text even of Mark), because ' when employed for the dead
body of a human being it carries a tone of contempt '.
Mk xv. 25 ' It was the third hour' : for proofs that this note of
time, which Mark alone gives, has caused difficulties, see e. g.
Speaker s Comm. in loc.
SECTION II
ENLARGEMENTS OF THE NARRATIVE, WHICH ADD NOTHING
TO THE INFORMATION CONVEYED BY IT, BECAUSE
THEY ARE EXPRESSED AGAIN, OR ARE DIRECTLY
INVOLVED, IN THE CONTEXT
These, which have been well named 'context-supple-
ments ', are very numerous in Mark, especially in the earlier
chapters. They occur both in the actual narrative and in
sayings which it embodies. The nature of them may be
understood from the following two specimens :
(a) In ii. 18 a Mark alone says that 'John's disciples and
the Pharisees were fasting ' : but this fact is again
stated in the question put to Jesus in i83, which is
also recorded in substance in Mt ix. 14 ; Lk v. 33.
(b) In xv. 24 Mark alone adds to the mention of casting
lots the words ' upon them, which each should take ' :
but this is of course involved in the previous statement
of all three Synoptists that they ' parted his garments
among them, casting lots '.
I do not propose to print a list of such repetitions and
amplifications, for it would be necessary in many cases to
print with them a lengthy context, without which it could
not be seen that they add nothing to the narrative. But
instances, more or less distinct and characteristic, may be
found and examined in the following verses, numbering
more than a hundred : Mk i. 4, 7, 13, 16, 17, 19, 20, 21, 28,
126 Statistics and Observations pt. in. A
34, 43* ; ii. i, 2f, 8 , 9, i5t, l6 t, i8t, 19! J "i- 8, 13. *7, * 8 ,
30, 31 ; iv. I, 2, 7, 8, 15, r6, 24, 31, 32, 37, 39 ; v. i, 15, 17,
19, 20, 21, 22, 34, 3 8 > 40, 4^ ; vi. 2, 4, 17, 39, 35. 44, 5, 53>
54, 55 ; vii. 2, 8* 13, 14, 15, 18, 19, 21, 23, 25! ; viii. if,
15, 27 ; ix. 2, 8 ; x. 27, 32, 36, 52 ; xi. 2, 4, 6, 15, 27, 28 ;
xii. 2, 14, aif, 4iti 43t 5 xiii - 2, J 9> 2O ; xiv. 4, 5, 7, 11,15,
1 6, 17, 20, 43, 45, 57, 66 ; xv. 22, 24t, 25, 34.
In the two cases marked * the whole verse may be called
a context-supplement, and so may perhaps also iii. 30 : the
mark f has been added to a few other instances, which,
with those marked *, may be considered first as the most
instructive and interesting cases.
A few of the passages here referred to are also included
among the 'duplicate expressions' on pp. 139 ft". below.
Now in a simple and original narrative, written or
dictated by, or directly derived from an eyewitness, such
repetitions and expatiations might very naturally occur :
they may indeed be due to that special determination to
' omit nothing ' which Papias attributes to Mark as the
'interpreter of Peter'. And the omission of them after-
wards, either in the compilation of a manuscript record or
in the course of oral teaching, is also natural and likely.
But what possible cause for the insertion of them by
a later editor can be assigned, except a mere wish to
extend the size of the narrative, without adding to its
substance? And surely such a wish is inconceivable
in the times and circumstances of the composition of the
Gospels. 1
1 Of course there has been no intention of denying in this Section that
there are any 'context-supplements' peculiar to Matthew and to Luke
respectively (see e. g. Mt xiv. 16; xv. 20 ; Lk vi. 8 ; viii. 27, 53) ; but they
are certainly very few in comparison with those in Mark.
m S/. Mark's Gospel 127
SECTION III
MINOR ADDITIONS TO THE NARRATIVE
I use the word * minor ' of the Marcan additions now
referred to, in order to denote this characteristic of them,
that though they add fullness to the narrative, and
though they are almost always more or less graphic and
picturesque and lifelike, they are not such as would seem
important to those who had to teach the elements of
Christianity. So far as we can judge from our earliest
records, ' the memoirs of the Apostles ' were chiefly drawn
upon for the purposes of (i) exhibiting ' Jesus of Nazareth '
as ' approved of God by mighty works and wonders and
signs' (Acts ii. 23), and (ii) of supplying accounts of His
teaching, especially on moral subjects (see e.g. Rom xii ;
James iv ; Clem. Rom. xiii ; Ep. Polycarp ii ; Didache i). 1
There would be no materials available for these purposes,
nor again for the proofs of the Messiahship of Jesus drawn
from prophecy for Jewish hearers, nor again for the
articles of the Creed which soon began to grow out of the
baptismal confession of faith, in the very great majority of
these Marcan augmentations.
The following are characteristic specimens of them :
i. 33 ' All the city was gathered together at the door*,
iii. 9 ' He spake to his disciples that a little boat should wait on
him because of the crowd, lest they should throng him '. 2
iii. 34 ' Looking round on them which sat round about him '.
iv. 35 ' When even was come '.
iv. 38 ' In the stern . . . on the cushion '.
1 And so Irenaeus says that he had heard Polycarp relate what he had
heard from eyewitnesses of the Lord trepl rwv Sum/uecuj/ avrov KCU irepl TTJJ
SiSaaKaXias. Eus., H. E., V. xx, quoting Irenaeus' Epistle to Florinus.
3 How natural that Peter should recall this precaution, and that there-
fore Mark should write it down : yet how likely that other teachers and
writers should omit it, since it appears that after all there was no recourse
to the boat on this occasion (cf. v. 13 ' he goeth up into the mountain ') !
128 Statistics and Observations Ft. in. A
viii. 14 ' They had not in the boat with them more than one loaf.
ix. 36 ' Taking him in his arms '.
x. 50 ' He, casting away his garment, sprang up '.
And others may be examined in the following verses :
i. 19, 20, 29, 41 ; ii. 15; iii. 19, 20, 23, 32; v. 3, 6, 19, 21,
27, 32; vi. 21, 23, 25, 27, 31, 33, 38, 40, 56; vii. 24, 25;
viii. n, 12, 27, 32, 33 ; ix. 3, 14, 15, 16, 26, 34, 35 ; x. i, 16,
17, 2i, 22, 23,46,49; xi. 4, 11,30; xii. 35,41,43; xiii - 3;
xiv. 3, 40, 4i, 44, 54 ; xv. 8, 31, 31, 32. 1
Here again, as in the previous Section, the consideration
of such passages seems to me to leave on the mind a very
strong impression in favour of their having been dropped
by compilers who presumably had in view the needs of
Christian teachers and learners, and against their having
been inserted by an editor of the Ur- Marcus.
But, in both classes of cases ( II and III), there may
seem to be one serious objection to this view. It appears
at first sight extremely improbable that Matthew and
Luke, even though influenced by the same motive, viz. the
adaptation of the Marcan narrative for the practical use
of teachers, should have agreed in the omission of so very
many phrases and details. But this improbability becomes
slighter when we observe that this agreement in omission
is by no means complete and uniform. Our business in
these two Sections has been to take note of words and
passages as to which Mark stands alone. But it is to be
also remembered that there are a good many cases in
which Luke retains, while Matthew omits, both the ' con-
text-supplements ' and the unimportant additional details
of the Marcan document. There are also some cases in
which Matthew retains, while Luke omits ; but these are
1 Perhaps too some statements of Mark alone to the effect that the
explanations of certain sayings, &c., were given to the Apostles subse-
quently and privately might come under this heading : see Mk iv. 10, 34 ;
vii. 17; ix. 28,33 ; x. 10.
m S/. Mark's Gospel 129
not so many, for, as will be seen (p. 158), Matthew has a
much stronger tendency than Luke to shorten narratives
and in this respect to depart from the model of Mark.
A glance in Rushbrooke's Synopticon at the passages
named in the two lists which follow, will supply some
proofs of what has just been said, and will show that there
are differences, as well as agreements, between Matthew
and Luke, which must be taken into account in forming an
estimate of what the Gospel of Mark was when they used
it as a source. Those marked * are of the nature of ' con-
text-supplements ' ; the rest are additional details, some-
times graphic and lifelike, but never religiously or morally
important. 1
LIST I.
Luke, follows Mark in retaining^ while Matthew omits:
*i. Mk i. 44 ; Lk v. 14 : ' for thy cleansing.'
*2. Mk ii. 7 ; Lk v. 21 : 'who can forgive sins, c/ (which is in-
volved in ' blasphemeth ').
3. Mk iii. 3 ; Lk vi. 8 : the man with the withered hand called
to ' stand forth '.
4. Mk iii. 5 ; Lk vi. 10 : 'he looked round about on them/
*5- Mk iv. 41 ; Lk viii. 25 :' one to another/
6. Mk v. 4 ; Lk viii. 29 : the attempts to bind the demoniac.
7. Mk v. 15 ; Lk viii. 35 : ' sitting, clothed and in his right mind/
8. Mk v. 30 ; Lk viii. 45 : ' Jesus . . . said . . . Who touched, &c/
*9. Mk x. 20 ; Lk xviii. 21 :' from my youth/
10. Mk x. 30 ; Lk xviii. 30 : 'in this time ... in the world to come/
11. Mk x. 47 ; Lk xviii. 37 : 'of Nazareth/
*i2. Mk x. 48 ; Lk xviii. 39 : ' the more a great deal/
1 3. Mk xi. 5, 6 ; Lk xix. 32-4 : ' what do ye, loosing the colt, &c.'
14. Mk xiv. 13-15; Lk xxii. 10-12 : the man with a pitcher of
water, &c.
1 Compare Nestle's interesting remarks on the evidence supplied by
textual criticism in support of his view that ' the Gospel was originally
narrated in a much more vivacious style ' than that in which most of our
present authorities present it to us (Textual Criticism of Greek N. T., E. T.,
pp. 192-6).
130 Statistics and Observations Pt. in. A
15. Mk xv. 21 ; Lk xxiii. 26 : 'from the country.'
To which may be added the following taken from the list
(pp. 139 if.) of 'duplicate expressions' in Mark :
* 1 6. Mk ii. 20 ; Lk v. 35 : c in that day ' (or ' those days ').
*iy. Mk iv. 39; Lk viii. 24 : ' the wind ceased.'
*i8. Mk vi. 36 ; Lk ix. 12 : 'the country round about/
LIST II.
Matthezv follows Mark in retaining , while Luke omits :
*i. Mk iii. 33 ; Mt xii. 48 : ' who is my mother, &c.'
2. Mk iv. i ; Mt xiii. i, 2 : 'by the sea side ... he entered into
a boat and sat.'
*3. Mk iv. 5 ; Mt xiii. 5 : ' where it had not much earth.' (Cf.
Lk viii. 6.)
4 Mk v. 23 ; Mt ix. 18 : 'lay thy hands on her, &c.'
*5. Mkv. 28; Mt ix. 21 : 'For she said, If I touch but, &c.'
*6. Mk vi. 35; Mt xiv. 15: the lateness of the hour twice
mentioned.
*y. Mk x. 26; Mt xix. 25: 'they were astonished exceedingly
(this is implied in their question).
8. Mk x. 27 ; Mt xix. 26 :' looking upon them.'
Before passing on from the substance to the phraseology
of Mark, two other kinds of Marcan peculiarities may be
named, the omission of which seems much more probable
than their subsequent insertion by an editor :
i. The Aramaic 1 or Hebrew phrases 'Boanerges' iii. 17 ;
'Talitha cumi ' v. 41 ; ' Corban ' vii. u ; ' Ephphatha '
vii. 34. ' Abba ' xiv. 36 is perhaps not a case in point,
as it seems to have been a ' liturgical formula ' : see
Lightfoot on Gal iv. 6; also Rom viii. 15. In xv. 22
(' Golgotha ') and xv. 34 (' Eloi &c.') there are parallels
in Matthew but not in Luke.
1 See Schurer's Hist, of the Jewish People in the Time of Jesus Christ,
E. T., II. i. 9 f. on the 'complete prevalence of Aramaic ', though ' Hebrew
still remained in use as " the sacred language ".'
in 5"/. Mark's Gospel 131
2. Some unimportant Proper Names, 1 viz. Alphaeus ii.
14; Decapolis v. 20; Bartimaeus the son of Timaeus
x. 46 ; Alexander and Rufus xv. 21 ; Salome xv. 40.
On Boanerges see above, and on Abiathar (ii. 26)
see p. 122.
SECTION IV
RUDE, HARSH, OBSCURE OR UNUSUAL WORDS OR EXPRES-
SIONS, WHICH MAY THEREFORE HAVE BEEN OMITTED
OR REPLACED BY OTHERS 2
(a) Various unusual words and constructions.
i.
Mk i. 10 (rx^o/jifvovs, a word used nowhere else in N. T. or
LXX of the opening of the heavens. In Mt Hi. 16 and Lk iii. 21
we have the more usual and suitable rp*yx6tt<rav, dvf^x^n vai t as in
Is Ixiv. i; Jn i. 51 ; Acts x. 1 1 ; Rev xix. ii. s
2.
Mk i. 1 6 fi$t/3aXAo>rns- without an accusative. In the parallel
Mt iv. 1 8 /3dAAoi/Tny u/i$i'/3X770Tpo>, to which the received text in
Mark has been assimilated : cf. Hab i. 1 7 a/^t/SaAfl TO 4p$4&if<n>poy
nvroO.
3-
Mk i. 23 ev TrvevpaTt aKaGapTw, where Luke has the 'easier phrase'
(Swete) f\(i3v irvcvp.a dai/jLoviov aKciBaprov. So also in Mk v. 2, where
Matthew has &u/zor/io/uei>oi and Luke has e^on/ dac/iowa. These are
the only two places in which V nvfvfuiTi is used with reference to
evil spirits.
1 Dr. A. Wright has discussed the Proper Names in St. Mark very fully
in Some New Testament Problems, pp. 56 ff.
2 Besides E. A. Abbott in Enc. Brit., x. 802, referred to in my first
edition, see Dean A. Robinson, Study of the Gospels, p. 46, especially on
Mark's ' 190 short relative clauses ' ; and on his style generally, Jiilicher,
Introd. to N. T., E. T., pp. 324 f.; and on his Aramaisms which Matthew and
Luke may have 'pruned away', J. H. Moulton, Gram., i. 242 (quoting
Wellhausen), and Allen in Expository Times, xiii. 328 f. ; also Maclean in
Diet, of Christ and the Gospels, ii. 129 ff.
3 See Abbott's remarks, From Letter to Spirit, 642, on 'the special force
about Mark ' here.
K 2
132 Statistics and Observations Pt. in. A
4-
Mk i. 34 and xi. 16 rjQuv, an unusual and irregular form: see
Winer, xiv. 3 (&).
5-
Mk i. 38 Ka>po7r6\(ts : here only in N. T. and not in LXX.
6.
Mk ii. 4, 9, n, 12; vi. 55 K/wzjSarro?, 1 replaced in Matthew and
Luke by K\IVT) or K\ivi8iov, but also used John 4, Acts 2.
7-
Mk ii. 1 6 on= 'why'; also in ix. n, 28. See pp. 13 and 35.
8.
Mk ii. 2 1 2 f7ripdiTTi, a verb found nowhere else in Greek :
replaced in Matthew and Luke by
9-
Mk v. 23 ; vii. 25 Bvyarpiov : here only in N. T. and not in LXX. 3
10.
Mk V. 23 faxnro)s e'xfi. 4
11-14.
Mk vi. 27 o-7T6KouXaTO)p, a Latin word peculiar to Mark, as also is
Kfvrvpiav xv. 39, 44, 45 : see also If'orij? ' sextarius ' in vii. 4 (used
also in Jos. Ant. viii. 2. 9). The phrase in xv. 15, TO IKOVOV 7rotr}o-ai=
' satisfacere,' may also be added. But against these exclusively
Marcan Latinisms is to be set Kovo-rooSm found only in Mt xxvii.
65, 66 ; xxviii. 1 1. See Swete's Comm., p. xliii f., against laying too
great stress on the occurrence of such words.
15-17,
Mk vi. 39 o-vp-noaia o-v/moo-in, and 40 7rpa<Tial Trpatrtat, Hebraistic
expressions : 5 see also 8vo 8vo Mk vi. 7 (the reading dm 6uo 8vo in
Lk x. i is doubtful).
1 This word is condemned by Phrynichus : see Thayer's Lex., s.v.
2 On Mark's use of ir\-f]poj^.a in this verse see Robinson's Ephesians,
p. 256.
3 Mark is thought to have a ' predilection for diminutives' (Hastings
D. B., iii. 251) ; but all the other six of the seven used by him have parallel
in Matthew or in John.
4 This expression is condemned by Phrynichus : see Thayer's Lex., s. v.
5 See however J. H. Moulton, Gram., i. 97.
iv 5"/. Mark's Gospel 133
18.
Mk viii. 12 ct So^o-erm, a Hebraism found here only in N. T.,
except in the citations of Ps. xciv. (xcv.) 1 1 in Heb iii. 1 1 ; iv. 3, 5.
19.
Mk ix. i t fa Iv TIVCS 2)Se To>t> fffTrjKOTwv : an awkward arrangement
of words, which Matthew and Luke avoid by placing their respective
adverbs (&Se and avrov) after T>V.
20.
Mk XI. 14 fJLrjKcn . . . (jir)8c\s Kapnbv (j)dyot. The USC of the
optative had become rare in the Greek of N. T. times (J. H. Moulton,
Gram., i. 179, 197). Besides which it might here seem more like
a wish for, and imprecation of, evil than the ov /u/?** e*
of Mt xxi. 1 9, which has more of a future sense.
21.
Mk xi. 19 orav tye eyevero. On the indicative after oraj/, see pp. 13
and 35.
22.
Mk xii. 4 cKf^oXiWoy or eVcf(paAaiWai>. Of these forms the first
is not found elsewhere, and the second has a different meaning.
See Wright's note, St. Luke, p. 171.
23-
Mk xiii. 1 1 [ii] TTpo/iept/ui/arf, a verb not found elsewhere in N. T.,
LXX, or Classical writers : instead of it we find M /xept/^a^re in
Mt x. 19, Lk xii. 1 1, and M irpo^crav in Lk xxi. 14.
24.
Mk xiii. 1 6 6 els TOV dypov. Though this is explicable (Swete in
loc.] Blass, Gram., p. 122), the preposition <rV as used in Mt xxiv. 18
and Lk xvii. 31 is much more simple and obvious (so also in Mt
xxiv. 40). Similarly we have the contrast between another con-
structio praegnans in Mk xiii. 9 els ffvvaya>ya$ Sapijo-fo-fle and Matthew's
cv rais <rvv. avTwv fj.a(TTiy<a(Tovffiv u/uay (x. 17).
25-
Mk xiii. 19 evovTcii yap at rjfjiepai enelvai 6\l\l/is, an Unusual exprCS-
sion, avoided in Mt xxiv. 21 ; Lk xxi. 23.
1 It is least rare in the Lucan books and in the Epistles ; see p. 53.
134 Statistics and Observations Pt. in. A
26.
Mk xiii. ig tun . . . rotavrr] ' is perhaps unique' (Swete in toe.).
Toiavrrj does not occur in the parallel Mt xxiv. 21, nor in Dan xii. i
(either LXX or Theod.) which is here being referred to. See, how-
ever, Gen xli. 19; and compare jjris TOIOVTTJ in Ex ix. 24 and xi. 6.
Somewhat similar is Mark's ofa . . . OVT&S in the best texts of ix. 3.
27.
Mk xiv. 3 OVTOS avTov . . . KaraKetfievov : a rather awkward con-
currence of two genitives absolute in the same sentence, which
Matthew avoids by re-arrangement (xxvi. 6, 7).
28.
Mk xiv. 19 (Is Ka6' fls : the exact phrase is only found here and in
the Pericope de Adultera (Jn viii. 9). See Deissmann, Bible Studies,
E. T., p. 138.
29.
Mk xiv. 31 eKTrepicraS)* is found nowhere else in Greek
us perhaps in i Thes v. 13).
30-
Mk xiv. 41 dn-c^ft: for this impersonal use of the verb only a
single parallel (from Ps.-Anacreon) is quoted.
Mk xiv. 44 crva-arjpov (for which Mt xxvi. 48 has o-^/ueloj/) : here
only in N. T., but LXX 5 and not very rare elsewhere. 1
32-
Mk xiv. 68 rrpoavXiov : here only in N. T. and not in LXX. Its
place is supplied by 7rv\a>v in Mt xxvi. 71, and Luke has no parallel.
33-
Mk xiv. 7 2 7npa\a>v i a strange and obscure word as used here. 2
Besides the very unusual words which form the greater
1 Another expression condemned by Phrynichus : see Tiber's Lex., s.v.
He also condemns pa-nia^a used in verse 65 (see Abbott, Corrections of Mark,
492).
2 See Field's Notes on Transl. of N. T. in he.
iv S/. Mark's Gospel 135
part of the preceding list, it will be seen in the Appendix
on 'The Synoptists and the Septuagint' (p. 198) that the
list of words peculiar to Mark is on the whole much less
accordant with the LXX than the list of words peculiar to
Matthew and Luke, the latter being the most accordant of
the three. But the LXX may be taken as representing to
us the standard of ordinary Hellenistic (or Koiz^rj) Greek, as
applied to religious subjects. It thus appears that there was
a certain unusualness in Mark's vocabulary which would
render it probable a priori that those who used his memoirs
would, intentionally or unconsciously or both, modify the
language of them by substituting more familiar or more
conventionally sacred expressions.
The relative numbers of Classical and non-Classical
words in the Synoptic Gospels, as shown in the same
Appendix (p. 207), also point, though less decidedly, to
unusualness as a characteristic of the language of Mark.
() Instances of anacoluthon, or broken or incomplete
construction, in Mark, which are altered or avoided in
Matthew or Luke or both.
These are placed together in this sub-section for comparison with
one another, as being particularly characteristic of Mark.
i.
Mkiii. 1 6 f. eVoi^o-ei; rovs oi>8eKa (*at enedrjKfp ovopa ra> Si'/uaw) Uerpov,
2.
Mk IV. 31 f. 0)9 KOKKO) ... 09 OTdV (TTTilpfj . . . fJLlKpOT(pOV OV TSOVTtoV . . .
3-
Mk v. 23 Xt'ycov 6Yi . . . o-\aT<t>s e^ft, Iva (\6&v firtOfjs. The sen-
tence is altered in the Western text of Mark, as well as in Matthew
and Luke.
4-
Mk vi. 8 f . Iva p.r)8ev cupoxrii' . . . , dXXa i
136 Statistics and Observations Pt. in. A
5-
Mk xi. 32 aXXa t*rra>[JiCi> . . . e0o/3oCwro TOV o^Xoz/.
6.
Mk xii. 19 MwiJffjjs fypafycv r,fuv on cav TIVCS . . . Iva
7-
Mk xii. 3840 . . . T&v BfKovTtov fv oroXaty irfpuraTflv Koi a
*rX., of KciTfaOovTes ras oltdas. . . . No doubt 0f\6i>ra>v might govern
the noun aairao-povs (as in Lk v. 39; 2 Cor xi. 12) as well as the
verb TT(pnraT(li>, but the sentence has thus a rather strange sound
which Luke's insertion of <f>t\ovvTo>v removes. But oi KareaQovTes
following the genitive T>V &X. is certainly an anacoluthon, which
Luke avoids by the relative pronoun and verb o?
Mk Xlii. 14 /38e'Xvy/Lta TTJS fpr)na>o-a>s eon^Kora (Mt xxiv. 15 eords) :
apparently a consiructio ad sensum, with which may be compared
Mk ix. 20 tdo>i> avrbv TO nvevpa. (The same thought as in 2 Thes
ii. 3 ff. may have been in the writer's mind.)
9-
Mk xiv. 49 XX' Iva 7r\r]pa>6><riv at ypa(f>ai ) where Matthew supplies
the ellipsis by prefixing TOVTO de 6Xoi/ ycyow instead of uXXa.
With these may be placed three other instances of imperfect con-
struction, which do not amount to anacoluthon, but which also
disappear in Matthew and Luke:
10.
Mk iii. 8 : the repetition of irAi/do? TroXy after TroXv ir\q6os in
verse 7.
ii.
Mk IV. 8 fly TpiaKOVTa Koi ev ef)Kovra Kai ev cKaTov : SO WH, but the
reading is very doubtful.
12.
Mk vii. 19 KaOaptfav Trdvra TO. /3po>/iara, wheVe the nearest verb to
which the participle can be attached is Xeyet at the beginning of
verse 18.
iv S/. Mark's Gospel 137
13-
Mk x. 29, 30 ovSei'f eo-Tti/ os d(f>fjKev . . . tav /iq Xa/Sfl, where Luke has
in the second clause os oi>xi M Aa/3?/ (xviii. 30), and Matthew alters
the saying to nas oo-m OX^MV . . . Xfj^erai.
There are also in Mk iv. 26 ; vii. 2-5 ; xiii. 34 three
broken constructions more or less characteristic of Mark, but
there happen to be no parallel passages in which we can see
how Matthew or Luke dealt with them (with the last of
them, however, cf. Mt xxv. 14).
(c) Cases of 'asyndeton', or want of connexion.
As the word 'harsh' was used in the heading of this
section, attention may here be called to an abruptness of
construction, which may well be called harsh, in the reports
pf certain sayings in Mark, as contrasted with the reports
in Matthew and Luke. This arises from his use of ' asyn-
deton ', i. e. from the absence of conjunctions or other con-
necting words. An examination of the chief instances l of
this difference will, I think, make it appear highly probable
that the smoother and more connected forms of the sentences
in Matthew and Luke were altered from the more rough
and crude forms in Mark, and not vice versa. Compare
Mk i. 27 with Lk iv. 36 6Vt ; Mk ii. 21 with Mt ix. 16 8c,
and cf. also Lk v. 36 ; Mk iii. 35 with Mt xii. 50 ydp ;
Mk v. 39 with Mt ix. 24 and Lk viii. 52 yap; Mk viii. 15
with Mt xvi. 6 *ai; Mk x. 14 with Mt xix. 14 and Lk
xviii. 16 /cat; Mk x. 25 with Lk xviii. 25' yap, and cf. also
Mt xix. 24; Mk xii. 9 with Mt xxi. 40 and Lk xx. i$b
ovv ; Mk xii, 17 with Mt xxii. 21 ovv and Lk xx. 25 roivvv ;
Mk xii. 20 with Mt xxii. 25 8e and Lk xx. 29 ovv, Mk
xii. 23 with Mt xxii. 28 and Lk xx. 33 ovv ; Mk
xii. 27 with Lk xx. 38 8e 2 ; Mk xii. 36 with Lk xx. 42
yap ; Mk xii 37 with Mt xxii. 45 and Lk xx. 44 ovv ;
Mk xiii. 6 with Mt xxiv. 5 and Lk xxi. 8 yap ; Mk xiii. 7
1 I owed some of them to Mr. (now Archdeacon) Allen.
2 Here Matthew agrees with Mark, so the contrast is only with Luke.
138 Statistics and Observations Pt. in. A
with Mt xxiv. 6 and Lk xxi. 9 yap ; Mk xiii. 8 b with Mt
xxiv. 7 Ktti, KCU and Lk xxi. n re, /cat, /cat ; Mk xiii 8 c l
with Mt xxiv. 8 8e; Mk xiii. 9 with Mt x. 17 yap ; Mk
xiii. 34 with Mt xxv. 14 yap ; Mk xiv. 6 with Mt xxvi. 10
yap; Mk xvi. 6 with Mt xxviii. 6 yap [and Lk xxiv. 6 aAAa]. 2
Mk xiv. 8 and 41 are perhaps also worth considering
with their parallels ; and Mk iv. 28 and xiii. 33, to which
there are no parallels, but which illustrate this feature
of the Marcan style.
Only those cases of asyndeton which occur in the sayings
of Jesus or of others have been referred to. For although
Mark has several similar cases in his narrative (see viii. 19,
29^ ; ix. 24, 38 ; x. 27, 28, 29 ; xii. 24, 29, 32 (?) ; xiv. $b, 19),
they cannot be treated as characteristic of him, since they
are largely outnumbered by the cases in which Matthew,
by a usage almost confined to himself and the Fourth
Evangelist, begins a sentence of his narrative with the
historic present Ae'yei or \tyovcnv, and without the employ-
ment of any conjunction (see Mt viii. 7 ; ix. 28 b\ xiii. 51 ;
xvi. 15 ; xvii. 25 ; xviii. 22 ; xix. 7, 8, 10, 18, 20 ; xx. 21,
22 , 23, 33 ; xxi. 31 bis, 41, 42; xxii. 21, 42, 43; xxvi -
35, 64 ; xxvii. 22 bis ; also, in a parable, xx. 7 bis)? But
numerous though these instances of asyndeton in narrative
are, they do not convey the impression of abruptness which
is given by Mark in discourses.
In Luke the decidedly asyndetic constructions are very
few; see, however, xiv. 27; xvii. 32, 33; xxi. 13 in dis-
courses ; vii. 42 ; xix. 22 in parables ; vii. 43 in the narrative.
1 Tisch places in verse 9 the words ap\r) wSivcuv ravra which are here
referred to.
2 Against these is to be set Mt xx. 26 without a conjunction, while Mk x
43 and Lk xxii. 26 have St.
3 Similarly 4'</>7 is used without a conjunction in Mt iv. 7; xix. 21 (WH
; xxvi. 34 ; xxvii. 65 (?) ; also in a parable xxv. 21, 23.
S/. Mark's Gospel
SECTION V
DUPLICATE EXPRESSIONS IN MARK, OF WHICH ONE OR
BOTH OF THE OTHER SYNOPTISTS USE ONE PART,
OR ITS EQUIVALENT
MARK.
32 o\
6 fj\tos
i. 42 (iirr)\6cv mr' ai/rov
rj XeVpa Kai e/ca^e-
picrdr)
*ii. 2O rore vrjcrrevcrov-
<TIV ev CKcivfl TTJ '
ii. 25
Kai
iii. 26 ov dvvarai crrr/yai,
aXXa reXo? e^et
tiv. 5
*iv. 21 VTTO TOV
. . . rj VTTO rr;!' K\ivr)v
*iv. 39 eKo
6 av<--
s Kai (yevero ya\r]vr)
iv. 4O Tl SflXoi fffTfj
. . . TOJ>
Xe-yiioi/a
V. 19 fts rov otKoi/
V. 19 oo-a o Kvptos (roi
TreTToirjKfv Kai r]\tr)<Ttv
(T
V. 23 ti/a . . . eirtdfjs ray
avrf] tva craBf)
MATTHEW.
viii. 16 o\sias 5e
viii. 3 eKadepiadrj avrov
rj \C7rpa
IX 15 Tore vr](TTe(>(Tov(nv
x. 3
ii. 26 TTCO? OUV (TTa0Tj-
T) j3<io"tXeta au-
y?i/
v. 15 VTTO roi/
viii. 26 e'yeVero
viii. 29 ri fieiXoi eWe,
ix. 1 8 fTTides rrjv x f "ip l *
aov CTT avrfjv KOI (TJ-
LUKE.
iv. 40 ftviwroc 6e
?;Xtou
V. 13 r; Xen-pa a?r^
arr atrov
V. 35 Tore vrjO'Tfixrovaiv
(v eKelvais rats T)p.fpais
VI. 3
xi. 1 8 TTCOS- (rraQfjo-eTai
/SaaiXeia avrov ,'
viii. 6 ri
Viii. 1 6 . . . (TKfVfl r} VTTO-
Karco K\ivr]f) also xi.
33 etV KpviTTrjv . . .
oiSe VTTO TOJ/ p.6diov
viii. 24 cTTava-avro Kai
eyeVero
viii. 25 TTOU 17 TrtVris
viii. 35 r " I/ u
d()' oy ra
viii. 39 ft? rov of/cd/'
viii. 39 6Va o-oi fTToi
140
Statistics and Observations Pt. in. A
MARK.
V. 33 <po/3/7#fto-a Kal Tpe-
MATTHEW.
LUKE,
viii. 47 Tpfuovva
uovcra
V. 39 l ri tiopvpeio-Qe Kal
...
viii. 52 ^17 xXaiere
vi. 4 Kf il fv Tols avy-
xiii. 57 ... *at eV T//
...
yevevaiv avTOv Kal ev
oiKta auToC
Trj oiKta avTov
*vi. 36 (IS TOVS KVK\(0
xiv. 1 5 f is Tas Kti>p.as
ix. 12 fty TO? KVK\(O KO>-
dypovs Kal K<auas
fj.us K(tl aypovs
Vii. I 5 cgwdcV . . . flo-TTO-
XV. 1 1 elo-epxop.fvov
[Wanting here]
pevouevov
vii. 21 ewdev . . . e< Tfjs
XV. 19 e/c T^S Kapdias
[Wanting here]
Kapdias
" i 1
Viii. 17 OVTTd) VOflTf Ov8f
xvi. 9 OVTTO) vofirf . . .
[Wanting here]
ix. 2 KCT' iftiav povovs
xvii. I KOT' Idiav
x. 22 o~Tvyvdo~as . . . Xv-
XIX. 22 \VTTOV [J.VOS
xviii. 23 Trepi'Xiwo?
Trovuevos
X. 29 fVfKev e/zoO Kai
xix. 29 evfKev TOV euov
xviii. 29 fiveKfv TTJS j3a-
[ei'e/te i/] TOU evayye\iov
OVOfJLUTOS
o'tXeiaS' TOU 6cov
x. 30 i/Ci/ eV TW Kaipa)
...
xviii. 30 ev TV KatpfS
Toi/reo
TOVTG)
X. 38 melv TO TTOTTjpiov
XX. 22 TTtetV TO TTOTfjptOV
[Luke wanting here,
... ^ TO /3a7rTio"/Lia . . .
but cf. xii. 50]
jSa7TTto~6rjvai
xi. 2 i>6vs flffiropevo-
xxi. 2 et-^uff
xix. 30 elo-TTopevouevot
(JLCVOl
xii. 14 f^(o~Ttv dovvai
xxii. 17 fco~Tiv dovvai
XX. 22 ej~TTi.v fads Kai-
Krjvo~ov Kaiaapi ?; oi/y
Krjvffov KaiVapi ^ ovy
o-api <f>6pov dovvai fj
Sw/tev 17 /i^ d&uevj' *
ov;
xii. 44 TrdWa oo-a flx (v
[Wanting here]
xxi. 4 Trdvra TOV ftiov ov
. . . oXoy TOV ftiov
fo>
txiii. 28 aTraXos- ycvrjToi
xxiv. 32 yevrjrai dnaXbs
xxi. 30 7rpo/3aXa>o-M'
Kal K(pvr} Ta (pv\\a
Kal TO. (pv\\a K(pvr]
txiii. 29 eyyvs eo~Tiv Vt
xxiv. 33 eyyvs C'O-TIV eVi
xxi. 31 fyyvs eo~Tiv
ftpaw
Ovpais
*xiv. I TO Ilao-^a Kal TO
xxvi. 2 TO nuo"^a
xxii. I T) eopTi) T&V at>-
u.(av ft \eyou.(vr) Uda va
1 See also the preceding verse.
2 If with Tisch we were to retain in Mk xii. 23 orav dvaffrwffiv after \v
TJ7 dvacrrdaei, it would supply the next case : but see WH, Notes, p. 26.
3 D a omit /col rd a^v^a : see Allen on Mt xxvi. 2.
v
. Mark's Gospel
141
MARK.
MATTHEW.
LUKE.
XIV. 6 acpere ai'Trjv' TI
XXVi. IO Tl K07TOVS TTdpe-
[Luke wanting. But
avrfj KOTTOVS Trapeze/
XCTC TTJ yvvaiKi;
cf. Jn xii. 7 a(pfs
avTrjv]
xiv. 1 5 effTpwfj.evov eroi-
[Wanting here]
xxii. 12 cVTpo)/ueVoi/
/zov
xiv. 30 o-rjfJLepov TavTTj rfj
xxvi. 34 fv ravTi] TTJ
xxii. 34 o~Tjfj.epov
VVKTL
VVKTl
xiv. 43 ' *v@vs f TI avrov
xxvi. 47 CTI avTov \a-
xxii. 47 6Tt avToO Xa-
\a\ovvTos
\OVVTOS
XoGfTOP
xiv. 6 1 eVia>7ra Kai OVK
xxvi. 63 eVia)7ra
[Wanting here]
d.Tr(KpivaTo ovdev
xiv. 68 OI/TC oida oCVe
xxvi. 70 ou/c oida TI X'-
xxii. 57 owe oida auToV
xv. 21 jrapayovra . . .
... .
xxiii. 26 fpxopevov OTT'
fp)(6fjLvov an* dypov
aypoO
? xvi. 2 Xiai> Trpwi . . .
xxviii. I rji nt(pa)-
xxiv. I opdpov (3aQ(a>s
dvardXavTOs TOV nAiov
a-Kovo-ri fi? ...
* In these cases Luke also has two phrases, so the contrast is only
between Mark and Matthew.
t In these cases Matthew also has two phrases, so the contrast is
only between Mark and Luke.
The following places, with their parallels, are also worth
notice, though in these cases it may be said that something
is added by each part of Mark's duplicate expression, so
that one part does not merely repeat the other: Mk i.
15 ; iii. 5, 29 ; vi. 30 ; viii. u ; ix. 12, 35 ; x. 16, 46 ; xiv.
7, 44 ; xv. 32, 42.
And the following passages supply some other instances
of Mark's pleonastic way of writing 2 : Mk i. 28, 35, 38, 45 ;
iv. 2, 8 ; v. 5, 26 ; vi. 25 ; vii. 33 ; viii. 28 ; xv. 26. 3
It may perhaps be mentioned as a sign of Mark's
1 Perhaps, however, the iSov in Matthew and Mark may be taken as an
equivalent to (vOvs, which (or eufoW) is the LXX rendering of .r r in three
out of the five cases in which the Hebrew can be compared.
a It is only meant that this pleonastic way of writing is especially and
predominantly Marcan, not that it is exclusively so : see Lk v. 26; ix. 45 ;
xi. 36 ; xviii. 34 ; and especially viii. 25, where Luke has the duplicate ex-
pression as compared with Mk iv. 41 ; Mt viii. 27.
3 'EK iraiSioOfv (Mk ix. 21 only) and drro natcpoOev (p. 12) may be here
noted as grammatically pleonastic expressions.
142 Statistics and Observations Pt. in. A
fondness for 'duality' that he uses the double negative
much more frequently than the other Synoptists, the
numbers in the historical books being Mt 3, Mk 17, Lk 8,
Acts 5, Jn 17. But no great stress can be laid on the use
of a construction so common in Greek generally. (For
ovKfTi with another negative, see above, p. 13.) Perhaps too
Mark's fondness for the use of a compound verb followed
by the same preposition * may come under this heading.
This section has an important bearing on a point which
was much discussed before the priority of Mark to
Matthew and Luke had obtained its present general
acceptance. It used to be thought that in such passages
as i. 32, 42 ; xiv. 30 (see above) Mark had put together
phrases from Matthew and Luke. But after looking
through all these instances of Mark's habitual manner
of duplicate expression, it will appear far more probable 2
that he had here used two phrases in his customary way,
and that in these cases Matthew happened to adopt one
of them and Luke the other, whereas in some other cases,
e.g. Mk ii. 25 ; xiv. 43 (see above), they both happened to
adopt the same one. 3
1 For instances of this see Allen's Sf. Matthew, pp. xxv f.
2 So Plummer, Intern. Crit. Comm. on Lk iv. 40, agreeing with E. A. Abbott.
3 How natural and obvious a course it would be for any writer to choose
one or other of Mark's similar phrases, instead of retaining both of them,
is illustrated by an interesting fact to which Prof. K. Lake called my attention,
when the above list of parallels was first published. It appears that in at
least six of the places there referred to the Sinaitic-Syriac text of Mark
gives only one part of his duplicate expression, viz. in Mk i. 32, 42; vi. 36 ;
vii. 21 ; x. 30 ; xiv. 43. See also xii. 14 (in xii. 44 the Syr sin text seems to
be imperfect). Cf. Lake's Text of the N. T., p. 38.
vi S/. Mark's Gospel 143
SECTION VI
THE HISTORIC PRESENT IN MARK
It will be seen in the following lists that the 'historic
present' is very frequent in Mark's narrative, compara-
tively rare in Matthew's, and extremely rare in Luke's. This
usage accounts for the numerous occurrences in Mark of
Xey ct instead of a7rei> (since enreuj has no present in use),
which constitute a large proportion of the cases in which
Matthew and Luke agree against Mark. 1
Now if (as we see was probably the case in other
matters) Matthew and Luke made this change of phraseo-
logy from Mark, they were only preferring a more usual to
a less usual mode of expression. For it appears from the
LXX that the employment of the historic present had been
up to this time by no means common with the writers of
sacred story in the Koivij or Hellenistic Greek ; if, for
instance, we take the verbs which Mark most frequently uses
in this way, viz. Ae'yet, Aeyouo-i^, and epxcrai, ep\ovrai t it will
be found that they are thus used in this one short Gospel
considerably more often than in the whole of the historical
books of the Old Testament. And, if we take all verbs
into account, we find that Mark is nearly approached in this
usage by only one of the various translators whose hands
can be traced in the LXX namely the renderer of
i Kingdoms (=i Samuel) into Greek. 2
In John the historic present is found 162 times (besides
two cases preserved by Tisch in xi. 29). But when we
remember the respective lengths of the two Gospels (Mark
occupying about 41 and John about 53 pages in WH's Greek
Test.), it appears that Mark uses it more freely than John.
This however would be mainly accounted for by his propor-
1 See Appendix B to Part III, p. 208.
2 On the use of the Historic Present in LXX, see Additional Note, p. 213.
144
Statistics and Observations Pt. in. A
tion of narrative to discourse being so much higher than
John's : there are comparatively few cases in Jn v-x and
xiv-xvii, and none at all in chapters ix, x, xv, xvii. 1
The usage is frequent in Josephus. And Dr. J. H.
Moulton says that it is common in the papyri. 2
In several cases the historic present gives to this Gospel
something of the vividness produced in the parallel places
of Matthew and Luke by the use of i8ov, which is never
employed by Mark (or by John) in narrative ', but by Matthew
33 times and by Luke 16 times.
List of 151 Historic Presents in MARK.
Mark.
\. 12 ciejSaXXct
21
30
37
38
Parallel word (if any}
in Matthew.
Parallel word (if any)
in Luke.
I avfatirj
iv. I J/yero
...
31 xar^X^ei
...
38 TjptoTrjcra
T
43 ftTrev
. 2 (OU . . . 7TpO(reA-
V. 12 eytvero
6a>v
I8ov
3 Xeyo>i>
13 Xe'ycoj/
4 Xe'yfi*
14 Trap^yyti
2 i8oi> 7rpo<re'(pfpoy
1 8 /cat tSou
poi're?
. . .
19 KClOrjKdV
2 (17TCV
f
2O finev
4 fiVf >
22 ftjTfV
6 Xf'yfi*
24 ?!/
9 Xe'yei*
27 flTTfV
IO e'yeVfro
...
12 flTrei/
31 e?7Tfi/
14 7rpo<re'pxoi/Tai*
...
Xeyoires
?
33 ein-av
3 ftWei/
vi. 3 clircv
...
8 ^7T^
I I L7TV
9 e?7re^
41 Xeyfi
44 Xe'yci
ii. 3 cpxovrai (pepovres ix.
4 xaXoVi
5 Xey
8 Xeyei
IO Xe'yei
14 Xeyfi
15 yiVerai
17 Xe'yei
\eyovo-iv
25 Xe'yei xii.
iii. 3 Xe'yei
4 Xtyfi
1 On John see Abbott, /o/i. Gram., 2482.
2 Gram, of N. T. Greek, i. 121.
3 In these lists, as elsewhere, WH's text is taken as the standard.
KOI
(pe-
VI
5/. Mark's Gospel
Parallel word (if any) Parallel word (if any}
Mark.
m Matthew.
m Z,^.
iii. 5 Xe'yei
xii. 13 Xe'yei* vi.
10 e?7rev
13 avaftaivei
...
12 e'ye'i/ero . . . e'^eX-
TTpoorKaXeiTcu
19 ep^erai
...
13 7rpo<re<pc!>yj7<rei/
2O 0~VV6pX*TOl
31 fpx VTal
46 iSou viii
. 19 Trapeyevero
32 Xe'yov(ni>
[47 &,]
2O aTrrjyyeXf/
33 Xe'yei
48 eiTrei/
...
34 Xe'yei
49 eiTrej/
T
21 flTTtV
iv. I 0-urayerac
xiii. 2 (ruvt)\0r)(rav
4 o-wioVroy
13 Xe'yei
...
...
35 ^*y et
Viii. I 8 Kf\CV(TfV
22 eiTrev
37 yiVerai
24 e'yeVero
23 Kare^rj
38 fycipovo~iv
25 fjycipav
24 ftifjyc'pav
\cyovo-iv
,, Xe'yoj/rey
,, Xe'yowes
V. 7 Kpdt-as . . . Xe'yei
29 eVpa^af Xc'yov-
28 dvaKpdas . . .
rey
f
9 Xeyei
...
30 crircv
15 epxovrai
34 e'??X0ej/
35 ^X0ai
19 Xe'yei
.'.'.'
38 Xeycoj/
22 epx^rai . . . Kai
ix. 1 8 iSov . . . 7rpo<r\6a>v
41 idoi) ?i\6fv
,, Trarrei
rrpoffeKvvfi
iTftratv
23 TrapaKaXeZ
...
TrnpfKaXei
35 epxovTai
49 epx Tal ^
36 Xe'yei
50 aTTfKpiQr)
38 epyofTdi
23 e'X^coi/
51 e'X^i/
,, peopet
t'dcoj/
...
39 Xe'yei
eXey'V
52 e&rey
4 07rapaX / z/3am
...
5 1 OUK d<j)T]Kl> . . .
eiaTropeverru
25 eicreX$coi>
,.r*
41 Xe'yei
...
54 ($a)vr)(rfV Xe'ytor
vi. I ep^erai
xiii. 54 e'X^eoi/ ? iv.
1 6 ^X^ev
,, duoXovdoi (riv
...
...
7 Trpoo-KaXelrni
x. I Trpoff/caXetra- ix.
I auwcaXeo-d/Liei o?
30 o-vvdyovrai
IO VTToa-TptyavTfS
31 Xe'yei
...
...
37 Xeyoucrti'
xiv. 1 7 Xe'yov<rii> *
13 eiVai/
38 Xe'yei
...
...
HAWKINS
L
146
Statistics and Observations PUIII.A
Parallel word (if any) Parallel word (if any)
Mark.
in Matthew. in Luke.
vi.
38 \eyovo~iv
...
45 aTroXvei (?)
xiv. 22 diroXvo-fl
48 epxerai
25 rj\6ev
VO
50 Xe'yei
27 eXaX^crev . . . Xeycov ...
.
vii.
I crvvayovrai
XV. I 7TpO(Tep^OI/Tat*
'I
5 eVepwTwo-iv
\cyovTfS
i
1 8 Xe'yei
l6 eirrei/
..-
28 Xe'yei
27 ei7rei>
^
32 (pepovo-iv
? 30 TrpoatjKQov ...
s
e^oj/rey
,. o
irapiiKaXovo-iv
...
34 Xe'yei
...
I
viii.
I Xeyei
32er7rey
1
6 yrapnyye'XXei
35 Trapayysi'Xas
12 Xe'yei
xvi. 2 eiTrei/
17 Xe'yei
8 eltrev
bfl
19 Xeyoi>(rii>
...
en
2O Xeyouo-ii>
...
|
22 epxovrai
... ...
^
,, (pepov&iv
...
^
TrapaKaXouo-ii/
...
29 Xe'yei
l6 ei?rej/ ix. 2O elirev
5.
33 Xe'yei
23 eiTrep
ix.
2 TrapaXapfidvd
xvii. I TrapaXa/AjSarei * 28 7rapaXa/3a>p
ai/a<pepei
cz^a^epet * ,, dveftij
5 Xeyei
4 efTre^ 33 e?7rei/
19 Xeyei
17 eiTrej/ 41 eirrey
35 Xeyei
...
X
. I epxerai
xix. I ^X0ei/
,, o~vv7ropevovTai
2 t)KO\ov0r]oav
II Xe'yei
...
23 Xe'yei
23 e?7rei^ xviii. 24 eirrey
24 Xe'yei
...
27 Xe'yei
x *
2O eirrey 27 ei?rey
35 TTpOO-TTOpeiWTttl
xx. 2O 7rpoo-J}X0ei/
42 Xe'yei
25 eiTrei/ ? xxii. 25 efTrei/
46 epxovrai
29 e'KTropeuo/xeVcoy xviii. 35 e'yeVero . . . eV
TW eyyifew
49 (poovovo-i
...
xi
I yyiovo"iv
xxi. I fjyyia-av xix. 29 fjyyio-ev
,, aTToareXXei
OTreVreiXey OTreVreiXej/
2 Xe'yei
2 Xe'ywi' 3^ Xeytoy
4 \vov<Tiv
33 Xuoi/rcw
. Mark's Gospel
'47
Mark.
Parallel word (if any} Parallel word (if any)
in Matthew. in Luke.
xi. 7
xxi. 7
xix. 35
5)
15
21 Xeyei
22 Xe'yei
27 "
33 f .
Xe'yei
xii. 13 aTrooTe'XXouo-iy
1 6 Xe'yei
1 8 ep^oi/rai
xiii. I Xe'yei
xiv. 12 \eyovo-iv
21
23 7rpoa-rj\dav XX.
27
I 7rc<TTr)<rav
xxii. 1 6 d-rro<TT\\ov(nv *
,, \fyovras
2O Xe'yei *
xxiv. I Trpo<rr>\6ov . . xxi.
2O
21 Xe'yovres 1
xxvi. 1 7 7rpo(rri\dov . . . xxii.
XeyovTfs
5 Xeyowcoi;
9 finav
13 aTTOOTe'XXei
. . .
8 aTreVreiXj
Xe'yei
1 8 eiW
IO ewrej;
17 epxerai
2O az/e'^eiTO
14 dvTT<rfv
27 Xe'yei
31 Xe'yei*
...
30 Xeyei
34 0>?
34 e?7T/
32 epxovrai
36 ep^erai *
40 yevd/iei'oy
,, Xe'yfi
Xeyei *
eiVey
33 7rapaXjuai/ei
37 TrapaXajScov
...
34 Xeyei
38 Xe'yei *
...
37 epxerai
40 fpxcrai *
45 eX^wi/
cvpio-Kei
Vpi(TK(l *
t"
Xe'yei
Xe'yei*
46 eiVf
41 ep^erai
45 e'pxerai *
...
Xe'yei
Xe'yei *
...
43 Trapayivcrai
47 Wow . . . i
fX- 47 i8ow . .
0V
yiaev
45 Xe'yei
49 ewrei/
...
51 Kparovo-iv
...
...
53 a-vvepxovTai
57 O'vvr)x@ 1 l (j ' av
...
6 1 Xe'yei
63 fiTrev
66 \eyovTfs
63 Xe'yei
65 Xeycoi/
71 eiVai;
66 ep^erai
69 7rpoa-fi\0fv
...
67 Xe'yei
Xeyou(ra
56 17T(V
XV. 2 Xe'yei
xxvii. II e^iy
xxiii. 3 e^)?;
1 6 o-uj/KaXoCoii/
27 avi/^yayov
...
L 2
148
Statistics and Observations Pt. in. A
Mark.
xv. 1 7 fvdidv<rKov<riv xxvii.
Parallel word (if any)
in Matthew.
,,
20 e
21 dyyapevovviv
22 (pepoww
24
,,
27
29
31
32 TjyydpeVGav
33 e'X&Wes
35
38 (rravpovvrat *
xxviii. I r)\6fv
5e5
Parallel word (if any)
in Luke.
Pxxiii. II 7repi/3aXa>i/
26 dirfjyayov
33
34
32
XVI. 2 epxovrai XXVlll. I f)\vtt> XXIV. I
4 0fa>pov<riv ... 3 e ^P"
6 Xe'yei 5 erei> 5 clirav
* In these 21 cases only does Matthew agree with Mark in using
the historic present (no less than 9 of them occur in Mk xiv. 27-41 ;
Mt xxvi. 31-45).
t This is the only case in which Luke agrees with Mark in using
the historic present.
Mark does not ever use the historic present in Parables.
List of 78 Historic Presents in MATTHEW. 1
ii. 13 (pmVerai (?)
ix. 6 Xt'yei*
xvii. I d/>a$e'pei*
19 (paiVerai
9 Xe'yei*
2O Xeyei
iii. I yrapayiVerot
14 Trpoo-epxovTai*
25 Xe'yei
13 Trapayiverai
28 Xe'yei
xviii. 22 Xe'yei
15 d(pirja'LV
Xe'yoixru/
xix. 7 Xeyovo-iy
iv. 5 7rapaXup./3at/ei
37 Xe'yei
8 Xe'yei
6 Xeyei
xii. 13 Xe'yei*
IO Xeyoucrti/
8 7rapaXap./3ai/ei
xiii. 51 Xe'yovtriy
1 8 Xeyei (? (prjcriv)
,, deiKMO-iv
xiv. 8 (prjffiv
2O Xeyei
1 Xe'yei
1 7 Xe'yovo'ii' *
XX. 21 Xe'yei (?)
1 1 d(pirj(TiV
31 Xe'yei
22 Xe'you0-ii>
ig Xe'yei
XV. I TTpoo-epxovTtn*
23 Xe'yei
viii. 4 Xe'yei*
12 \eyovffiv
33 \eyovo-tv
7 Xeyei
33 Xeyovffiv
xxi. 13 Xe'yei
2O Xe'yei
34 Xe'yei
1 6 Xeyei
22 Xeyet
xvi. 15 Xe'yei
19 Xeyei
26 Xe'yei
XVli. I TrapaXo/i/Safei *
31 Xe'you(Tii/
1 It is noticeable that in Matthew the words which signifyspeaking^e'-yet,
\fyovffiv, (prjaiv) constitute slightly more than three-fourths of the whole
number, being 59 out of the 78 ; while in Mark they constitute less than
half, being 72 out of the 151.
VI
S/. Mark's Gospel
149
xxvi. 5 2 Xeyei
64 Xeyei
71 Xe'yet
xxvii. 13 Xe'yei
22 Xe'yei
,, Xe'yovtrtv
38 a-ravpovvrai *
xxviii. 10 Xeyei
* These are the 21 cases in which Matthew agrees with Mark in
using the historic present.
Matthew also uses the following 1 5 presents in Parables :
xxi.
3*
Xe'yei
xxvi. 31
Xe'yei
*
4i
XeyouTiv
35
Xe'yei
42
Xeyei
36
epxe 7
ni
*
xxii.
16
a7roo-r;XXov-
Xe'yei
*
aw*
38
Xeyei
*
20 Xeyei *
40
epx
at
*
21
XeyovoHi/
CVpi(TKft *
\ X
N. /
*
91
Aeyei
>
Ac j/cl
42
Xeyouo'ii'
45
epx*i
-at
*
43
Xe'yei
Xe'yei
*
xiii. 28 Xe'yovo-iy
29 <pr)(riv
xviii. 32 Xe'yei
xx. 6 Xeyei
xxii. 8 Xe'yei
12 Xeyei
44 VTrayet
Travel
ayopa^ei
,, Xeyei
8 Xe'yei
XXV. 1 1 epxovra
19 ep^erai
,, crvvaipft
List of 4 [0r 6] Historic Presents in LUKE.
vii. 40 (pr)(rii> viii. 49 epxfroi t xi. 37 epcora xi. 45 Xeyei
Besides the above 4 cases, there are only the following 2, which
are in passages double-bracketed by WH and omitted by Tisch :
xxiv. 12 /SXeVfi (as in Jn xx. 5) xxiv. 36 Xe'yei l (as in Jn xx. 19)
t Agreeing with the epx ov * n Mk v. 35.
Luke also uses the following 5 presents in Parables :
xiii. 8 Xeyei xvi. 7 Xeyet xvi. 23 opa xvi. 29 Xtyet xix. 22 Xe'yet
It may be added that in Acts there are 13 Historic Presents :
viii. 36 (prjaiv xxii. 2
x. II Gtcopel xxiii. 1 8
27 eupiovcet xxv. 5
31 ^ai' * 22
24
xxvi. 24
xii. 8 \eyft
xix. 35 (prjaiv
xxi. 37 Xe'yet
1 Except in this one very doubtful case, Luke never uses \eyei of Jesus
(Abbott, in Enc. Bibl, ii. 1766).
2 In the recital by Cornelius.
150 Statistics and Observations Pt. in. A
SECTION VII
THE CONJUNCTION Kat PREFERRED TO M IN MARK
The two most constantly recurring causes of the agree-
ment of Matthew and Luke against Mark are two
preferences of Mark, viz. (i) for Xiyeiv instead of etTreir, as
referred to in the last section, and (ii) for Kat instead of de.
The latter preference requires a few words of notice in any
close examination of the Marcan peculiarities, though the
difference in meaning between the two conjunctions is
practically so slight ; for, as Winer points out, 1 ' Ac is
often used when the writer merely subjoins something
new, different, and distinct from what precedes, but on
that account not sharply opposed to it. ... Hence in the
Synoptic Gospels Kat and 8e are sometimes parallel.'
Now there are at least 26 cases in which both
Matthew and Luke have 8e where Mark has Kat: see
Mk iii. 4, 32 ; iv. n, 18, 20, 35 ; v. 13, 14 ; vi. 35, 37 b ; viii.
28 b t 36 ; ix. 30 ; x. 23 ; xi. 4, 8, 9, 18, 31 ; xii. 35 ; xiii. 3 ;
xiv. 12, 53, 54; xv. 15 b ; xvi. i, and parallels.
Such cases must of course be counted in by those who
are enumerating the points of agreement between Matthew
and Luke against Mark. But it seems to me that they
carry hardly any weight as signs either (a) that the
Petrine source which Matthew and Luke used was different
in language from our Gospel of Mark, or (b) that either
Matthew or Luke must have seen the other's Gospel. 2
For it is to be observed, first, that Mark's preference for
Kat rather than 6^ is a characteristic of his style throughout
his Gospel. 3 Two proofs of this may be given :
1 liii. 7 b.
2 See Abbott, Corrections of Mark, 536 ff. ; and Enc. Brit. , x. 807 a.
* Chapter xiii is an exception ; and, speaking generally, 8( is less rare
in the later than in the earlier chapters.
vn St. Mark's Gospel 151
1. He uses 8e less than half as freely as the other
Synoptists do. For 8^ is found in Mark only about
156 times, 1 whereas it would be found quite 300
times if its use was as general as it is in Matthew
and Luke, where it is employed about 496 and
508 times respectively (those Gospels being longer
than Mark by more than one-third).
2. If we take the sections and sub-sections of Mark, as
denoted in WH by fresh paragraphs and by spaces
respectively, they amount together to 88. Of these
no less than 80 begin with KCU, and of the others only 6
have 8e as the second word. But in Matthew out of
159 such divisions only 38 begin with KCU, while 54
have 8e as the second word ; and in Luke out of the
145 divisions only 53 begin with KCU, while 83 have 8e
as the second word (including 8e Kat 4 times).
Therefore, in the above-mentioned places where Matthew
and Luke agree against Mark, the three were only adhering
to their habitual preference.
And, secondly, it is worth notice that we see in the LXX
that different writers (in this case, different translators)
had their personal proclivities in this little matter, though
KCU largely preponderates on the whole as the rendering
of the Hebrew copula. 2 If we take as specimens a few
chapters from the historical books, we find 8e used toler-
ably often in Gen iv, xviii, xix ; Ex iii-vi, whereas it is
very nearly absent from Judg xiii-xiv ; 3 Ki xvi-xxii ;
Neh i-ii (=2 Esdr xi, xii). 3 If, then, other Hellenistic
1 For these numbers I have had to rely on Bruder, with some corrections
of my own : Moulton and Geden do not give Se or /rat. On John see Abbott,
Joh. Gram., 2133^
2 It is curious that, as to this one small point only, Mark should be nearer
to LXX usage than Matthew or Luke. See Appendix A to Part III, 'The
Synoptists and the Septuagint ' (p. 198).
3 In these eleven chapters there are but five instances of 5e, viz. 3 Ki
xvii. 13 ; xx. 2, 6 ; xxi. 23, 39. In Jonah there are but four instances, viz.
i. 5; ii. 10 (in the Psalm) ; iii. 3 ; iv. n.
152 Statistics and Observations Pt. in. A
writers thus varied in their use of these conjunctions, we
need not look for anything suggestive or significant in the
fact that Matthew and Luke happened to have one habit,
and Mark another habit in this same matter, and that
consequently two of them often agree against the third
when we can compare them in the triple narrative.
On the whole it seems to me that such an examination
of the Marcan peculiarities as has now been attempted
supplies results which are largely in favour of the view
that the Petrine source used by the two later Synoptists was
not an ' Ur-Marcus ', but St. Mark's Gospel almost as we
have it now. Almost ; but not quite. For instance, a later
editor's hand is very probably to be seen in i. I ('Jesus
Christ l ') ; ix. 41 (' Christ's 2 ') ; probably also in the inser-
tion of ' the gospel 3 ' and ' persecutions ' in viii. 35 and x.
29, 30 ; perhaps also in the reference to ' the Jews ' in vii.
34 ; 4 and again in the numerals 200 and 300 (vi. 37 ; xiv. 5),
both of which are also found in the Johannine tradition 5
(vi. 7 ; xii. 5) ; and possibly in a few other cases of
additional matter, such as the ' 2000 ' in v. 13, and the
disagreement of the witnesses in xiv. 56, 59.
For these last four are interesting and definite particulars
1 For the only other occurrences of 'Jesus Christ ' in the Gospels are Mt. i. i,
18 (?) ; xvi. 21 (?) ; Jn i. 17 ; xvii. 3 : it (or ' Christ Jesus') is found 15 times
in Acts and very frequently in the Epistles.
2 For ' Christ ' as a name is found without the article here only in the four
Gospels and Acts (Lk xxiii. 2 not being a case in point) : with the article
Mt i. 17 ; xi. 2 xxiii. 10 ; Acts ii. 31 and viii. 5 : and in the Epistles fre-
quently both without and with the article. In this verse too Mark's vSaros
may perhaps seem less original than Matthew's more unusual faxpov (x. 42).
3 fvayytkiov, however, is a word generally characteristic of Mark (p. 10).
* For, excluding the phrase ' King of the Jews ', this title is used in the
plural only 4 times in the Synoptic Gospels (here ; Mt xxviii. 15 ; Lk vii 3 ;
xxiii. 51) ; but in John 63 times (excluding iii, 25 but including iv. 96), and
in Acts 70 times.
5 But on the relations between this and Mark compare Abbott, Joh. Voc. t
1731 ff.
vn S/. Mark's Gospel 153
such as, on the one hand, it seems extremely improbable
that both Matthew and Luke would have thought fit to
leave out, and such as, on the other hand, a subsequent
editor, or scribe, or owner of a Gospel 1 would wish to add,
if they had happened to come to his knowledge. 2
1 See Sanday, Inspiration, pp. 295, 297, 0:1 the 'freedom' which seems to
have been used ' in propagating the text of the Gospels ' : also Blass, Philology'
of the Gospels, pp. 77 ff. ; A. Robinson, Study of Gospels, p. 24.
2 On the agreements of Matthew and Luke against Mark, where they seem
to be using the Marcan document as a Grundschrift, see below, Appendix B
to Part III. On possible compilation in the Second Gospel see above,
p. 116.
B. ON THE GOSPEL OF ST. MATTHEW.
IN the following sections will be collected some phe-
nomena of this Gospel, bearing upon the method and
purpose of its composition. The word composition is an
appropriate one, for in turning from Mark to Matthew we
have passed from the simplest of our Gospels to that in
which there are the clearest signs of compilation and of
artificial arrangement (see especially Sections III, IV). 1
SECTION I
THE QUOTATIONS FROM THE OLD TESTAMENT
It has often been noticed 2 that the quotations which
are introduced by the Evangelist himself agree much less
closely with the LXX than those which occur in the course
of the common narrative. The following tables will show
to what a remarkable extent this is the case :
CLASS I. Quotations avowedly introduced by the Author
or Editor of the Gospel?
Words
Words
Words
Words
in
not in
in
not in
No.
LXX.
LXX.
No.
LXX.
LXX.
I.
Mt i. 23 .
13
2
7-
Mt xii.
18-21 .
20
31
2.
ii. 15 .
2
4
8.
xiii.
35 -
6
4
3-
18 .
14
6
9-
xxi.
5 a -
10
7
4-
23 -
.
...
10.
xxvii.
9, 10.
4
21
5-
iv. 15, 16
20
13
6.
viii. 17 .
2
7
100
95
a Also quoted in Jn xii. 15.
1 On some contradictions apparently resulting from such compilation see
Julicher, Introd. to N. T., E. T., pp. 312 f., 316.
2 e. g. by Bp. Westcott, Introd. to Study of Gospels, p. 229 (8th ed., 1895).
See Swete, Introd. to O. T. in Greek, pp. 392 ff. ; Burkitt, Gospel History, &c.,
pp. 124 ff.
3 On the difference in character between these quotations and those
ascribed to Jesus Himself see the striking remarks of Burkitt, op. '/.,
pp. 202 f.
pt. in. B. i S/. Matthew's Gospel
CLASS II. One quotation recorded as spoken by the Scribes
in the Introductory Chapters I and II.
Mt ii. 6 contains 8 words that are in LXX, and 16 that are not
in LXX.
CLASS III. Quotations recorded as spoken in the part of
the Sermon on the Mount pecidiar to Matthew.
No.
I.
2.
3-
4-
Mt V. 21
27
31
33
Words
Words
in
not in
LXX.
LXX.
No.
2
...
5-
Mt v. 38
2
...
6.
43
3
6
2 (?
) 7
Words
in
LXX.
6
4
Words
not in
LXX.
I
5
19
The prefixed fppfdrj seems to mark these passages as intended to
be quotations, so they are placed here for consideration. In v. 43
the words K<H pia-fjo-fis KT\. are counted in, because grammatically
they form part of the quotation, though they are not found in
the O. T.
CLASS IV. Quotations
or triple narrative ',
both of them.
occurring in the course of the double
and found also in Mark or Luke or
Ab.
I.
Mt iii. 3 a
2.
iv. 4 C
3-
6 C
4-
; c
5-
10 c
6.
xi. 10 al
7-
xv. 4 b
o.
9.
xix. 5 b
10.
xxi. 13 a
Words
Words
Words
Words
in
not in
in
not in
LXX.
LXX.
No.
LXX.
LXX.
13
I
II.
Mt xxi.
42 a
20
...
15
...
12.
xxii.
24 a
7
12
18
I
*3-
3 2 a
ii
2
6
...
14.
37 a
14
7
8
I
15-
39 a
6
...
9
7
16.
44 a
18
I
13
17-
xxiv.
15 b
3
...
23
...
18.
xxvi.
3I b
3
3
20
i
19.
xxvii.
46 b
6
2
6
219
38
d Luke.
b Also
in Mark.
c
Also in Luke.
1 But differently placed by Mark, viz. in i. 2.
156 Statistics and Observations PL in. B
CLASS V. Quotations occurring in the course of the double
or triple narrative, but not themselves recorded by
either Mark or Luke.
Words Words
in
not in
No.
LXX.
LXX.
I.
Mt ix. 13
2
2.
2
3-
xiii. 14, 15 .
- . 47
4-
xxi. 1 6
7
...
60 5
Is vi. 9 is also expressly quoted in Jn xii. 40 ; Acts xxviii. 26 ;
Rom xi. 8 : but the quotation of it by Matthew belongs to this class,
because in Mk iv. 12 and Lk viii. 10, though some words from it
are used, it is not expressly quoted.
Mt xviii. 1 6 and xix. 18, 19 are also referred to and discussed by
Turpie, 1 but I have not included them here, as they are not stated
to be quotations. For the same reason several passages are here
omitted, which are referred to as ' citations ' by some writers on
this subject.
Such computations of the number of words as I have
entered in the above tables can only be taken as approxi-
mate, for in some cases the agreement with the LXX only
extends to smaller or larger portions of words ; and other
students might be either more or less ready than myself
to count in such portions as words. But such divergences
in either direction will not affect the main result that in
Class I (and also in the unimportant Classes II and III)
the correspondence with the LXX is very much less close
than in Classes IV and V. For in Class I about half
of the words, but in Class IV not much more than one-
seventh, and in the small Class V only one-thirteenth of
them, differ from the words of the LXX. This is a very
broad distinction, and such as suggests prima facie that
1 In The Old Testamentin the New, a book devoted to this subject (London,
1868). Swete (op. tit., p. 387) also gives Mt xix. 18 f. with Mk x. 19, Lk
xviii. 20 ff. as a quotation from Ex xx. 12-17, thus making ten 'triple 'quotations
instead of the nine marked a in my Class IV.
i St. Matthew's Gospel 157
we have before us the work of more than one author or
editor.
I would add a few words of comment on Class I of the
above quotations. For it deserves special notice as being
distinctly characteristic of Matthew among the Synoptists,
and as forming a conspicuous exception to the general rule
that they, unlike John, do not put forth remarks or
comments of their own in the course of their narratives. 1
It is instructive to subdivide these 10 quotations and to
observe that
(a) 6 of them, viz. Nos. i, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, are introduced
in support or illustration of facts or statements for
which we have also the authority of one or both of
the other Synoptists the Virgin-birth, Nazareth as
the home of Jesus in His youth, the early ministry
at Capernaum, the frequent healings, the avoidance
of publicity (so much insisted upon in Mark), the
habit of speaking in parables. This is also the case
as to the one item in Class II, viz. Bethlehem as the
place of birth, in which Luke agrees with Matthew.
(b) 2 only of them, viz. Nos. 2 and 3, are brought
forward in connexion with incidents which we find
only in Matthew the flight into Egypt and the
massacre of the innocents.
(c) The remaining 2, viz. Nos. 9 and 10, refer to events
which are related by all the Synoptists the riding
into Jerusalem and the betrayal by Judas for a sum
of money. But it is Matthew alone who gives here,
in correspondence with and in anticipation of the
prophecies about to be cited by him, two additional
1 In Mk i. 2, 3 ; Mt iii. 3 ; Lk iii. 4-6, however, it is the Evangelists
themselves who quote the prophecies. And Lk vii. 29, 30 may perhaps
also be taken as another kind of exception to this rule ; but not Lk
i. 1-4, which is only a preface, or Mk vii. 3, 4, which is only an explana-
tory note.
158 Statistics and Observations Pt. HI. B
details, viz. the two animals, ass and colt, in xxi.
2, 7, and thirty pieces of silver as the amount of
the price paid in xxvi. 15 ; xxvii. g. 1
With these last details may be compared three other
places in which Matthew, without expressly quoting
prophecies, seems to be influenced by their language,
viz.
1. Mt xxvii. 34 e5o>Kai> air<j> metr olvov /acra xoAijs fze/xiyjueVoi>,
where Mk xv. 23 has fa-fjLvpvia-fjifvov : cf. Ps Ixviii. (Ixix.)
22 edo>Kaz> . . . \o\i]v. z
2. Mt xxvii. 43, where several words from Ps xxi. (xxii.) 9
are attributed to the mocking chief priests, &c.
3. Mt xxvii. 57 is the only place in which the word
TrXowto?, used in Is liii. 9 in connexion with ra</>r; and
Oavaros, is applied to Joseph of Arimathaea.
SECTION II
THE SHORTENING OF NARRATIVES IN MATTHEW
There is in this Gospel an observable tendency to
shorten the common narrative, especially by condensation
or omission in those parts of it which do not lead up to,
or directly bear upon, sayings of Jesus. This characteristic
of Matthew may in many cases be measured and appre-
ciated by the simple means of noticing the amounts of
space which the three narratives occupy in the parallel
1 Cf. Bp. Gore, Dissertations on Subjects connected with the Incarnation, p. 32,
where he admits that the above two details and the l gall ' in Mt xxvii.
34 ' may be modifications due to the influence of the language of Zechariah
and the Psalmist respectively. But in all these cases the historical event
stands substantially the same when the modification is removed. 1 See also
Swete on Mk xi. 2 and 7 to the same effect. And we may compare Justin's
further addition (Apol. I. xxxii) that the colt was ' bound to a vine ', as in
Gen xlix. n.
2 Similarly the frfjpovv avrov of xxvii. 36 may have been suggested by
Ps xxi. (xxii.) 1 8 fcarevorjffav KO.I fireiSov fie : the words are not identical, but
both are in close connexion with the division of the garments.
ii 5/. Matthew's Gospel 159
columns of Tischendorfs Synopsis Evangelica, or some
other Harmony. But it may be worth while to give
here the numbers of the words employed in some of those
passages :
in Number of words
Tisch in
Syn. Ev. Mt Mt Mk Lk
35. viii. 1-4 The leper healed ... 61 97 98
36. ix. 1-8 The paralytic healed . . 126 196 212
51. viii. 18, 23-7 The first storm on the lake . 86- 122 93
52. 28-34 The Gadarene demoniac(s) . 136 325 293
53. ix. 18-26 The issue of blood healed, and
Jairus' daughter raised . 135 374 289
59. xiv. 13-21 The feeding of the 5,000 . . 157 235 163
72. xvii. 14-21 The lunatic boy cured x . . 132 270 125
1 1 8. xx. 29-34 The blind men (or man) at
Jericho ..... 77 123 107
144. xxvi. 17-19 The preparation for the Passover 61 98 96
Total . . 971 1840 1476
In 51 the difference is not great ; and in 59 and 72,
Matthew and Luke are nearly equal, Luke being slightly
the shortest in 72, while Mark is much longer than either
of them. Of course there are other cases in which the
narratives are substantially identical in length, and there
is one case, viz. 48, the mother and brethren desiring to
see Jesus, in which Luke is the shortest. 2 But, on the
whole, the figures given above seem to me amply sufficient
to establish the existence of this Matthaean habit in places
where we can compare the three narratives. And if that is
granted, it gives likelihood to the alternative that, where
Matthew has a shorter narrative than either Mark or Luke
1 Though the four verses of dialogue Mk ix. 21-4 are omitted by Matthew,
he has a reference to verse 22 in his verse 15 which shows that they were
not unknown to him, but were purposely left unused.
2 This is the case even when Mt xii. 47, which Tisch brackets and WH
place in their margin, is excluded. Perhaps Luke's brevity here may be
connected with the fact that he alone records the similar incident in
xi. 27, 28 (Tisch 91 c). Luke is also briefest at the commencement
of 124, the expulsion of traffickers from the Temple. But, as a general
rule, Matthew's preference is for compression, Luke's for omission (A. Robin-
son, op. '/., p. 34).
160 Statistics and Observations Pt. in. B
(in the absence of a third parallel), it was he who abbre-
viated, and not either of them who expanded, the matter
contained in their source. Most of such cases are of course
parallels with Mark, since the parallels between Matthew
and Luke only are mainly in discourses and very rarely in
narratives. The following are instances of both kinds :
M
Number of
Tisch
words in
Syn.
Et;. Mt
Mk
Mt
Mk
25
A. xiv. 3-5 ;
vi. 17-20 .
. The Baptist imprisoned 1
40
76
54-
xiii. 54-8 ;
1-6 .
. The rejection at Nazareth
96
123
57-
xiv. 6-12 ;
21-9
. The Baptist beheaded .
95
171
61.
34- 6 ;
53-6 .
. Healings at Gennesaret .
44
72
123,
125.
| xxi. 18-20 ;
xi. 12-14, 2 >
21 The barren fig- tree .
54
77
Total . .
329
5192
in Number of
Tisch words in
Syn. Ev. Mt Lk Mt Lk
42. viii. 5-10, 13 3 ; vii. ib-io . The centurion's servant . 123 175
44. xi. 2-6 ; 18-23 . The Baptist's message . 63 103
Total . . 186 278
The above statistics are significant, both (i) in illus-
tration of the general tendency of Matthew and Luke
(and especially Matthew) to omit or condense Mark's
subsidiary and pleonastic details, which has been already
suggested (pp. 125 ff.), and also (ii) in connexion with the
signs of adaptation for catechetical purposes in Matthew,
which will be referred to further on (p. 163).*
1 Lk iii. 19, 20 is not cited here because, though similar in substance,
it is placed in a different part of the narrative.
2 Mt xv. 21-8 ; Mk vii. 24-30, the story of the Syrophenician, may be
mentioned as constituting an unusual case ; for while there is a good deal
of matter peculiar to each narrative, the length of them is not far from the
same (Mt 139 words, Mk 130).
3 Mt viii. n, 12 is not included here, because Luke gives it substantially
elsewhere, and apparently in its original place (xiii. 28, 29). If its 43
words were included, Luke's narrative would still be slightly the longer.
4 See Additional Note, p. 214.
m S/. Matthew's Gospel 161
SECTION III
SIGNS OF COMPILATION IN MATTHEW
It has been already noticed (p. no) that, in recording
sayings of Jesus, Matthew and Luke seem often to draw
materials from the same source, but that in more than
two-thirds of such cases they arrange the materials differ-
ently. We have now to notice further that this difference
of arrangement is very frequently caused by Matthew
placing the sayings together in large blocks of discourse,
while Luke records them separately, and in many cases
gives the questions or circumstances which led up to
them. The following are conspicuous instances of this
divergence :
1. Mt vi. 9-13 compared with Lk xi. 1-4 The Lord's Prayer.
2. 19-21 ,, xii. 33, 34 The treasure and the
heart.
3. 24 ,, ,, xvi. 13 God and mammon.
4- 25-33 ,, ,, xii. 22-31 Against anxiety.
5. vii. 7-11 ,, xi. 9-13 Ask and it shall be
given, &c.
6. 13, 14 ,. xiii. 23, 24 The narrow gate, or
door.
7. 22,23 jt 25-7 I never knew you, &c.
8. x. 17-22 ,, xxi. 12-17 x Persecutions foretold.
9. xiii. 16, 17 ,, ,, x. 23, 24 Blessed are your eyes,
&c.
10. 3 J -3 ?? xiii. 18, i9 2 Parables of Mustard Seed
and Leaven.
IT. xviii. 12, 13 ,, ,, xv. 4-7 The Lost Sheep.
12. xxiii. 37-9 3 ,, xiii. 33-6 O Jerusalem, &c.
13. xxiv. 28 ,, ,, xvii. 37 The eagles gathered to-
gether.
1 Both this passage and Mk xiii. 9-13 are more closely parallel to Mt x.
17-22 than to Mt xxiv. 9-14. But the words certainly appear very unlikely
to have been spoken at the first and temporary mission of the Apostles
recorded in chapter x. It seems as if Matthew had at this point looked
through all his materials, and collected from them all the sayings that had
any bearing upon missionary work.
2 ovv, which is the true reading, seems intended to exhibit these pro-
phetic parables as called forth by the success and progress recorded
in v. 17.
3 The connexion in Matthew seems sufficiently good, but that in Luke
is better still.
HAWKINS
162 Statistics and Observations pt. in. B
If these parallel passages, and especially Nos. 1-7, are
examined, it will be seen that two accounts of the
differences in their situations and contexts may be given.
Speaking generally (for opinions will differ as to particular
cases, especially towards the end of the list), either (a)
Matthew altered their places, mainly with the purpose
of combining them in collections of sayings, or (b) Luke
did so, with the purpose of breaking up those collections
into their component parts, and supplying for as many
of the sayings as possible the occasions which drew them
forth. Without attempting to decide or foreclose the
question, I must say that to me the former alternative
seems by far the more intrinsically probable, and by far the
more accordant with the phenomena before us. 1
Those who agree with me in adopting that alternative
will feel that the above instances lend some a priori
probability to the supposition that it was Matthew, rather
than Luke or Mark, who transferred sayings in such cases
as the following :
1. Mt v. 13 compared with \ M . k ' 5 a } Salt losing its savour.
I Lk xiv. 33, 34 2 f
2. (?) vi. 14 ,, Mk xi. 25 Forgiveness when
praying.
3. viii. ii, 12 ,, Lk xiii. 28. 29 Many shall come from
east and west, &c.
4- x - 34, 35 ,, xii. 51-3 Not peace but a sword,
&c.
5. 37 xiv. 26 Loving (or hating)
father or mother, &c. 3
6. 42 ,, ,, Mk ix. 41 Giving a cup of cold
water. 3
1 Among the numerous modern supporters of this view, I would specify two
American writers as particularly clear and forcible, Bacon, Sermon on the
Mount, pp. 226 ff., also 222 note ; and E. D. Burton, Principles of Literary
Criticism, &c.,pp. 35 ff. Another Chicago publication, Hobson's The Diates-
saron of Tatian and the Syn. Problem (1904), brings out the way in which this
process of compiling discourses was carried still further by Tatian, especially
in his use of Luke's so-called Perean section (pp. 59-61, 76).
2 Observe the connexion implied by ovv.
8 Whether in these two cases the sayings come from the same source
is very doubtful. See also p. 152.
in S/. Matthew's Gospel 163
7. Mt xi. 21-4 compared with Lk x. 13-15 Woe to Chorazin, &c.
8. 25-27 ,, 21-23 Things hidden from the
wise and prudent, &c.
( xxiii. 4, 6, 13, 23, ) f xi. 39, 42, ) Woes pronounced on
9- ] 2 5, 27, 29, > \ 43, 46- [ the Pharisees, &c.
f 31,34-6 ) ( 52 )
10. xxiv. 27 xvii. 24 As the lightning in the
heavens.
\ xvii. 26, 27, | As in the days of
I 34, 35 { Noah, &c.
12. 43-51 ,, xii. 39-46 Watchfulness.
See also other cases among the doublets (pp. 80 ff.), and
among the passages marked * on pp. 108 f. : and cf. p. 195 (a).
SECTION IV
TRACES OF NUMERICAL ARRANGEMENTS IN MATTHEW
Beneath the surface of this Gospel (and in one single
case, viz. i. 17, upon its surface) there are to be found in-
dications that it embodies some amount of matter which
had been arranged in artificial and numerical forms, such as
would assist the memories of oral teachers and of learners.
This seems to have been done in Jewish fashion, and
perhaps especially for the use of Jewish-Christian cate-
chists and catechumens. The traces of it are found most
often, though not exclusively, in those blocks of discourse
which have already been referred to as showing signs of
compilation.
A.
There seem to have been five principal Pereqs or
chapters of such sayings : for when we think of (a) the five
books of the Pentateuch, (b) the five books of Psalms, 1 (c) the
five Megilloth,(^/) \hzfive divisions which Dr. Edersheim and
1 Dr. C. A. Briggs attributes this division of the Psalter ' to the middle of
the second century, shortly before its translation into Greek ', and regards it
as 'in some way connected with the five great feasts of Judaism ' (Int. Crit.
Comm. on Pss. I. Ixxxviii).
M 2
164 Statistics and Observations pt.m. B
others trace in Ecclesiasticus, 1 (e) the Maccabaean history
' by Jason of Cyrene in five books ' which the writer of
1 Maccabees says (ii. 23) that he will * assay to abridge in
one work ', in the course of which traces of a fivefold division
seem still to show themselves in certain breaks, 2 (f)tint five
parts which (besides some interpolations) Dr. Charles as well
as previous scholars sees in the Book of Enoch, 3 and (g) the
five Pereqs which make up the Pirqe Aboth> as distinct from
the supplementary Pereq of R. Meir, it is hard to believe
that it is by accident that we find in a writer with the
Jewish affinities of Matthew the jfa# times repeated formula
about Jesus ''ending' His sayings (vii. 28 ; xi. i ; xiii. 53 ;
xix. 1 1 ; xxvi. i). Are we not reminded of the colophon which
still closes the second book of Psalms, ' The prayers of
David the son of Jesse are ended ' (Ps Ixxii. ao) ? 4
And as to early Christian literature, we are told by
Eusebius both that the Exposition of Oracles of the Lord by
Papias was divided vnto five avyypd^aTa (H. E. iii. 39, refer-
ring to Irenaeus, who calls them /3i/3Aia), which may perhaps
imply that he found the oracles which he expounded thus
divided already ; and also that the work of Hegesippus which
had come down to his days consisted of five memoirs or
commentaries ({/Tro/ui^/xara, H. E. iv. 33). G
1 Speaker's Comm. on Ecclus., p. 19. Mr. R. G. Moulton speaks of the
number 5 as seeming to be the favourite number in Wisdom literature
generally : ' five books in Proverbs and Ecclesiasticus, five essays in Ecclesi-
astes, and five discourses in Wisdom' ; Literary Study of the Bible, p. 404 :
see also pp. 284, 386. But he does not seem to me to give satisfactory
proofs of this, except as to Ecclesiasticus and perhaps Proverbs.
2 Viz. at iii. 40; vii. 42 ; x. 9, 10; xiii. 266 ; xv. 37. It should be observed
especially how the verb 8r)\ovv, which is used in ii. 23, reappears in vii. 42
and x. 10.
3 See Book of Enoch, ed. Charles, pp. 25-32 ; Enc. Bibl. i. 221 f. ; Hastings'
D. B. i. 706.
* The LXX word here is el\iitov. For ovveTeXtafv used of the completion
of discourse see Deut xxxi. i ; xxxii. 45 (B If ere A.e<r/).
5 A later instance is the great work of Irenaeus himself, Adv. Haer. For
the habitual use of established numerical divisions we may compare the
long prevalence of five-act plays and three-volume novels in our own literary
history.
iv St. Matthew's Gospel 165
As to whether that formula which we seem to discern in
those five verses of Matthew was due to an editor of the
Gospel who himself made these compilations, or whether
he brought it in from the Logia with some collections
which already existed there, it is difficult to form an
opinion. Two points may be noted in favour of the latter
alternative: (i) Lk vii. I eTmSr] eTrATJpcocrey iravra TO. prj/xara
avrov is so closely parallel in substance, though not in
words, to Mt vii. 28 KOL eyez/ero ore ere'Aeo-ey 6 'lya-ovs TOVS
Aoyovj TOVTOVS as to suggest a common origin for them both ;
and (2) there is nothing distinctively Matthaean in the
wording of the formula : on the contrary, eyeVero, followed
by a finite verb, is only found in these 5 places in
Matthew, while it occurs 22 times in Luke (also twice in
Mark and nowhere else in N. T.).
Another difficulty is involved in the impression conveyed
in four out of the five cases (viz. Mt vii. 28; xix. i TOVS
Aoyov? TOVTOVS ; xiii. 53 s 7ra/oa/3oAas ravray, and especially
xxvi. i irdvTas TOVS Xoyovs TOVTOVS l ) that whoever inserted
the concluding formula regarded all the preceding sayings
as having been delivered at that time. For this may seem
to suggest as alternatives either (a) that the collection and
compilation of various sayings, which we have seen on
other grounds to be probable, had not taken place, or (b)
that it had taken place before the blocks of sayings came
into the hands of the writer of this formula, and that he
was therefore unaware of their having been so composed.
B.
But further, we have some intimations not only of the
existence of five such collections, but also of the plan upon
1 The rravras used in this one case may be meant to cover the ' denunciatory
discourse ' which fills chap, xxiii ; for if we read the last four verses of that
chapter in conjunction with the first three verses of chap, xxiv, it will appear
likely that in the Evangelist's mind the desolation of the Temple supplied
a link between the two discourses which is obscured by our division into
chapters.
166 Statistics and Observations Pt. in. B
which the materials of them were arranged. It seems to
have been often a numerical plan, the numbers 3, 7, and 10
being used as helps to memory, precisely as the numbers 3,
4, 7, and 10 are used in the Pirqe Aboth, which is a speci-
men of Jewish teaching accessible to everybody in Dr.
Taylor's edition. 1 (See especially i. i, a, 19 ; ii. i ; iii. i ;
iv. 19 ; and v, passim ; also R. Meir, 8 and 10.) Let any
one read through those five treatises and the appended
Pereq of Rabbi Meir, let him remember that such numerical
arrangements are common in the Mishnah generally ; 2 and
if he will then turn to St. Matthew's Gospel, I think that
here again it will be hard for him to believe that it is only
by accident that we there find seven Beatitudes on character
(for there is a decided difference in length and in style
between them and the blessing on the state of being per-
secuted) ; the petitions of the Lord's Prayer extended from
five to seven ; 3 the reference to three degrees of sin and
of punishment (v. 22) which has never been satisfactorily
explained ; the three external duties of alms, prayer, and
fasting (vi. 1-18) ; the seven parables in the thirteenth
chapter ; the seven woes in the true text of the twenty-
third chapter ; the three weightier matters of the law
(xxiii. 23 ; contrast Lk xi. 42). These instances are all
in discourses ; but we have also the genealogy compressed
into a triad of four teens (i. 17), as a kind of memoria
1 Cambridge, 1897 (ed. a).
2 So much so indeed that Hershon in his Talmudic Miscellany finds it
best to sort and group his extracts according to the numbers which are
prominent in them, ' the Threes of the Talmud,' ' the Tens of the Talmud,'
and so on. Cf. Enc. Brit. xvi. 504 b.
3 It should perhaps be noticed that each of the two additional petitions
contains a characteristic Matthaean word, viz. yevijOrjTu and 6 irovijpos or TO
irovrjpov. If the attempt to show correspondences between these seven
petitions and the seven beatitudes was successful, it would bring out the
numerical arrangement still more pointedly. I think it fails on the
whole ; but the fourth and fifth items of the comparison (' daily bread '
and ' hunger and thirst ', ' forgive ... as we forgive ' and ' the merciful . . .
shall obtain mercy ') are at least noticeable coincidences.
iv 5/. Matthew's Gospel 167
technica ; and in the course of chapters viii and ix, between
the first and second collections of sayings, we have a collec-
tion of ten miracles, which is made up in a very unchrono-
logical 1 way, but which reminds one irresistibly of the
enumerations in the Pirqe Aboth (v. 5 and 8), * Ten miracles
were wrought for our fathers in Egypt, and ten by the sea. 2
. . . Ten miracles were wrought in the Sanctuary.'
I exclude from the above list the three Temptations in
Mt iv. 3-10, because of the parallel in Lk iv. 3-12 ; and the
three prayers in Gethsemane, Mt xxvi. 39-44, because of
the parallel in Mk xiv. 35-41. There are also at least two
cases peculiar to Luke, viz. the ' three aspirants ' in ix. 57-
62, and the three parables in chap, xv ; and in Lk xi. 42-52
there seem to be three woes pronounced upon Pharisees
and three upon lawyers. But after allowing for these cases,
and for doubtfulness as to some of the Matthaean instances, 3
it still remains true that these numerical arrangements are
decidedly characteristic of the First Gospel, and especially of
the portions of it which are devoted to the sayings of Jesus. 4
1 Unchronological, because (i) Matthew brings down to this division of
his narrative three miracles which Mark and Luke place considerably
earlier, viz. the healings of the leper (Mt viii. 2-4 ; Mk i. 40-5 ; Lk
v. 12-16), of Peter's wife's mother, with the subsequent cures at eventide
(Mt viii. 14-17 ; Mk i. 29-34 ; Lk iv. 38-41), and of the paralytic (Mt ix.
2-8 ; Mk ii. 1-12 ; Lk v. 17-26). And (ii) the two briefly recorded miracles
in Mt ix. 27-31 and 32-4 are so strikingly similar to those recorded later
on, viz. in Mt xx. 29-34 an ^ x ii- 22-4 respectively (see pp. 93 ff.), that
the suggestion naturally occurs that Matthew inserted this anticipatory
mention of them in order to make up the conventional number of ' ten
miracles '. For it seems very difficult to suggest any other reason for
inserting them (see Exp. Times, xii. 474, xiii. 24 f.). In these chapters the
only important passage unconnected with the miracles is the call of Matthew,
&c., in ix. 9-17 : in all three Gospels it follows the healing of the paralytic,
and the anti-Pharisaic element in both incidents may have caused so close
an association (whether documentary or oral) between them that Matthew
transferred them both together.
2 On the Jewish expectation that the Messiah would be like Moses in
miracle working see Edersheim, Life and Times of Jesus, i. 176.
3 On the other hand, many more Matthaean * threes ' are suggested in
Allen's Commentary, p. Ixv ; also on pp. 6, 38.
4 On the use of mystical numbers by John see E. F. Scott, The Fourth Gospel,
1 68 Statistics and Observations Pt. in. B
SECTION V
THE TRANSFERENCE AND REPETITION OF FORMULAS,
ESPECIALLY IN MATTHEW
For want of a better word I use the term ' formula ' to
express the short sentences, or collocations of two or more
words, which recur mainly or exclusively in one or other
of the Synoptic Gospels, so that they appear to be favourite
or habitual expressions of the writer of it. Such expres-
sions are, as a rule, longer than the characteristic words
and phrases tabulated in Part I, but shorter and more
fragmentary than the doublets collected in Part II,
Section IV.
Some of them are confined exclusively to one Gospel : e. g.
I. Peculiar to Matthew :
1. OTTO ToVe fjpgaro iv. 17; xvi. 21 (though apx^Bai is more rare in
Matthew than in Mark or Luke).
2. fJ-f) vop,iar]T on rjK&ov V. 17 ; X. 34.
3. TTpo<T\6ti)V rrpoo'fKvvei avrw viii. 2 ; ix. 1 8 } SO TT pocreKQovo'a.i . . . irpoare-
Kvvrjcrav avraJ xxviii. 9 ; and cf. xv. 25 and xx. 20.
4. viol rrjs J3a<ri\(ias viii. 12 ; xiii. 38.
5. els TO O-KOTOS TO cgcoTepov viii. 12 ; xxii. 13 ; xxv. 30.
6. ei6VJ>? . . . ras evdvufoeis avTwv ix. 4 ; xii. 25 (evOvfujms only Acts 1,
Hebrews 1 besides, and not in LXX).
7. TO 7rpo/3aTa ra aTroXwXora OI'KOU 'lo-pa^X X. 6 ; XV. 24.
8. cv rats (rvvayayals avruv naa-Tiy<bcrov(nv vp.as x. 17 ; /waanycoo-eTe eV
TCUS (Tvv. vfj.>v xxiii. 34.
9. ev cKtivto TWKaipw xi. 2$ ; xii. I ; xiv. I (Lk has Iv OUTWT. K. in xiii. I,
and KUT K. K. in Acts xii. i and xix. 23).
10. ws 6 rjXios xiii. 43 ; xvii. 2 (so Rev i. 19 ; x. i).
11. ^wpis yvvaiK&v KOI TraiSiW xiv. 21 ; xv. 38.
12. 687/70! rvcpXot xv. 14 ; xxiii. 16, 24.
13. Tore <rvvr]K.av on . . . elnev xvi. 12 ; xvii. 13.
14. ToO Qcov rov )VTOS xvi. 1 6 ; xxvi. 63 (these two cases only in
Gospels, but also Acts 1, Paul 6, rest of N. T. 7).
p. 21, or Inge in DCG. i. 888. In the LXX and Vulgate the three pairs of
spiritual gifts in Is. xi. 2 are raised to seven by the addition of evffefleias or
pietatis ( = ' true godliness ' in the Anglican Confirmation Service).
v 5/. Matthew's Gospel 169
15. f(f)o^r)dr](Tciv acpodpa xvii. 6 ; xxvii. 54 ; SO eXvnrjdrjcrav o-(po8pa xvii.
23 ; xviii. 31.
Observe also the reproduction of much of the language of Mt iv. 23 f.
in. viii. 16 ; ix. 35 ; xiv. 35 (cf. pp. 92 f.).
II. Peculiar to Mark:
1. &(rre fj.fj dvvacrdai avrovs /j.r]8e aprov (payelv iii. 2O | compared with
ovde (payelv fvKaipovv vi. 31.
2. e\fyev . . . fv TT) SiSaxfj avrov iv. 2 ; xii. 38.
3. f]8ea)s avTov fJKOvev vi. 2O ; xii. 37*
4. ovdfva fjdeXev yvavai vii. 24 ; OVK fjdfXev Iva TIS yvol ix. 30.
5. ov yap fjdci ri aTroKpidfj ix. 6 (cf. Lk ix. 33) ; OVK rjfteicrav ri dnoKpi-
doxnv avrw xiv. 40.
6. Kal vayK(i\to-diJLvos avro ix. 36 ; ... avrd X. 1 6.
III. Peculiar to Luke:
1. 86ga cv v^io-Tois ii. 14 ; xix. 38 (and in both cases eiprjvrj occurs in
the context).
2. TToiclv 6iJ.oi(os iii. ii ; vi. 31 ; x. 37 (besides only in Jn v. 19).
3. TToXXa . . . Kal erf pa iii. 1 8 ; erepa TroXXa xxii. 65.
4. doxnv iroielv v. 29 ; xiv. 13.
5. fMovoyevtjs in records of miracles vii. 12 ; viii. 42 ; ix. 38 (elsewhere
only Christological).
6. 7rpo(pr/TT]5 TIS T&v dpxaiav dveo-TT) ix. 8 and 19.
7. 17 8e rjfjLcpa fjpt-aro K\ivfiv ix. 12 ; compared with KCK\IKCV fjdr) rj
f]fjipa xxiv. 29.
8. ev ro> fivai OVTOV 7rpo(Tu^d/Lie^oy ix. l8; xi.' I. (See also p. I95-)
9. TTTw^ouy, dvaneipovs, ^coXoy?, rv(p\ovs xiv. 13, with which cf. the very
similar verse 21.
10. Kal rijv yvvaiKa xiv. 26 ; ^ yvvaiKa xviii. 29.
11. ot viol TOV alwvos TOVTOV xvi. 8 ; xx. 34.
12. TU7rre ro (Trrjdos eavrov xviii. 13 ; rvrrrovTes TO. <TTT}Br] xxiii. 48.
The above lists are not intended to be exhaustive, but
to give specimens of expressions or ' formulas ' peculiar to
each Synoptist. But there is another class of them which
is more important and interesting, because more likely to
throw light upon the process of the formation of the
Gospels. I mean those which are used once (or in a few
cases twice) by a Synoptist in common with one or both
of the others, and are also used by that Synoptist inde-
pendently in other parts of his narrative.
170 Statistics and Observations Pt. in. B
There are a few such cases in Luke, chiefly in the one
passage vii. 48-50 :
1. d(pO>VTai <roi at apapriai o~ov . . . ris eo~Ttv OVTOS . . . ris dvvarai d/zap-
rias dfaivai ; Lk v. 2O, 21 = Mk ii. 5> 7 ' also oxpeWrat aov at d/nap-
Ttat . . . Tis OVTOS fO~Tiv os Kai a/jLapTias dcpirjaiv | Lk vii. 48, 49.
2. fj Trio-Tis orov o~o-(*Kv erf Lk viii. 48 = Mk v. 34 = Mt ix. 22 ] and
Lk xviii. 42 = Mk x. 52 : also Lk vii. 50 and xvii. 19.
3. TTopevov els eipfjvTjv Lk viii. 48 = Mk v. 34 (waye) : also Lk vii. 50.
(Cf. Acts xvi. 36 ; Jam ii. 16.)
4. HTJKCTI ovcuXXe TOV 8iddo~Ka\ov Lk viii. 49 = TI en o~Kv\\eis TOV 818. ;
Mk v. 35 : also Kvpie, ^ O-KV\\OV Lk vii. 6.
5. ot de fjyvoovv TO pfjfM TOVTO Lk ix. 45 = Mk ix. 32 : also compare
TJV TO pruia. TOVTO KCKpvp.jji.evov an avT&v, KOI OVK eyivuvKov TO. Xcyd-
fjifva Lk xviii. 34.
6. TI TToirjo-as farjv aiwviov K\r}povofifjo-a) ; Lk xviii. 1 8 = Mk x. 17 (TI
Trotjyao) ?va, and cf. also Mt xix. 16 o-^co) : also Lk x. 25.
7. OVK d<pedr]o-fTai \idos enl Xi'^ep &de Lk xxi. 6 = Mt xxiv. 2 ; Mk xiii. 2
(both have ov /A) d<pe6fj and eVt \idov) : /j<? Lk xix. 44 OI>K d(pf)o-ov-
o-iv \idov eVi Xt^ov eV trot.
But such repetitions are much more frequent in Matthew,
and therefore they are treated here in connexion with that
Gospel especially. Thus we find :
^tSi/cov Mt iii. 7 = Lk Hi. 7 : also Mt xii. 34 and
xxiii. 33. (Cf. the transfer of the Baptist's words in Doublet
No. 20, pp. 97 f.)
2. ev uevo'oKrjo-a Mt iii. 17 = Mk i. Ii = Lk iii. 22 : also Mt xvii. 5.
3. fjyyiKev 17 /3a<nXei'a T&V ovpavSav Mt iv. I7 = Mk i. 15 (roO 6cov) ; and
Mt x. 7 = (?) Lk x. 9 (r. 6eov : cf. also v. n): also Mt iii. 2.
(Cf. p. 97.)
4. irovrjpol ovTfs Mt vii. ii = Lk xi. 13 (vjrdpxovTcs} : also Mt xii. 34.
5. KTeivas TTJV xetpa (said of Jesus) Mt viii. 3 = Mk i. 41 ; Lk v. 13:
also Mt xii. 49 ; xiv. 31 (these, however, are not cases of heal-
ing. as the first one is).
6. eVcet ecrTai 6 K\avOp.6s Kai 6 ftpvypos T>V 686vro)v Mt viii. 12 = Lk
xiii. 28 : also Mt xiii. 42, 50 ; xxii. 13 ; xxiv. 51 ; xxv. 30.
7. oi Trpo^rai /cat 6 vopos Mt xi. 13 = Lk xvi. l6 (6 i/d/u'. KOI ot 7rpo$.) :
also (in the latter order) Mt v. 17, and vii. 12, and xxii. 40.
8. oWiff . . . av noirjo-T] TO 6f\r]p.a TOV iraTpos pov Mt xii. 50= Mk iii. 35
(os av . . . TOV 0eo) : also Mt vii. 21 (6 iroi5>v) ; cf. also xxi. 31.
9. vnayf oTTtVco p,ov, 2arai/5 Mt xvi. 23 = Mk viii. 33 : also i/Traye,
Sarai/a Mt iv. IO.
10. e/xe de^erat Mt xviii. 5 = Mk ix. 37 = Lk ix. 48 (of receiving
v S/. Matthew's Gospel 171
children) : also in Mt x. 40 (of receiving the Apostles ; it does
not occur in Lk x. 16, which compare).
11. f\erjaov . . . vlos (or vie) Aaua'S Mt XX. 30, 31 = Mk X. 47, 48 = Lk
xviii. 38, 39 : also Mt ix. 27 ; xv. 22.
12. (pofiuviJLfda TOV o^Xoy, irdvTfs yap ws npofpfjTTjv <fx ovcrlv Tov 'i
Mt xxi. 26 = (very nearly) Mk xi. 32 : also Mt xiv. 5 (
TOV o^Xoj/, OTI MS 7rpo<pf)Tr)v avTov ei%ov (i. c. John), and xxi. 46
<polBt]dr)o-av TOVS o^Xouy, eVet ff 7rpo(pr)Trjv avrov ei^of (i. e. Jesus).
13. TOVS dovXovs . . . ov e aTTfKTfivav Mt xxi. 35 = Mk xii. 5 KaKflvov
dneKTeivav . . . ovs Se dnoKTevvvvTes I also Mt xxii. 6 TOVS dovXovs
14. TraXii/ aTreVreiXei/ aXXovs dovXovs Mt xxi. 36 = Mk xii. 4, 5 TraXiv
a7reoreiXei> . . . a'XXoi> dov\ov . . . KOI a\\ov (cf. also Lk XX. II, 12) :
also Mt xxii. 4 rraXiv aTreVrciXfv aXXovs SouXovff.
15. aTroXeVet avrovs Mt xxi. 41 = Mk xii. 9, and Lk xx. 16 tMroXfVei
Tovff yewpyovs '. also Mt xxii. 7 aTrooXeo-ei/ rovs (povcls fKfivovs.
1 6. d'yaTr^o'fiS' TOV n\r)o~iov o~ov a>s (Tfavjov quoted in Mt xxii. 39 =
Mk xii. 31 (and cf. Lk x. 27) : also in Mt xix. 19.
17. o\l/oiTai TOV vlov TOV dvOpwTTov fpxopfvov Mt xxiv. 3<D = Mk xiii. 26 =
Lk xxi. 27 : and o^eoA KT\. in Mt. xxvi. 64 = Mk xiv. 62 :
also Mt xvi. 28 tSaxnv TOV viov TOV dv0pa>7rov ep%6p,evov (where
Mk ix. I and Lk ix. 27 mention only the kingdom as being
seen).
1 8. d\rjd<os 0eov vlos Mt xxvii. 54 = Mk xv. 39 : also Mt xiv. 33.
19 (?). Koi yevTo ore frfXcow 6 'lrjo~ovs Mt vii. 28 = (?) Lk vii. I : also
Mt xi. i ; xiii. 53 ; xix. I ; xxvi. I. 1
A careful examination of such cases certainly leaves
the impression that the mind of Matthew 2 was so familiar
with these collocations of words that he naturally repro-
duced them in other parts of his narrative, besides the
places in which they occurred in his sources. It is to
be observed that these apparent reproductions often occur
earlier in the Gospel than do the apparently original
occurrences of the formulas, which seems to indicate that
Matthew drew them from his memory of his sources and
1 On this formula see pp. 164 f. above : it must be transferred to the list
of formulas peculiar to Matthew if Lk vii. i is not taken as parallel to
Mt vii. 28.
2 This is of course one of the many cases in which ' Matthew' is used
as a symbol to denote the compiler of the first Gospel, whoever he may
have been.
172 Statistics and Observations Pt. in. B
not from documents before him. 1 So far as it goes, then,
the drift of this section is in favour of some considerable
element of the oral theory.
Before leaving the subject of these ' formulas ', it should
be noticed that there are a few of them which occur in
different positions in two or three of the Synoptic Gospels
(Matthew always 2 being one of them) :
(i) Formulas differently placed by Matthew and by
Mark:-
1. TJV yap 8idd(TKa>v CIVTOVS ojs cfywcriav t^wv, KOI ov% o>? ol y pa [Awards
(Mark adds auro>i>), (a) in Mk i. 22 referred to the first preaching
in the Capernaum Synagogue (and so Lk iv. 32 eV e^owia r\v
6 Xdyos auTou), but (b] in Mt vii. 29 referred to the impression
made by the Sermon on the Mount much later in the Ministry.
2. KOKWS exovras TroiKiXais voo-ois, used (a) in Mk i. 34 (cf. Lk iv. 40)
of the healings at eventide, but (b} combined in Mt iv. 24 with
some other words from Mk iii. 7 ff. before the Sermon on the
Mount.
3. on T)<rav . . . u>s (Mt oxrei) 7rpo/3ara /j.f) e^oz/ra Troifieva (Numb
xxvii. 17 LXX) ; (a] in Mk vi. 34 placed before the Feeding of
the 5,000, but (b} in Mt ix. 36 before the Mission of the Twelve
which occurred earlier.
4. KOI dfpevres avrbv a7rf)\6av, used (a) in Mk xii. 12 after the
Parable of the Wicked Husbandmen, but (b) in Mt xxii. 22 after
the question as to tribute to Caesar rather later.
(ii) Formulas differently placed by Matthew, by Mark,
and by Luke :
i. ov8c\s ovKeri e'roX/ua avrov eTTfparr^oYu is (in substance) placed
(a) in Mk xii. 34, after the Two Great Commandments (omitted
here in Luke) ;
(b} in Mt xxii. 46, after the subsequent reference to Psalm ex ;
but
(c) in Lk xx. 40, after the earlier confutation of the Sadducees.
1 Compare the suggestions made on pp. 93-5.
2 Or almost always; for perhaps an exception may be found in the
commendations by scribes given by Mark and Luke only, viz. (a) KO.\>S,
Si$a(jna\, ITT' akrjOeias elves in Mk xii. 32 after the two great command-
ments, but (b) 8i8daKa\e, Ka\u>s eiWs in Lk xx. 39 after the confutation of the
Sadducees.
v St. Matthew's Gospel 173
2. c{-f7r\f)<r<TovTO eVi rrj Siftaxfj avrov is said
(a) in Mk i. 22 ; Lk iv. 32, of the preaching in the Capernaum
Synagogue ;
(b) in Mt vii 28, of the impression made by the Sermon on the
Mount ;
(^r) in Mk xi. 1 8, of the result of the Cleansing of the Temple ;
(d) in Mt xxii. 33, of the confutation of the Sadducees.
Though not used in Luke's Gospel, this formula has been placed
here because of its employment in Acts xiii. 12 eWXTyTrofievoy
eVi rf) SiSaxf} TOV Kvpiov (cf. Lk ix. 43 ct-eTrXrjo-a-ovro . . . eVt rfj
neya\ei6rr)Ti TOV 6eov ; also Mt xiii. 54 ; Mk vi. 2 where the
verbs 8i8d<rKfiv and eKTrXrja-area-dai are used).
Do not such cases of repetition and transference of
formulas point, like the former instances, to oral processes
of preservation and transmission? Of course men who,
as disciples and perhaps also as teachers, had previously
acquired knowledge by such processes would not be debarred
from the use of manuscripts as their chief authorities, when
they set themselves to draw up Gospels. But they would
be likely to use them with great freedom, and from time to
time they would dispense with the trouble of turning to
them, when they thought that their own traditional informa-
tion was sufficient. See p. 217.
174 Statistics and Observations Pt. in. c
C. ON THE GOSPEL OF ST. L LIKE.
DIVISION I
ON THE LINGUISTIC RELATIONS BETWEEN ST. LUKE'S
GOSPEL AND ACTS
IN the case of this one Synoptic Gospel we have the
advantage of being able to compare it with another book
which both claims to be (Acts i. i) and appears to be the
work of the same author. This comparison should be
helpful in many ways towards a right appreciation of the
time and manner of the composition of the Gospel.
SECTION I
THE LINGUISTIC SIMILARITY BETWEEN LUKE AND ACTS
This similarity is so strong that it is generally admitted
to establish the fact that the two books in their present
shape come from one author or editor, whatever materials
he may have used in them. Numerous writers have
brought together the correspondences in vocabulary and
phraseology and mental standpoint which link the books
together, 1 and there is no need to reproduce here the
abundant proofs of a similarity so generally admitted.-
But I have noted two special points of likeness between
Luke and Acts which at the same time bring out points of
comparison and contrast between Luke and the other
Synoptic Gospels, and which therefore bear directly upon
the Synoptic Problem. 3
1 See e.g. S. Davidson, Introd. to N. T., ii. 261-8; Zeller, ii. 213-54 > an ^
Overbeck, p. 248, both in Eng. tr., besides more recent writers.
2 The tables given above on pp. 16-23 and 27-9 supply materials for
many such proofs.
3 'Verbs compounded with prepositions' was the title of a third such
Div. I. i
S/. Luke's Gospel
A. Words peculiar to one or other Gospel and to Acts.
Fifty-eight words are peculiar to Luke and Acts, viz. 1 :
7rpo/3dXXo)
TrpoTTOpevo/zm
Trpoa-doKia
35
5 dvaffirda)
dva(j)aivop.ai
dvTflnov
10
ajroTivao'O'a)
\ai<bv (?)
jy
2O fvavriov
evio-xw (?)
25
ecrTrepa
30 V',
KaraKoXovdew
4O KpaTKTTOS
6/iiXea)
7rapaj3t(
45 TTeptXd/HTro)
50 orpaTJj-yoy
orpand (?)
55 crvveifj.1 (?)
The above 58 words occur altogether 78 times in Luke, viz. 21
times in chaps, i-ii, 25 times in the other ' peculiar* parts 3 , and 32
times in the ' common ' parts 3 : they occur altogether 99 times in
Acts, viz. 47 times in chaps, i-xii and 52 times in chaps, xiii-
xxviii. It thus appears that they are used most freely in Lk i-ii ;
and next to that in Acts generally, but not specially in either part
of Acts.
point in the first edition ; but this is now withdrawn, because the prooi of
any considerable contrast between the Lucan books and Mark in this respect
fails. But the excess of the Lucan as against the Matthaean use of such
compounds remains great, and as against the Johannine it is still greater.
See Prof. J. H. Moulton in Expositor, May 1909, p. 412. He has made a very
thorough study of this question, including a revision of my lists from the
grammarian's point of view ; and he kindly allows me to mention here his
conclusion that the average number of compound verbs per page of
WH's Greek Test, is in Hebrew 8-0, Acts 6-25, Luke and Mark 5.7, Paul 3-8,
Matthew 3-55, John (Gospel) 1-97. Some instances of Mark's liking for
compound verbs may be seen above in the remarks on iropevofjLai (p. 14) and
on arpafyeis (p. 46).
1 In this and the following lists proper names and numerals are
omitted, because they prove nothing as to a vocabulary and style : (?) im-
plies some doubt as to the reading.
2 But in Luke the word is used literally, in Acts figuratively.
3 For the explanation of these terms see above, pp. 15, 25.
i 7 6
Statistics and Observations Pt. in. c
Seventeen words are peculiar to Matthew and Acts,
viz. :
from LXX)
om LXX)
5
KOViaO)
fjiyos
IO
opafjia
(from
LXX)
(TV(TTp6(pa) (?
Fourteen words are peculiar to Mark and Acts, viz. :
<rav8d\iov
(TTTOOfJial
opicifa a-vvavaftaiva)
dcr<paX)s
avroparos
5 Siacnrda) lo Trpvpva
Thirteen words are peculiar to John and Acts, viz. :
aXXopai
Siarpifta* vfvoa
e\Kva) 6p,ov
5 eViXeyopu IO jr\fvpd (?)
Thus we see that the number of words found only in
Luke and Acts (58) largely exceeds the whole number of
those found only in the other three Gospels respectively
and in Acts (17 + 14 + 13 = 44). If we only consider the
Synoptic Gospels, the number is nearly double (58 to 31).
B. Words and phrases characteristic of the three
Synoptists which are also found in Acts.
If we examine these, as given above (Part I, pp. 4-23),
we have the following striking figures :
Out of the 95 characteristic of Matthew, 46, or slightly
less than half, are found in Acts.
Out of the 41 characteristic of Mark, 22, or slightly more
than half, are found in Acts.
Out of the 151 characteristic of Luke, 115, or slightly
more than three-fourths, are found in Acts.
1 But in Matthew the word is used literally, in Acts figuratively.
Div.i. n 57. Luke's Gospel 177
SECTION II
DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE LANGUAGE OF LUKE
AND ACTS
It was said at the beginning of the preceding Section
(p. 174) that the similarity between the language of Luke
and Acts has been abundantly proved and illustrated. But
I do not know that much attention has been paid to the
linguistic differences between the two. These, however,
are important in their way ; for, while quite insufficient
to throw doubt on the common authorship, they seem to
suggest that a considerable time must have elapsed between
the writing of the two books. 1 They may be placed under
five headings :
i. Words and phrases characteristic of Luke's Gospel in
contrast to the other Synoptics, but used in Acts at least
three times as often as in Luke :
(aTTo'oToAoj,) axpt, eyeVero followed by infinitive,
(='by name 5 ), re. The above should be examined
in the table given on pp. 16-23. Some others deserving
notice as coming under this category are :
Acts.
(dvdyo))
Mt & Mk
Lk
Total.
Chaps,
i-xii.
Chaps,
xiii+xxviii.
I
3
17
3
14
2
6
...
6
...
2
10
7
3
2
7
3
4
...
2
12
4
8
...
2
27
9
18
9
13
41
27
14
10
26
1 2O
53
67
ovv .
dyiov
Total .
Mention may also be made of dvaKplvat,
1 I do not think that nearly all of them are such as can be caused by differ-
ences in the sources used by Luke in the two books ; for we know how
freely he dealt with Mark, and probably with Q also, in matters of style, and
even of vocabulary.
178 Statistics and Observations PUIII.C
ia, Karaya> as occurring never in Matthew or Mark, once in
Luke, and 5, 8, 9, 8, 7 times respectively in Acts. And the supple-
mentary lists on pp. 27-9 will suggest some other cases which are
more or less in point.
Under this heading, and the subsequent ones, a few words
are bracketed ( ) : these are comparatively unimportant as
linguistic evidence, because they may be mainly accounted
for by the subject-matter.
ii. Words and phrases never occurring in Luke, but
frequently in Acts.
(Under the preceding heading (i) we had words, &c.,
which might be quoted as evidence both for the similarity
and the dissimilarity between Luke and Acts : under this
and the following headings (ii, iii, iv, v) the dissimilarity
alone is brought out.)
Acts.
Chaps. Chaps.
Total. i-xii. xiii-xxviii.
alpe&ig ..... 6 I 5
(ii^czAfzLt/^m^co . . o ^
(avBvTraros) .... 5 ... 5
y^os 9 4 5
5 SiaXeyo/uai ..... IO ... IO
eVavpioi/ 1 ..... IO 3 7
eViKaXeo/uai (of being named 2 ) . 9 8 i (?)
(of calling upon) . 1 1 4 7 3
624
IO eViVra/zat ..... 9 * 8
fjicTair ffjL7rop.cn .... 9 5 4
6p.o6vfiaS6v . ... 10 7 3
opap.a ..... II 8 3
15 TTpoovcaprepea) .... 6 6
repar ...... 9 7 2
/ O
Tj^peco ...... o o
(Xi\iapxos) 17 ... 17
2O ^ajpt'ov ..... 7 6 I
Total . . 172 71 101
1 With TT? (iravptov compare (irl rty avpiov in Lk x. 35 ; Acts iv. 5 only.
2 Contrast with this the frequent use of fcaXovpfvos in Luke.
3 This includes the five or (including xxv. 21) six references to the
'appeal unto Caesar'.
Div. i. n 5/. Luke's Gospel 179
It is also remarkable that Luke has in his Gospel no instance of
the verb for ' he said ' being understood instead of expressed, as it
is in Actsii. 38 ; v. 9 ; ix. 5, n ; xix. 2 ; xxv. 22 ; xxvi. 25, 28, 29
(cf. also x. 15); nor of <a\ vvv beginning a sentence, as in Acts iii.
17; vii. 34 (LXX); x. 5 ; xiii. n; xvi. 37 ; xx. 22,25; xxii,
16 ; xxvi. 6 (cf. also v. 38 ; xxiii. 21); nor of vvv ovv as in Acts x.
33 ; xv. 10 ; xvi. 36 ; xxiii. 15 ; nor of the participle e(W as in
Acts .vii. 37; xxii. 24; xxiv. 22; xxvii. 35.
iii. Words and phrases rarely occurring in Luke, but
frequently in Acts.
J
Acts.
/3ouXo/iai
Kara = ' against ' .
$ Ke\va> ..
fJLOVOV ...
vopifa ...
Trapi'oT/7/it, transitive
ovvepxofj,at ..
10 rpo<^ ...
rnot 'l
Luke.
Total.
Chaps,
i-xii.
Chaps,
xiii-xxviii.
2
14
3
II
2
10
5
5
2
6
6
3
12
2
10
I
I?
4
13
I
8
2
6
2
7
2
5
I
5
2
3
2
16
9
7
I
7
2
5
I
5
5
...
7
24
5
19
Total . . 25 131 41 90 l
is used quite differently in Luke and Acts, being in the
former applied only to persons, in the latter only to things known.
It is curious that 6 of the above 12 words should happen to be
used in Matthew much more frequently than in Luke, viz. fj
Matthew 10, Kara = ' against' Matthew 14, KC\(IKD Matthew 7,
Matthew 7, r/xxpj? Matthew 4, fopi Matthew 17. Two of the words
are strongly Pauline, viz. povov and TrapiW^i transitive, being used
36 and 13 times in the 1 3 Epistles.
iv. Words and phrases frequently occurring in Luke, but
never in Acts.
&?.
. II
7T\Ol>(TLOS I I
&.
ayairda) . . . . 12
d/otapreoXo? . . . .17
eyeveTo with a finite verb . 22 a-rpa(pfis .... 7
1 See also p. 152 note 4 on the use of 'Iov5a?o<.
3 In Acts ix. 40 ; xvi. 18 we find (iriffrptyas used as arpa^ets is used in the
Gospel.
N 2
180 Statistics and Observations Pt. in. c
On the last four of these words more statistics will be found on
pp. 16-23, where also will be found 31 other words and phrases,
which, while occurring 4 times and upwards in Luke's Gospel, and
being more or less characteristic of it, are absent from Acts.
v. Words and phrases frequently occurring in Luke, but
much more rarely in Acts.
Acts.
^
Chaps.
Chaps.
Luke.
Total.
i-xii. xrii-xxviii.
(OVTOV, &C.
57
22
8
14
eyfvcro with Kai .
II
I (?)
I (?)
...
(17TV Of, tllTOV O .
59
15
10
5
fv TW with infinitive .
32
.7
6
i
eep^O)Ufli OTTO
13
3
...
3
/cat avros, &C., nom. .
41
8
i
7
avros 6, &C.
ii
2
...
2
I c
i
^
Total .
o
239
62
27
35
'he doubtful case of eyeWro K
a* is in
Acts v. 7.
All but
the first
of the above 8 words, &c., and some others pointing less decidedly
in the same direction, may be examined on pp. 16-23. See also
p. 14 on tva (Luke 45, Acts 15) and contrast with it onus on p. 6
(Luke 7, Acts 14).
If the differences of vocabulary and phraseology which
have been collected under these five headings are considered
together, they seem to me to suggest the inference that the
two books, though the works of the same writer, could not
have proceeded from him at the same, or very nearly the
same, time. Would it be at all likely that an author (unless
he wished to conceal his identity, which we know from
Acts i. i that this author did not wish) would so alter his
style in two nearly contemporaneous books as, e.g., to drop
ei7rez> 8e, h r<p with infinitive, and Kai euro's, to take to fj.v
ovvy re, Ke\Viv, and avvtpxofjiai, and to substitute the in-
finitive for the finite verb after tyeVero, to the extent that
has now appeared ? We have thus some internal evidence
in favour of placing Luke at a considerably earlier date
Div.i.n S Luke's Gospel 181
than Acts, 1 whatever the date of the latter book may be
a question on which the next Section will bear.
[To enter upon the difference which Feine and others
have observed between Acts i-xii and xiii-xxviii, 2 and
which they refer to Luke's use of authorities in the
former part of his work, does not come within the scope
of this book. But in the above statistics as to Acts that
division into two parts has been taken into account, for the
sake of students of that particular subject. Here it need
only be said that although (i) the above tables (see especially
iii) show that the divergence of the language from that of
the Gospel is greater in the second than in the first part
of Acts, 3 and although (2) this is still more decidedly the
case as to the 413 words which are peculiar to Acts (p. 204)
and which occur more than twice as often in the second as in
the first part, 4 and although, again, (3) a few words or phrases
can be pointed out as characterizing the two parts respec-
tively, 5 these phenomena taken together are of small weight
1 This \yould also account for the apparent difference in chronology, &c.,
between Lk xxiv and Acts i. In the interval between the composition
of the two books Luke might have received fuller information as to the
days subsequent to the Resurrection : see also Wright's note on Lk xxii. 52.
Bishop Chase stands almost alone in regarding Acts as ' planned and com-
posed' before the Gospel (Camb. Theol. Essays (1905), pp. 380, 406 f.).
2 I adhere to this division of Acts, though Harnack draws his line at
xvi. 5 (Acts of the Apostles, E. T., p. xxxii. I need hardly say that the im-
portance of this book to critical students of Acts is very great in some
respects even greater than that of the better known Luke the Physician}.
On the failure of past attempts to assign sources to various parts of Acts,
see Knowling in Expositors Greek Test., vol. ii, pp. 22-30, and Chase,
Credibility of the Acts, p. 15.
3 In making these comparisons it must be borne in mind that the
second part is the longer : it fills 39 pages, while the first part only fills
30 pages in WH.
4 Most of these 413 peculiar words are found only once, so the whole
number of the occurrences of them is only 564, of which 180 are in chapters
i-xii, and 384 in chapters xiii-xxviii.
5 See Weiss, Introd. to N. T., E. T., ii. 333. His strongest instances
seem to be Qiarrmi and TrpoovmpTepecu used only in the first part, and law,
KCLKCI (cf. also KaKeiOev), and irovrjpos used only in the second part. For
surely such words as aairafrpat, StaXeyofjiai, Karavrdw, ak^o^ai (used of
proselytes) in the second part would be naturally suggested by the sub-
182 Statistics and Observations Pt. in. c
against the mass of linguistic evidence for common author-
ship. Some of them may perhaps be accounted for by the
use of documents in chapters i-xii ; but a large proportion
of them are due to difference of subject-matter, and to the
fact that the scenes and surroundings of the facts recorded
are so diverse, being in the first part so far more Jewish
and Palestinian than in the second.]
SECTION III
SPECIAL CONSIDERATION OF THE ' WE '-SECTIONS OF ;.
IN RELATION TO ST. LUKE'S GOSPEL
In Acts xvi. 10-17; xx 5~ I 55 xx i- 1-18 i xxvii. i-xxviii.
1 6 inclusive, we find four passages, containing 97 verses,
in which the writer uses the first person plural, 1 and thus
represents himself as having been one of Paul's companions
in travel. These passages may be, and have been, accounted
for in three ways.
(a) First, the compiler of Acts may have inserted these
extracts from a * travel-document ' which had been handed
down to him, and may have accidentally or carelessly left
the ' we ' standing in them, without mentioning that he was
making direct quotations. But, although instances of such
negligence have been supplied from mediaeval chroniclers, 2
it does not seem at all likely to have been committed by this
author, who was evidently no unskilled writer, and who
also evidently had no hesitation in ' working over ' and
jects of the narrative, as well as airoXoyeofJiai, lyKa\fca and fy/cA^a, and
KaTijyopeo}, upon which Weiss does not lay stress for this reason. An im-
portant addition to what I have called the strongest instances may be found
in the occurrence of the ' periphrastic imperfect ' 18 times in the first part
and only 6 times in the second.
1 It is also used in D's addition to Acts xi. 28. And it is possible that the
writer's presence in Pisidia is implied in xiv. 22, c we must enter.'
2 Zeller, ii. 258.
Div. i. in S/. Luke's Gospel 183
adapting his materials, as we see in his treatment of the
Marcan and Logian sources in his Gospel.
(/3) Therefore a second theory is preferred by Zeller and
others, to whom a late date for the composition of Acts
seems on other grounds probable. They adopt the view
that the 'we' is left in the narrative designedly, because
the compiler wished ' to identify himself with the older
reporter ', and so ' to pass for one of Paul's companions V
in order ' to recommend his production '. 2
(y) The third account of the matter is that the writer
was from time to time a companion of Paul in his travels,
and that he simply and naturally wrote in the first person
when narrating events at which he had been present. There
would be nothing strange, nothing that required any ex-
planation, in his doing so ; for Theophilus, to whom his
personality was evidently known (Lk i. 3 ; Acts i. i), 3
would in all probability be aware also that he had been
a fellow traveller of the Apostle of the Gentiles.
Now this last view, which attributes the composition of
the third Gospel and of the whole of Acts to the original
author of the * We '-Sections, receives very strong support
from linguistic considerations. 4
A.
Let us refer back to the ' words and phrases character-
istic of ' each Synoptic Gospel, as they were collected on
1 Overbeck, i. 43 (in Eng. tr. of Zeller).
2 S. Davidson, Introd. to N. T., ii. 272. So Schmiedel in Enc. Bibl. s. v.
Acts, i.
3 I have assumed that, as the epithet KpaTiart seems to show, Theophilus
was an actual person, and not ' a representative of the Christian reader
generally ' : but the assumption is of no great importance for our present
argument.
4 Pre-eminent among recent critical writers who have adopted this view,
and largely upon linguistic grounds, is Harnack in Lukas der Arzt (1906) :
see especially pp. 47 ff., 56 ff. (in E. T., Luke the Phys., pp. 67 ff., 81 ff.).
See also Burkitt, Gospel History, &c. (1906), pp. 110-20.
184 Statistics and Observations Pt. in. c
pp. 4-33, and some remarkable results bearing on our
present point will appear.
(i) As to the characteristically Lucan words and phrases,
it may be seen in the summary on p. 23 that the number
of the occurrences of them (viz. in) in the 97 verses of the
' We '-Sections of Acts is very nearly as large as the number
(viz. 116) in the 66 1 verses of Mark. And in the 1,068
verses of Matthew they occur only 216 times, which is
less than twice as often as in the ' We '-Sections, though
Matthew is eleven times as long as they are.
'(2) Again, if we contrast the occurrences of the words
and phrases characteristic of each Gospel, we find that
a. The Matthaean words and phrases are found in
Matthew 904 times, which is about forty-five times as often
as the 20 occurrences of them in the ' We '-Sections ;
b. The Marcan words and phrases are found in Mark
357 times, which is about thirty-tivo times as often as the
ii occurrences of them in the ' We '-Sections ; while
c. The Lucan words and phrases are found in Luke 1,483
times, which is not much more than thirteen times as often
as the in occurrences of them in the ' We '-Sections.
(3) Once more, if in a similar way we take the separate
words and phrases, without regard to the frequency of
their occurrence, we find in the ' We '-Sections :
a. Out of the 95 Matthaean words and phrases, n or
slightly more than one-ninth ;
b. Out of the 41 Marcan words and phrases, 7 or about
one-sixth ;
c. Out of the 151 Lucan words and phrases, 45 or some-
what less than one-third (the almost exact proportion being
three- tenths).
The ii Matthaean words, &c., are tueWtv (twice), KeAevw,
a?, IJLOVOV, oOtv, 7rap0eWy, Trpocrepxo/^ai (twice?),
. i. in S/. Luke's Gospel 185
(twice), ro're (4 times), rpo^r/ (4 times): the 7 Marcan
ones are eAeyoj; (3 times, viz. xxi. 4 ; xxviii. 4, 6),
Karaxeijuat, /cpareco, TraAtr, Tra/norrjjuu intransitive (twice),
(twice) : the 45 Lucan ones, which are generally of a more
distinctive and important kind, are to be seen on pp. 16 ff.
Such evidence of unity of authorship, drawn from a com-
parison of the language of the three Synoptic Gospels,
appears to me irresistible. Is it not utterly improbable
that the language of the original writer of the ' We '-Sections
should have chanced to have so very many more corre-
spondences with the language of the subsequent compiler
than with that of Matthew or Mark ?
B.
But in view of the importance of this matter as sup-
plying the best, and almost the only, means we have for
fixing the approximate date of any Gospel, it may be
worth while to add some other evidence positive and
not comparative which points in the same direction. This
also happens to fall under three heads. The following are
instances of:
i. Words and phrases found only in the ' We '-Sections
and in the rest of Acts 1
1 We ' Rest
of Acts.
OTTOTrXe'co ..... 2*2
acfrvco ...... I 2
/3m I 2
StarpijSco with ace. of time . . 2 4
5 fKficre ...... I I
..... I 2
2 2
..... I 3
fjpepai LKavai ..... I 3
IO Tj/jiepai TrXfioi/es 1 , TrXei'ovy ... 2 2
1 Dr. Knowling observes that of these 21 words and phrases 6 occur once
and 2 twice, in chaps, xiii-xiv (Expositor's Greek Test, on Acts, p. 315).
i86
Statistics and Observations pt. in. c
rjp.epa.1 rives
with acc. of person . .
tfidvc* Tpo<prjs . .
15 Vfavias ......
ou TV^tot' .
7rpoo-K(K\r)fjiai with acc. .
rai/Cj/ . ...
r,^ errtovo-j; (in vii. 26 with ^c'p?) 2 .
20
We Rest
of Acts.
I
4
I
I
I
i
2
I
I
3(?
I
i
I
i
I
4
3
2
i
3
i
2
Total . / 28 46
is omitted because the reading in xxvii. 39 is doubtful,
and KarcxpepQ) because it is used in such different senses.
ii. Words and phrases found only in the ' We '-Sections
and Luke, with or without the rest of Acts also
' We ' Rest
= ' embark ' 3 .
l>Vp(TK(i)
5 a7T(mi>acr<ra> .
= kindle
with yiverrdai
IO
6/LttXeo) .
1 5 (TV vapirdfa
r
(cf. also Acts xiii. 44 ?)
Total
of Acts.
Luke.
I 2
I
...
I
...
I
4
2
...
I
...
3
...
2
2 I
2
3 3
3
...
I
i
I
i
2
...
I
5
3
2
i
i 3
2
i
I
30
23
28
1 Elsewhere the preposition is omitted.
2 On this and other notes of time see Harnack, Acts ofApp., E. T., pp. 10 f.,
3!-4.
3 See Prof. Burkitt's interesting comparison of the' We'-Sections with the
only account of a voyage in the third Gospel, viz. in viii. 22-5 (pp. tit., p. 1 12).
Div. I. in
Luke's Gospel
187
iii. Words and phrases found in the ' We '-Sections and also
used predominantly, though not exclusively, in the rest of
Acts or Luke or either of them
1 We ' Rest
of Acts.
.... 2 6
OTTOS 2 ..... I 9
oTTOo-Traco ..... I I
arotros ..... I I
5 @ov\r) ..... 2 5
diaXeyouai ..... 2 8
diavoiyw ..... I 2
Siarpt/Sa) ...... 2 6
IO eaa> ...... 3 4
ei<r/tu I 2
fVi with ace. of time 5 . . 5 8
eVt/3atW 3 2
fJTlfJLfVCi ..... 4 2
77/zepa T. <ra/3/3arou, -rcoj/ 6 . . I I
#eis, Qevrfs, Tidcvres TO. yovara . I 3
tKafdy 7 4 14
2O KaKeldev ..... 5 3
KarayyeXAco . . . . I IO
Karavrdo) ..... 4 5
KaTfpxofJ-ai 3 9
|ei/i'Cco, used of receiving strangers
and of lodging ... 2 4
25 opaua ...... I IO
Tuy^aj/w with gen. ... I 2
V7rcp TOU ovofJiaros ... I 3
10
I
I
2
4
I
Total
63 129
47
Rest
ofN.T.
4 1
II
i
I 1
I
2
I
2
I*
6
I
9 1
4
9
2
I
13
I
7 1
. i
96
1 Only in Pauline Epistles, except that ava\afji0avoj occurs also in
Appendix to Mark, and eiripevaj in Pericope de Adullera.
z The readings are often uncertain as to was and anas.
3 Only in Paul and Heb. 4 Only in Heb.
5 The places referred to are Acts xvi. 18 ; xx. 9, n ; xxvii. 20 ; xxviii. 6 ;
Acts iii. i ; iv. 5 ; xiii. 31 ; xvii. 2 ; xviii. 20 ; xix. 8, 10, 34 ; Lk x. 35 ;
xviii. 4; Mt ix. 15; Rom vii. i ; i Cor vii. 39; Gal iv. i ; Heb xi. 30;
2 Pet i. 13.
6 -fjntpa is expressed in these places only : it is understood in Mt
xxviii. i ; Mk xvi. 2, [9] ; Lk xxiv. i ; Jn xx. i ; Acts xx. 7 ; i Cor
xvi. 2. The two non-Lucan instances referred to above are Jn xix. 31 ;
xx. 19 (?). 7 See also in Subsidiary List of Lucan words, p. 27.
188 Statistics and Observations Pt. in. c
Observe also the ' Litotes' of ov with an adjective or adverb (as
ov /ierpiW, OVK oXiyov) 4 times in ' We '-Sections (xx. 12 ; xxvii. 14,
20; xxviii. 2), 12 times in rest of Acts (i. 5; xii. 18; xiv. 28;
xv. 2; xvii. 4, 12, 27 ; xix. n, 23, 24; xxi. 39; xxvi. 19), twice
in Luke (vii. 6 ; xv. 13), rare in rest of N. T. (Thayer refers to Jn
ii. 12 ; iii. 34 only, 1 besides 2 Cor ii. n where a verb is used).
It must be remembered that all the words and phrases
characteristic of Luke are excluded from this list, as having
been already treated in this connexion (pp. 183 ff.) : other-
wise it would have been a far longer list, and would have
showed far more numerous correspondences between the
' We '-Sections and the other Lucan writings.
Against all the above similarities we can only set a few
expressions that are peculiar to these ' We '-Sections. The
only two of these to which any importance can be attached
are Trapatrto) (xxvii. 9, 22) 2 and 7repicupea> (xxvii. 20, 40 ;
xxviii. 13 ?). 3 For ev0uSpojue'o> (xvi. ii ; xxi. i), Karayeo-0ai of
coming to shore (xxvii. 3; xxviii. 12; cf. Lk v. 11),
Ae'yojmai (xxvii. 8, 13), irXoos (xxi. 7 ; xxvii. 9, 10), v
(xxvii. 4, 7), and other such words are amply accounted for
by the subject-matter. We do not find elsewhere rf} ere'pa
for ' the next day ' (xx. 15 ?; xxvii. 3) ; but ' the next day '
happens to be spoken of so much more often in the ' We '-
Sections than in any other passages of the same length 4
that there is nothing remarkable in there being a larger
variety of Greek phrases to express it.
On the whole, then, there is an immense balance of
internal and linguistic evidence in favour of the view that
the original writer of these sections was the same person as
the main author of the Acts and of the third Gospel, and,
1 But see also ou (MKpav in Mk xii. 34 ; Jn xxi. 8.
2 On the medical use of irapaivf<u see Knowling on xxvii. 22, or in Biblical
World, xx. 376, referring to Hobart.
3 Trfpiaipeca is also found in 2 Cor iii. 16 and Heb x. n.
4 It is spoken of in these 97 verses very nearly as often as in the whole
of the rest of Acts, and considerably more often than in the whole of
Luke.
Div. i. in S/. Luke's Gospel 189
consequently, that the date of those books lies within the
lifetime of a companion of St. Paul.
SECTION IV
SUBSIDIARY NOTICE OF THE SIMILARITY BETWEEN THE
LANGUAGE OF THE GOSPEL OF ST. LUKE AND OF
THE PAULINE EPISTLES
The identity of the third Synoptist with a friend and
companion of St. Paul J which we have seen to be so
abundantly proved by the language of Acts generally, and
of the ' We '-Sections of it in particular, is confirmed and
illustrated by some remarkable similarities between his
Gospel and the Pauline Epistles. See also p. 196 (h).
This again (cf. pp. 174-6) may be best shown by a com-
parison with the other Gospels.
A. An examination of the vocabularies of the Gospels
gives the following results. There are
Thirty-two words found only in Matthew (or Matthew
and Acts) and in Paul.
Twenty-two words found only in Mark (or Mark and
Acts) and in Paul.
One hundred and three words found only in Luke (or
Luke and Acts) and in Paul.
Twenty-one words found only in John (or John and
Acts) and in Paul.
The preponderance in the case of Luke is surely very
significant. Lists of the words are given below.
There are about 78 words found only in Acts and Paul,
besides the 44 of the above 103 which are found also in
Luke, as shown on the next two pages.
1 Cf. Col iv. 14 ; 2 Tim iv. u ; Philem 24. From Dr. Hobart's work
on The Medical Language of St. Luke (Dublin, 1882) may be selected some
forcible indications that the writer of Luke and Acts was an iarp6s
(Col iv. 14).
190
Statistics and Observations Pt. in. c
B. Referring to the lists of 'characteristic words and
phrases J of the three Synoptists given on pp. 4-23, we see
that of the 95 of Matthew, 48, or slightly more than half,
are found in Paul; of the 41 of Mark, 19, or slightly
less than half, are found in Paul ; of the 151 of Luke, 99, or
very nearly two-thirds, are found in Paul.
Thirty-two words found in Matthew ('with or without
Acts also) and Paul only :
aKddapa-ia
f\a<pp6$
o<pX^
axepaios
ff-aipea)
6(pfi\r}p,a
aKpaarid
7Tl(Tr]p,OS
25 7ra\tvyeve(ria t
afJLd *
15 KfpafJLCVS
irapfKTos *
5 d/JLplfJLVOS
pvpios
TrXarvva)
dvaTT\T)p6a>
papos (?)
rd(pos
dndvrrjo-is *
vinos
vo-repos (?) t
direvavTi (?) *
ofyyos *
30 xaXenos t
deiyuarifa
2O odvp/Jios
\|/'6i;So/itipri'p
10 BrjXos
OKVTjpOS
wpatos *
fKTOS *
o\a>s
Twenty-two words found in Mark (with or without Acts
also) and Paul only:
Trpoovcaprfpeo) *
5 oTroarepeo)
d<ppoo-vvr)
IO
2O rpofios
vTToSeopxu *
Jew?
15 7repi<pe'po>
tipnvtvtt
One hundred and three words found in Luke (with or
without Acts also) and Paul only :
adr)\os dvaKpiva* * di/raTroSofia
aj/aXiV/cw
ava\v(i)
' ' *
IO ai/o/^ro?
5 dvd0ffj.d * (ivoid "t"
al(pvidios (e(pv.
WH in Luke)
avTaTroKpivopat
1 5
Div. I. iv
diro\oyeop,ai *
Spa*
2O dporptdo)
do-</)dXeia *
drw'to *
aroiros *
dxdpuTTOs t
25
S/. Luke's Gospel
SiayyeXXa)
3O 8lpp.T)VVO> (?) *
Soy/za *
5uj/do-n/s * t
evypdfpofjuii
3 5
ea7rooreXXa> *
40
fVi/xeXeo/iai t
f7n</>ai'j/a> * t
epyatfia *
45 cvyevrjs *
(j)i(TTT]fJLl
Karaya)
50
55 KlvdwCVto *
Kparaioopai
60
vop,odiddcrKa\os * t
65 olKovop.ia
OTTTao-ta *
6crtdrj;s
Trayis
70 TrayoTrXia
jravovpyta
irarpia
75 Treptrroie'ofiai * t
I 9 I
J.
TrpoSdr?/? * t
8O TTpOKOTTTO)
TTVKlxfc (?) * f
o-iyda> *
O-KOTJ eco
85 (TTflpOS
(TVVaVTl
crvve<r6ia> *
90
(TfOTTJplOV
95 V7roo-Tpe'(pu> (?) *
(popos
IOO (pp6vr)(ris
Xapiop.ai *
^nptrdco
Also the form o6r& * (for ovStis) may be noted ; and TO dpryupov *
used of quotations (p. 33).
Twenty-one words found in John (with or without Acts
also) and Paul only :
Karrjyopia t 1*5 ^ a p<^l^6fop.ai
fj.aivop.iii *
I O VOfJLr) f TTfplTOfJLT)
7rrj\6s
2O
*f
'lu-parjKfiTrjs *
O/iCOf
o?rXo^
6<rp,r)
1 Used, however, in very different senses.
192 Statistics and Observations PL m. c
Words marked thus * are found in Acts also. [As to Matthew
or Mark or John there is no significance or importance in the fact
that the words are found in Acts also ; but it is stated for the sake
of comparison with Luke, in which case the fact does require to be
noticed.]
t Only in Pastoral Epistles.
Note on the Relation between Luke, Acts, Paul,
and Hebrews.
It is also interesting to notice, as an additional link
between Luke, Acts, and Paul, that they are very much
more closely connected in language with the Epistle to the
Hebrews than the other Gospels are. The following figures
show this :
Four words are found only in Matthew and Hebrews (besides
fi>6vfjLT)(ris and ravpos, which are also in Acts *).
Five words are found only in Mark and Hebrews (there being
none which are also in Acts).
Sixteen words are found only in Luke and Hebrews (besides
nine which are also in Acts).
Four words are found only in John and Hebrews (besides f%dfs,
which is also in Acts).
Twenty-two words are found only in Acts and Hebrews.
Forty-six words are found only in Paul and Hebrews.
It may be well to give the words, so far as concerns the
Gospels and Acts :
In Matthew and Hebrews only : eXeqpai', iXecos, o-vireXaa, rpifioXof.
In Mark and Hebrews only: u7ro/3aXXo>, ^a7rno-/ioy, ?K<o/3os-,
fVKaipos, oXo/cauratyia.
In Luke and Hebrews : dvop66a> J, dv&Tepov, aTraXXao-o-w j, dno-
ypd(j)op.ai, avrpov J, 6ia/3cuVa> J, Siari&ftcu J , efcXewra), ei/o^X/o), evderos,
%\os J, ffpareia, tXa<7KO/^iat, Xvrpaxns, /neTO^oy, TraXaioa), TravTe\r)S,irapa\v-
o/uai |, irapirjfu, irapoiKfu, TroXi'rqs J, TroppvOfv, avvavTato J, TeXeuocris, $ya>.
(The 9 words marked J are also in Acts, the remaining 16 are in
Luke and Hebrews only.)
In John and Hebrews Only : yqpaoTcw, eXarr<Ja>, rdxfiov (?), UO-O-COTTOS.
1 On the mention of Acts see the remark in square brackets above, which
applies here also.
. i. iv S/. Luke's Gospel 193
In Acts and Hebrews Only : aywpa,
do-aXeuroy, doretoy, f3of)0fia, ao-ft/xi, ei/rpo/zo?, fViore'AXa), fpvdpos, eVeorfpo?,
KaiTot, Karanavvis, Karanava), *ara(peirya>, Kf)aXaiov (but in different
Senses), op#ds, Trapo^uo-p-oy, iraTpidpxqs, v\f$6v, virapgis (see also the
nine words marked J above).
It may also be noticed that there are
(a) nine words occurring in Luke, Acts, Paul, and Heb only,
viz. aioo>, d<pioT7fu, 8iajJ.apTvpofj.ai, occpeuyoo, Kare^to, 1 6pia>,
and ten words in Luke, Paul, and Heb only, viz.
TTOKfijucu, aTroXvrpaxrtff, Karap-yew, KOITTJ, \eirovpyia,
rat-is, TOLVVV 2 ;
(<:) and it may be added that there are seventeen words found
in Acts, Paul, and Heb Only, viz. aXXaorao), avayicaios, dvtrjfju, a<r(f)a\T)S,
cpfjLeva) (in Paul and Heb from LXX), evTvyxaw, enifao-is 3 (always
with ^etpwv), XetToupyew, /ifraXa/zj3ai/w, 3 vvvt, 7reptatpe'a>,
TTtKpta, TTOU (?), 7rpo(r^)opa, (TKXrjpvva), v
But such cases are much fewer when we turn to the other
Gospels, there being none in Matthew, Acts, Paul, and Heb
only, and two in Matthew, Paul, and Heb only, viz. /xera/xe-
Aojuat and ^perro) ; one in Mark, Acts, Paul, and Heb only,
viz. 7rapa5^xMt, 3 and one in Mark, Paul, and Heb only, viz.
a^a)oti/x^?}o-Ka) ; three in John, Acts, Paul, and Heb only, viz.
awo, Sa>pea, Xi0a<X and two in John, Paul, and Heb only,
viz. eA.atrcrcoz', Aarpeta. 4
1 For KdTfixtTo in Jn v. 4 is not reckoned.
2 See also the references to irapd = beyond on p. 45.
3 The Pauline employment of these four words is in the Pastoral Epistles
only.
4 If with Tisch we read ra^iov in i Tim iii. 14, that word must be added
here, and withdrawn from the above short list of words in John and
Heb only.
O
194 Statistics and Observations Pt. in. c
DIVISION II
ON THE SMALLER ADDITIONS IN ST. LUKE'S GOSPEL
The ' peculiar ' portions of St. Luke's Gospel, which are
enumerated on p. 15, and which amount to about 499
verses, 1 are those which seem to imply the use of a source
or sources (probably written) which Matthew and Mark did
not use. But, besides them, there are many shorter passages
in this Gospel to which the other Synoptists have no
parallels. The most important of these amount to about
1 13 verses, viz. : Lk iii. i, 2 ; 5, 6 ; 15 ; 18; 19 b, 20 a ; iv.
\a\ 13 ; 14$; 15; v. 17 ; 39; vi. 11 a ', 12 ; 170; 33,
34, 37 , 3 8 * J vii. 3 a, 4, 5, 6 , 7 " ', 10 ; 20, 21 ; 29, 30 ; viii.
12 b\ ix. gb\ i8#; 28 b, 2,9 a ; 43,44 a\ x. 8 b ; 25, 26 ; xi.
i ; 3 6 J 40, 41 5 44 ; 45> 4^ tf ; 53, 54 ; xii. i a and ; 29 b ;
32, 33 * J 35~ 8 ; 4i ; 5^ ; 54, 55 (?) ; xiii. 22, 23 ; 25-7 ;
xiv. 25 ; xv. 3 ; xvii. 3 b, 4 ; 5 ; 20-2 ; 30 ; 37 a ; xviii.
31 ; 34; 43 ; xix. 28 ; 37; xx. i60; 20 ; 26 ; 350,
36^,38^; 39; xxi. 130; 18; 19; 21 , 22 ; 25 ; 26 #;
34-6 ; 37, 38 ; xxii. 3 ^ ; 15 ; 19 b, 2O ; 40 ; 43, 44 ; 45 ;
48 b ; 49 ; 61 a ; 65 ; 66 # ; 67, 68 ; xxiii. 2 ; 4-6 ; 14-16 ;
22 b, 23 ; 34 a ; 45 <* J 4 8 ; 5 1 5 53 ^ ; 5" 5 xxiv. 40 ; 5 ^ ;
7, 80; II; 12; 3<5; 40; 51 ; 52^.
If these 113 verses are added to the 499, the number is
612, being more than half the 1,149 verses in the Gospel. 2
An attempt, which can only be tentative and to a large
extent speculative, 3 will now be made to classify these
smaller additions, and to suggest a possible or probable
account of them.
1 Including, of course, the 132 verses of chapters i and ii.
2 In Westcott, Introd. to Study of Gospels, p. 195 (8th ed, 1895), the
peculiar matter in Luke is estimated at 59 per cent.
3 It is on this account that it has been placed so late in the book. A
similar examination of the minor additions in Matthew failed to supply
materials for such classification.
civ. ii St. Luke's Gospel 195
Luke may have retained, while Matthew omits, the occasions of
sayings which they drew from a common source : Lk xi. i ; 45,
46 a ; xii. 41 ; xiii. 22, 23 ; xiv. 25 ; xv. 3 1 ; xvii. 5 ; 20-2 ; 37 a ;
perhaps also x. 25, 26. (Compare xi. 37, 38, in the list on p. 15 :
and see p. 161.)
(*)
Luke may have retained the original narrative in its fullness,
while Matthew, after his manner, shortened it: Lk vi. 17 a (?) ;
vii. 30, 4, 5, 6, 70; 10 ; 20, 21. (See p. 158.)
The following may be later insertions from other sources ; they
are placed by WH in single or double brackets : Lk v. 39 ; xxii.
20; 43, 44; xxiii. 34 a\ xxiv. 12; 36 ; 40; 51 0; 52 a.
The following may be either independent traditions, or variants
of traditions preserved also elsewhere : Lk vii. 29, 30 (cf. Mt xxi.
32); xi. 40, 41 (cf. Mt xxiii. 25, 26); 44 (cf. Mt xxiii. 27, 28);
xii. i b (cf. Mt xvi. 6; Mk viii. 15); 35-8 (cf. Mt xxv. 6 and
Mk xiii. 34-6) ; 52 (cf. Mt x. 36) ; [perhaps 54, 55, if Mt xvi.
2, 3 is accepted as genuine ;] xiii. 25-7 (cf. Mt vii. 22, 23 ; xxv.
n, 12); xvii. 3 b, 4 (cf. Mt xviii. 21, 22) ; xxi. 19 (cf. Mtxxiv. 13 ;
Mk xiii. 13 b}.
w
Among the additions which may be editorial, some bring out the
prayerfulness which is assumed to be the constant habit of Jesus :
Lk vi. 12 b ; ix. 18 a; 28 b, 29 a. See also Hi. 21 ; v. 16; xi. i.
Others emphasize the right use of wealth, the duty of liberality,
&c. : Lk vi. 33, 34, 37 b, 38 a\ xii. 32, 33 a ; and the mention of
leaving all in v. n and 28. (Compare, among the longer passages
named on p, 15, Lk vi. 24-6; xii. 13-21 ; xiv. 1-14; 28-33;
xvi. 1-12, 14, 15, 19-31 ; and perhaps viii. 1-3.)
1 Perhaps also verses i, 2: but cf. Mt ix. 10, n ; Mk ii. 15, 16 ; Lk v.
29, 30.
O 2
196 Statistics and Observations PI. in. c
Other such additions may be described as merely heightening the
effect of the narrative. The words of them are given here, so that
they may be examined together :
Lk iii. 1 8 TroXXa p.cv ovv /cat ercpa 7rapaKa\S>v cvr)yye\ifTO TOV \aov *.
,, iii. 19 b Koi TTfpl TrdvTMv l>v tmbjirtv Trovrjpwv 6 'Hpaftrjs.
iii. 2O a TTpofffdrjKev KOI TOVTO cVi irdo-iv.
iv. 15 KCU avTos fSldao~Kv fv rat? o~vvaya>yals avTwv, doa6fj.fvos VTTO
,,
v. 17 b KOI dvvafjiis Kvpiov rjV els TO lao-Qai
vi. II el avrol de fTT\f]0~6r)o~av dvoias.
ix. 43 a et-firXfjo-Q-ovTO 8e navrcs eVi 777 /AfyaXftdr^ri TOV deov f.
ix. 43 b TTavTwv 8e Qavpa^ovTUV eVt nao-iv ols eVot'et t.
x i- 53) 54 fjpaw i ypnpp-QTf'is Kal oi $apratot Seivcos
Koi anoo~To^aTi^cii> avTov TTfpl TrXciorwy, fvedpevovTes CLVTOV
6r)p\!<rai n K TOV (TTo/iaro? aLTOv.
xii. I a fino-vvaxdfi-o-S)V T>V p.vpiddo)i> TOV o^Xou, wore KaTcnraTflv
d\\f)\ovs.
,, xviii. 43 b KOI iras 6 \abs tSobj/ edwKev aivov rw de<o t.
xix. 37 fjpj-avTO anav TO 7r\ij6os T>V fLaGrjTwv -)(aipovTS alvc'iv TOV Oebv
<po)vfj fjLeyd\Tj 7rep\ Trao-SiV &v eldov 8vvd[j.O)V f.
xxii. 6l a KOI trrpatfxls 6 Kvpios eVe/3X\^ev ra; rteVpo).
xxii. 65 Kal Tpa TroXXa j3\ao-(prjp.ovvTCS eXcyov is CIVTOV *.
xxiii. 48 xat trdvTes oi avvTrapayevop.ei'oi 0^X01 eVt TTJV dewpiav Tav-
TT)V, . . . TVTTTOVTCS TO. &Tr\Qr] V7TO~Tp(pOV.
xxiv. 4 a Kat eyeVero ev rw aTropeTa-^ai ai/ras rrept TOVTOV.
xxiv. 5 ^ Kal K\IVOVO>V TO. irp6o~a)7ra els TYJV yqv.
Compare with one another the passages marked * and t re-
spectively, and observe the use of TTOS or oW 10 times in these
17 short passages; also in v. 170.
Perhaps some other additions, which have been left for class (t),
might also have been placed here, e. g. Lk iii. 15 ; xx. 20 b ; 26 a\
xxiii. 53 b.
W
The following seem to be Pauline expressions, introduced by
Luke because so familiar to himself : J Lk viii. 12 b (Iva
1 The only similarities named here are some of those in which the Epistles
seem to have suggested the language of the Gospel : in numerous other
cases the reverse of this appears to me more probable ; e. g. in i Cor vii. 34 f.
there is almost certainly a reminiscence of Lk x. 39-41 ; and in Rom xii. 14,
i Cor iv. 12 of Lk vi. 28 (ev\o-yei7t not being genuine in Mt v. 44). The use of
i Thes iv. 8 and Lk x. 16 may have originated in either.
ii S/. Luke's Gospel 197
X. 8 b compared with I Cor X. 27 nav TO irapan-
vfj.lv ea6ifT ) where the words are almost identical, though
the object of the precept is different ; xx. 16 b (w yivotro being used
only here, and Paul 14) ; xxi. 34-6 compared with i Thes v. 3,
4 (atyvidios . . . tViaraTeu KrA.) ; xxii. 53 b f) fgovo-ia rov VKOTOVS as in
Col i. 13. And xxi. 18 recalls St. Paul's spoken words as recorded
in Acts xxvii. 34.
(Thus also, in one of the longer passages peculiar to Luke, ch.
XVlii. I mivTore irpocrfvxeaQai reminds US of I Thes V. 1 6, 17
Other additions, of various kinds, which may be regarded as
probably editorial : Lk iii. i, 2 (historical introduction fixing the
date) ; 5, 6 (lengthening a quotation) ; 15 ; iv. i # * ; 13 3 ; 14 <z * ;
v. 32 (els pcTdvoutv) ; ix. 9<5f; 44 a; xi. 36 J ; xii. 29 b\ xvii. 30;
xviii. 31 b ; 34 (almost repeating ix. 45 which is parallel to Mk ix.
32) ; xix. 28; xx. 20 ; 26 a; 35 a J, 36 b J, 38 { ; 39; xxi. 12 a\
21 b] 22 + ; 25 b, 26 a; 37,38; xxii. 3 a(cf. Jn xiii. 27); 15!;
40; 45 b dno rfjs \vnrjs ) ; 48^; 49; 66 a ; 67,68; xxiii. 2 ;
4-6 ; 14-16 1 ; 22 b, 23 ; 45 a (TOV r)\iov eKXeiVo^ros-) ; 51 a ; 53 b
(cf. Jn xix. 41); 56; xxiv. 7, 8 ; n.
* Compare these two with one another.
t These two are connected with, and partly caused by, the
account of Jesus being sent to Herod in xxiii. 7-12.
\ These and perhaps other sayings included here may be derived
from a special source, written or oral.
An instance of Luke 'sparing the Twelve' : see p. 121, note.
198 Statistics and Observations pt. in
APPENDIX A TO PART III
(see p. 135)
THE SYNOPTISTS AND THE SEPTUAGINT
THE degree of familiarity of the Synoptists respectively with the
LXX may to some extent be inferred from the proportions of the
words peculiar to each of them which the LXX contains and does
not contain. 1 Therefore lists of the words confined to each Gospel
and to Acts have been drawn up on the following pages, the
mark * being placed against those which are not found in the LXX
(including of course the apocryphal as well as the canonical books).' 2
Judged by this test, Mark is considerably the least familiar with
the LXX ; for out of the 71 words peculiar to him, as many as 31,
being about five-twelfths, or not very much less than one-half, are
marked *.
Matthew occupies an intermediate place ; for in this case there
are 112 peculiar words, out of which 36, or slightly less than one-
third, are marked *.
Luke shows most familiarity with the LXX, for in his Gospel
there are 261 peculiar words, of which only 73, being about two-
sevenths, or rather more than one-fourth, are marked *.
And if we take with the words peculiar to the third Gospel those
which occur in it and in Acts, but nowhere else, the whole number
amounts to 319, out of which 80, or almost exactly one-fourth,
are marked *.
It is true that among the 413 words peculiar to Acts a larger
1 This is by no means the only test. I have ascertained, though the proofs
cannot be given here, that the characteristically Lucan expressions (pp. 16 ff.)
are in very much more frequent use in LXX than the Matthaean, and these
again in considerably more frequent use than the Marcan. See, for instances,
the notes on 'lfpovaa\rifj. (p. 18), ci/w with dative (pp. 38 f.), and ovpavos,
ovpavoi (pp. 52 f.). In Plummer's Commentary will be found numerous notices
of Luke's * Hebraisms ' (see the Index, s. v. Hebraisms) ; and if these are
carefully examined it will be found that in very nearly, if not quite, every
case they agree with the LXX, and therefore do not imply any knowledge
of Hebrew or Aramaic.
2 The other Greek versions of the O. T. are not taken into account.
A The Synoptists and the Septuagint 199
proportion is absent from the LXX, for 154, being more than
one-third of them, are marked *. But the list of the words will
show that this excess is completely accounted for by the difference
of subject-matter, which in Acts calls for the use of many nautical
and other terms for which there was no occasion in narratives of
which the scene was almost exclusively Palestinian.
Words marked t are non-Classical : see p. 207.
The figures 2, 3, &c., in the following lists mean that the word
occurs so many times in the Gospel to which it is peculiar : the
absence of any figure implies that the word occurs only once.
Proper names, numerals, and Hebrew or Aramaic words are
omitted.
Words peculiar to Matthew.
dyyetov
Sixdfa *
65 KarairovTi^ofjiai 2
ayyos
eye pa is
KTJTOS
dyKiorpov
35 eyKpvirTQ}
Kop(3avas * ^
dOwos (? 2)
eioea
KovffToudia * f 3
5 alfj-oppoeoj
elprjvoiroius *
Kpvtpatos 2
aiperifa
6A.dfi7rcy
7O KVfJllVOV
a.K\ia\v *
ef^TTOpia
KUVCUl// *
dxpipoo) * 2
40 e/jLTTiirprjfj.1 (? Acts)
fj.a\aKia 3
df.Upl@\T)ffTpOV
ev0vfj.eofj.ai 2
HfTaipQ} 2
10 dva{3i0dfa
egopKifa
fJLfTotKeffta 4
dvainos 2
egwrepos f 3
75 IM\IOV *
dvrjOov *
emyauPpcvQ} f
fJUffOoo^ai 2
dirdyxofJiai
45 eirmaOifa
v6fjnaij,a
diroviirTOJ
emopKeo}
voffffiov
1 5 PapvTifjios * (?)
eiriaireipca *
olfeereia *
fiaffavtffTrjs *
epevyofj.ai
8O OlKiaKOS * *}* 2
ParraXoyea} * t
epifa
oXiyomaria * f
jStatrriys * (
50 epi(piov (? Lk)
6Vap * 6
fipoXH T 2
eratpos 3
ouSa/xws
2O udiuoji'
fvoia (??)
nayiSevo) f
Sdviov (Sai'fioj'Tisch)
evvoeo:
85 TrapaOa\daoios
Seiva *
evvovviCct} ^2
jrapofj-oidfa (?) * "f*
oeafj.r)
55 tvpvxwpos
Ttapoif/is * 2 (? l)
oiatcaOapifa * "f 1
b&viov * t 8
TrAarvs
2 5 8iaKQj\v6)
Oavfidatos
TroXuAo7ta
8ia\\daaofj.ai
Qepiffrrjs 2
90 Trpofrpdfa
Siao-cu^'cu 2
OvfJLOOfMll
irpo(pOdvca
oiopaxpov 2
60 laira *
irvppdfy * f 2 (??)
oteo8os
tcaOd
parrifa 2
30 Sierrjs
KaOrjyrjTrjs * 2
aayrjvr)
Siardfa * 2
KaTaOepaTifr * f
95 ffe\r)vidoiJ.ai * *j- 2
8iv\iCo) +
KarauavQavoj
(rtTtcrTos *
200
Statistics and Observations
pt. in
orarfp *
avvaipo) 3
T (\tvrrj
105 Tv<f>ofjtai *
(pvreia
1 1 o x\afjiv s 2
if/evSoftapTVpia * 2
100 ffwrdaao} 3
<pV\CLKTT]pl01> *
Total 112, of which 36 are marked * as not in LXX, and 18 are
marked t as being non- Classical.
Besides proper names and numerals and the Aramaic word
pand, the words rpvir^a and <j>r)fj,ia> are omitted as not being in
WH's text, though the evidence for them seems strong.
Of the above 112 words, 8 1 are used only once ; 2 1 are used
twice ; 6 are used three times ; and 4 are used four times or oftener,
and are therefore treated among the 'characteristic words and
phrases ', pp. 4-8.
Of the words peculiar to Matthew five-sevenths, and of the words
peculiar to Mark and to Luke six-sevenths, are used only once.
Words peculiar to Mark.
dypevoj
25 firiavvrpfx 03 * t
irpOfj.fpifjivdQ} *f
dXaXos 3
(<TX^ T<US *
50 irpoffd/Sparov f
d\KTpo<p<tivia * *[
Bafj.f3tojj.ai 3
irpoffK<pdXaiov
dXXaxov *
Ovydrpiov * 2
irpocropfj.ifajj.ai *
5 dfxpipdXXca
KaTaftapvvca
TT/JO a troptvofMi
dfJKpotiov
30 KaraoMKca
irvyfjirj
dvaievXiw *
KaraKoirrca
55 ffKwXi]
dvaXos *
KCLTfVXoyfOH t
ffnvpvifa * f
dvairrjSdoj
KaroiKrjffis
ffirfKOvXarup * f
10 dvacTT GvdCo)
KfVTVplCOV * t 3
ffTaffiaarrjs * f
dir68r]fjios *
35 K(f>aXt6<a
<TT<j8as *
diroanydfa *
tcvXiofJiai
60 o-TiX(3a}
dtypifa * 2
KUfj,6iroXts *
avfj,ir6ffiov 2
yvcupevs
fAIJKVVOfJiai
avisexipw 2
15 8votco\os l
fj.oyt\d\os
avvXvireonai
tlrcv * 2
40 fivpifo *
avaarjfiov
(KeafjLl3(Ofjiai f 4
VOUJ/6XWJ *
65 TT)\avyu>s (or S?;A..) *
4*0av/iacu
effTT)s *
rpt'^cy *
fKirepiffffws * )
ova * f
rpVfJ.aXid {"
20 fvayKaXifrfMi f 2
VCU&fttP
virepr)<pavia
ivetXecu
45 Trapojjioios *
virepirtpiffaws * f
tvvvxu * *f
irepirpfxw
70 inroX^vtov f
(dmva f
irpaffid 2
XaX/w'oj'
ciripdirrca * f
irpoavXtov *
1 But all three Synoptists have
. A The Synoptists and the Septuagint 201
Total 71, of which 31 are marked * as not in LXX, and 19 are
marked t as being non-Classical.
Of the above 71 words, 60 are only used once ; 7 are used twice ;
and 4 are used three times or oftener, and are therefore treated
among the 'characteristic words and phrases', pp. 12, 13.
Besides numerals, proper names, and 5 Aramaic words (p. 130),
Qavda-ipos * is excluded from this list as being only found in the
Appendix (xvi. 18), and 'ovoWo> t as being only another form of
Perhaps 7rcfj should be added, as irc&i may be the right reading
in Mt xiv. 13. KUTTTW is omitted, because it occurs also in Peric.
de Adult., Jn viii. 6, 8 (?).
Words peculiar to Luke (Gospel only).
30 diroO\i&oj yt\do) 2
ay pa * 2
dypavXio) * ditopjdaaonai * 60 SUKTV\IOS
dyojvia (??) diropia
alffOdvofJiai
dvdOrjpa (?)
dvaiSia
15 dvd\r]n\//ts *
dvdirtipos * f 1 2
dvaTaaaop.ai *
dv(K\eiTTT05 *
dvTifca\e(u
f 2
25 avTirrfpa *
aTTatrecy
dirapTiap.6s *
35
dpiyj/
aporpov
dpxiT\wvr]S * f
dffrpdiTTQ} 2
40 dtrcwrw? * (adj.
LXX)
aTCKVOS 2
arfp 2
avffTijpos 2
avTOITTTjS *
45 a<pavTOs *
d</>/x>s *
d<pvirv6o) * {
/SaAAdi'TiOi' 4
50 jSdroy (measure) f
0\T)TCOV * f
/3\OJ/7/ *
Povvos 2
55
/3v<r<ros
dTToSe/fartuw J * f yap.l0Kop.ai *
1 But the other form djroSeKtmxu occurs Matthew 1, Luke 1, Hebrews 1.
and is read by R here.
Stayoyyvfa f 2
65 Siayprjyopcw * f
SiaKaOaiptu *
8ia\a\e<u * 2
70
diairpaynartvofjiai *
SMMTCMI
75 Starapdaaofjiai *
80 opaxn"h 3
ra
(?Mt)
Id
202
Statistics and Observations
pt. in
or -a/xat)
CKT(\OJ 2
90 t\Kuufj.ai *
95 fVKVOS
fVVCVU
(aiT60p:at *
loo eiraiT(o) 2
irfi8r)irfp
105
fmiropcvopMi
ciriai.Tiap.6s
7
1 10
ttye (?)
CV<f>OpCQ) *
115 !</>77/wp('a f 2
1)705 2
2 (?)
17 76/10 vm
1 20 0ecapta
6ijptvo)
Opavoj
6p6p.&os * (??)
j 2 C 0V LltCiQi}
ISpws (??)
130 taws
/caraSfcy
KaraicXivQ) 5
135
Karavevu *
KCLTairXcoD *
140
Ktpdriov *
K\ivi8iov * 2
145 K\taia
Koirpla
ico-vpiov
KOpOS
150 Kpanrd\i) *
WH)
Kpvirrrj * f
\ap.irpui *
155
fJ.(VOVV
Aefos
1 60 ptaOios 3
OS * f
J/0(T<7ld
165
orrros
1 70 opcivos 2 (opivosVfll)
<ff
175
ovaia 2
6(f>pvs
navir\r)8fi
1 80
TrapoAtos
s*
a,(?)
irap&evia
185
TTfptKpVirTW *
190 irepioiKcca*
irfpioiKos
ircpiairdopai
irrjyavov *
mtfa
195 irivaKtuiov*
tr\rjp.fjivpa. f
irpayp.artvop.ai
irpaKTOJp 2
irpeaftda 2
200 irpofieXeTaoti *
irpoaavafiaiva)
TtpoaSairavdoJ * f
rrpoaepydop.ai *
Trpo<nroi(0p.ai
205 irpoaprjyvvpi * )* 2
Ttpcxpepti) 2
irToiop.ai 2
*
210 ^7/xa
craAo?
aiitcpa "f 1
anevTos 3
215 airojjifTpiov * f
OKCLIfTO} 3
OKiprdca 3
220 airapyav6oj 2
225
arparoireSov
avyyevis * f
ovyKVpia *
a*f
2
The Synoptists and the Septuagint 203
230
avvoSia
2 35 ffvrmf&yiro/au
TC\ff<pop(Q}
240
rerpairXoos *
Tpav/jia
rpvyaiv
vypos
245 vSpcairtKos *
viroarpcavvvca
virox<uptu 2
250 (papay
(pdrvrj 4
<po/3r]0pov
<f>povip:cas * (adj. in
LXX)
2 55
XpfO(pl\TT)S "f* 2
260 i[/u>x<u * f
ca6v
Total 261, of which 73 are marked * as not in LXX, and 38 are
marked t as being non-Classical.
Of these 261 words, 221 are only used once ; 30 are used twice ;
5 are used three times; 5 are used four times or oftener, and are
therefore treated among the * characteristic words and phrases ',
pp. 16-23.
There is also much evidence for ai>a7rriWa>, SfvrfpoVpwros * t, and
/ioyt?, but they are not in WH's text. BXaTrrw is omitted, being also
in App. to Mark (xvi. 18).
Words found both in Luke and Acts, but peculiar to them.
aiTiov * 3 + 1
(VfSpevo)
Aot/ios
dva^iKWfjLi
tviaxvo) (?? Lk)
oSwdoftai 3 + 1
dvar)Tca> 21
*tfs 2 + 3
6fJU\(OJ 2 + 2
dva.Ka.Oifa *
IrrfTSov
irapa,0idona.t
5 dvaairdo)
25 6TTl&l0dfa 2 + 1
45 trpi\dfj,iroj
dva<paivop.ai
eiTKpQjveoj 1+3
irpo(3d\\a>
dvevpiffKOj
(THXipt& 1 + 2
irponopcvoftai
dvTfTirov
fffirepa 1 + 2
irpoaSoKia
dnofpatpri
cv\a0r)s l + 3
irpoinrapxoJ
10 diro8exH ai 2+5
30 tvrovas
50 cfrpaTrjyos 2 + 8
dtronvaaau
OdpPos 2 + 1
arpaTia (?)
8iairope(a* 1 + 3
i'aaty 1 + 2
ffvyyevcia. 1 + 2
SiarrjpfQ}
KaOerjs * 2 + 3
ert'i'apTrcifaj 1+3
Siiffrrjp.1 2+1
KaOirjm 1 + 3
avv0d\\(iv 2+4
15 Siiffxvpi^ojj.at *
35 KafloTi 2 + 4
55 avvftfju (cVO ()
biodevaj
aTatf\t<u
ffvvir\rjp6<a 2 + 1
8ov\rj 2 + 1
aTa/foAov^Cu
rpavfjiarifa
tXaiwv f (?) 2 + i
KaTamirrca 1 + 2
rpax^s
fvavn f
\dcrts *
2 o tvavriov 1 + 2
40 Kpanaros 1 + 3
Total 58, of which 7 are marked * as not in LXX, and two are
marked t as being non-Classical.
20 4
Statistics and Observations
pt. in
Where no numbers are given, there is but one occurrence of the
word in Luke and one in Acts, which is the case in 30 instances
out of the 58.
There is also considerable evidence for di/arpe$o> in Luke iv. 16,
though it is not adopted by WH. *Op0pos is omitted, because
occurring also in Peric. de Adult. , Jn viii. 2.
dyaOovpytu * \ >
dyvifffjios
dyvoaaros
dyopaios *
5 dypdwaros *
alrtwfjLa * }
dKardrcpiTOs * f
dicpifieia
10 dfcpoaTrjpiov *
d/feoAuTcwy *
dAAd^vAos
d/idprypos*
15 dp.vvop.ai
dva@a0fj.6s
dva&d\\op.ai
dvaf3o\r)
20 dvatpeffis
dva/tpiais
dvavriprjTos *
dvavTtprjTus *
dpaTre^cu
25 di'ao'/ffvdfa; *
dvcrdfa f
30 di/0u7raTos
dvriKpvs *
dl/TiTTtTTTft;
dvTo<pOa\nf<u *
35 dvcartpiKos *
ditoKardaTa.ais *
diroTT\t(u *
dnopiTrrca
Words peculiar to Acts.
40 di
45
50 aar]fj.os
dffiria *
do IT os *
55
avyrj
diT\avvoj
dprffJLcav *
d<pt\OTT]S * "f 1
60
jSdats
)3ta
65
fiiouffis
0pa8vir\otu * f
70 ffvpfffvs * f
yepovaa
75
8fiai8aipovia *
t
8o~(Jio(pv\a * f
Sfvrepaws *
80
85 StayivuffKOJ
Sidyvwffis
8iateaTf\('YX l jLai *
90
SmAvo^tat
8iavffj.oij.ai
95 Stavucw
8iatr\(Q} *
8ia<f>0opd
100 SidffTrjfia
SiaTf\QJ
105
iio 8tKaffTT)S
8lOTtTrjS *
8t6pOojfj.a *
SvafVTfpiov *
8a)SfKd<pv\ov * f
. A The Synoptists and the Septuagtnt 205
elffKa\OfJi.ai *
115
1 20 eK0o\r)
(KflffC
125
eKKoXvfjtpdoj *
(K\aXfOJ
(KITTJoddJ
130 1/nrAecu*
(KirXrjpoca
(Kff&fa (?) *
135
c \evffts *
I 40 fp.fjtaivofj.ai * f
145 CI'TOTTtOS *
150 eo\e0pfvofj,ai
,*
155 tiraKpod.op.ai *
CTrai/cfytf es *
ZvavXis
1 6O
kiffKftva
m5rjfjica *
165 iT
CTTtl'Ota
170
(iricrfyaXrjs
(iriTpoirfj
175 ewKpavrjs
taOrjffis
(vOvopo/jitaj *
I So fu^y^os
tvnopfofjiai
eviropia
fvpafcv\wv * f
185
190
195
200 KapoioyvwffTrjs * f
Kapirotpopos
Karabifer]
a> f
205 /caraAotTros
Karavvoaofj.ai -\
2IO
Karafpepoj
2 1 5 aTt'ScyAos * f 1
Kare(pi<TTT)fu *
K\ivdpu
22O KO\VfA(3da}*
KoXwvia * f
KTrjTOJp *
225 Aa/tTt^cu*
Xafj-irpoTiys
\dffKca *
230
A<>7tos *
Xvp.aivop.ai
\vrpcarrjs "f"
235
^wayta *
fjiaOrjTpia *
fMfcpoOvnoos * f
fjiavia
240
^a(TTtfey
yL*7aAro?
pear) fj.fi pia
245 fj.eTa/3d\\ofjai
250
255
* f
vavK\jjpos *
vavs
veoiKopos *
vrjoiov *
oSotrropecu *
206
Statistics and Observations
pt. in
260
OlKoSofJtOS
UKVCQ)
6\oK\t]pia ^
265 dirrdvofJLCu f
dpyvtd *
opoOcffla * t
ovpavoOfv
iravrri
270 dx^-OTiWcw* f
iraOrjros *
iravoiKti
275
napaivea)
irapa\yoftat *
TrapavofJ-fca
280 irapairXfca*
napdffr) fjios
trapareivo}
irapa.Tvyx& vo} *
irapaxf ifJ-CLffia *
285 irapcvoxX(O)
*
*
290
irarpwos
irepairepca (?) *
IffpiaffTpCUTTCl} *j-
irepiKparr)* f
295
300 TrXoos
ITVIKTOS *
irvofj
iro\ndpx^ * "t*
irop<pvp6ir(u\is * *f*
305 irpijvrjs
\Acy*t
irpOKrjpvffcrca *
trpoopdoi
irpoaairetXfOfjiai
310
TTpOfffCKU * "\"
vpofff\r]p6ofjUii *
irpoa\a.\ecu
315 rr/)o(rirjj'os * f
irpoffirrjyvvfjii *
trpoff(p6.TWs
irpoffunoXr) fJ.iTTT)s *
320 TTporpfirofjiat
TT/wpa *
irpwToaTaTTjs
325 TrpujTcas *
irvOoiv *
pa@8ovx<>s *
paSiovpyrjfia *
330 paSiovpyta *
priTWp *
(raws
(Tf $a(TT05 *
335 aifcdpios * f
OlfJLlKlvOlOV *
(rtTtW
340 aterjvoiroios * f
ffKQ}\r)K6l3pa}TOS *
airfpfj.o\6yos *
345 arepeoo}
crvvaOpoifa
avvaXi^Ofiai *
350 (TwaAXao-o-cu *
avvfiririOffJiai
ffVVKlVfQ} *
355 avvOpvnrca * f
ffWHarafiaivoj
360
365 <rw7ru/cy
avvTpo<pos
ovvofJuXtca *
* :
erw/cu/ioo-ia
37O 0V(TTpO(f>TJ
a<pdyiov
375
a<pv8pov * f
TfKfJ.rjptOV
TtffaapaKovTatTrjs *
380
rpifria *
rpiareyos *
385 TpOTTOfpOpfOJ f
^s*t
VTTtpWOV
vjrrjpeTfco
390 virof3d\\Q}
VTtotyvVVjJLl
virovofQJ
395
(pavTaoia.
(pdais
<pi\6ao<(>os
400 (pi\o<t>povoas
fypvyavov
APPX.A The Synoptists and the Septuagint 207
X&pos * f
405
wvtofj.cu
410
Total 413, of which 154 are marked * as not in LXX and 66 are
marked t as non-Classical.
If 'Aa-idpxrjs *, 'EAAjji/iorrjs * t, Taftcpvi] * f, 4>opoi/ * f were placed in
this list instead of being excluded as proper names, and if Karfjyopos
were included notwithstanding the occurrence of Karfjywp in Rev
xii. 10, the number would be raised from 413 to 418.
There is also good authority for avayvmpL^ai, though it is not in
WH's text.
The use of Classical and non-Classical words by the Synoptisls.
After drawing up the above lists with reference to the LXX,
I thought that it might be convenient to show on the same pages
the relative proportions of Classical and non-Classical words among'
the words peculiar to each Synoptist. So, with Prof. Geden's kind
permission, I have transferred to those pages the mark t, which in
Moulton and Geden's Concordance denotes words ' not in Classical
Greek use', which phrase is explained in their preface (p. x) as
meaning that ' the word in question does not occur in Greek writers
earlier than the Christian era '.
Such words are found to occur in the following proportions
among the words peculiar to the Synoptists respectively :
In Mark, they are 19 out of 71 words peculiar to him, i.e. very
slightly more than one-fourth.
In Matthew, they are 18 out of 112 words peculiar to him, i.e.
rather more than one-seventh.
In Luke, they are 38 out of 261 words peculiar to his Gospel,
i. e. almost exactly one-seventh.
And if we add to the words peculiar to Luke's Gospel those
which are also found there and in Acts, the non-Classical words
amount to 40 out of 319, i.e. almost exactly one-eighth.
In Acts, they are 66 out of 413, or rather less than one-sixth.
It thus appears that the non-Classical words (like the non-
Septuagintal words) occur with considerably more frequency in
the special vocabulary of St. Mark than in those of the other
Synoptists.
208 Statistics and Observations Pt. in
APPENDIX B TO PART III
(seep. 143)
THE ALTERATIONS AND SMALL ADDITIONS IN WHICH
MATTHEW AND LUKE AGREE AGAINST MARK
AMONG the 183 sections into which Tischendorf divides his
Synopsis Evangelica, there are 68 * which afford opportunities for
comparing parallel portions of all three Synoptic Gospels.
But of these 68 there are 10 (viz. 14, 15, 17, 47,' 50, 56, 75,
in, 134, 139) in which a considerable amount of matter, chiefly
consisting of discourse, is found in Matthew and Luke, while it is
absent from Mark. It seems reasonable, therefore, to suppose that
in these sections, or in most of them (for perhaps 14 and 15 and
possibly 17 must be otherwise accounted for 3 ), the editors of
Matthew and Luke turned to the Matthaean Logia, or some other
such document (Q), in search of additional matter which should
contain more of the teaching of Jesus than was supplied by Mark. 4
There remain 58 of Tischendorf s sections which can be almost
entirely accounted for by a free use of the Marcan source, with
occasionally some short insertions made by Matthew and Luke
independently of one another. These sections may be thus sub-
divided into three classes :
1 There would have been 69, if, in 132, Lk x. 25-7 had been printed
opposite to Mk xii. 28-34 5 Mt xxu '- 34 ~4<>, as it is in Synopttcon, p. 88.
2 With 47, cf. 91 : Tischendorfs arrangement is here less clear and
satisfactory than usual. See Synopticon, pp. 17, 18.
3 It may be that these sections, or at any rate 14, 15, were abbre-
viated by a subsequent editor of Mark (see p. 152) because they were prior
to the public ministry of Jesus, with which this Gospel is mainly con-
cerned, j'
4 There may probably have been a similar reference to Q when 49,
128, 138 were being drawn up, though we happen to have in them no im-
portant cases of agreement between Matthew and Luke. For Mt xxi.
44 is probably not genuine.
. B Agreements of Matthew and Luke 209
a. There are 7 sections (viz. 25, 29, 33, 142, 147, 148, 159)
in which there is no instance of Matthew and Luke agreeing
against Mark.
b. There are 30 other sections (viz. 16, 35, 36, 38, 39, 40,
48, 51, 5 2 73, 109, iM> n6, 118, 128, 130, 131, 133, 138, 143,
144, 145, 146, 153, 157, 161, 162, 163, 164, 166) in which slight
verbal agreements of Matthew and Luke against Mark are not
infrequent. I have noted about zoo 1 of them (including some
which extend only to portions of words, such as Mt xx. 30
Lk xviii. 37 irape'pxerat ; and Mt xxvi. 2O dre/mro, Lk XX. 14
But they can all be explained, with more or less probability, by one
of three causes. Either (a) they consist of words so ordinary and
colourless and so nearly synonymous with Mark's that the use of
them may be merely accidental (e. g. Mt xxii. 27 ; Lk xx. 32 uorfpop 2
against Mk xii. 22 eo-xarov; Mt xxii. 45; Lk xx. 44 KnXd against
Mk xii. 37 At'y 6 ')* or (&) tnev are sucn obvious amplifications or
explanations as it would be natural for any writers to introduce
(e.g. the additions of ftiavpao-av in Mt viii. 27; Lk viii. 25; of
fls TOV OIKOV avrov in Mt ix. 7 ; Lk v. 26 ; of KO! ea-duiv in Mt xii. i,
and KOI fja-Qiov in Lk vi. i ; of povois in Mt xii. 4 and povovs in Lk vi. 4 ;
of ISovTcs in Mt xxi. 38 ; Lk xx. 14) ; or (y) they are changes to a
more smooth and usual Hellenistic vocabulary and style from the
comparative harshness and ' unusualness ' of Mark. This last is
probably the account to be given of the great majority of these
agreements, as may be seen by an examination of pages 131 ff. of
this book. It need only be pointed out here that the most numer-
ous, though of course the most unimportant, of such identities are
caused by the strong preference of Mark for the historic present
(p. 143), and for nal rather than 8e (p. 150), and that not a few
result from his sparing use of conjunctions, &c. (p. 137).
c. There remain 21 sections (viz. 37, 49, 53, 58, 59, 70, 71,
72, 115, 122, 124, 126, 154, 155, 156, 165, 167, 169, 171, 172,
173). In these I have noted about 118 * agreements of Matthew
and Luke against Mark which are of the same kinds as those
referred to in the preceding paragraph (<5), and for which the
three explanations there suggested (a, /3, y) would be adequate,
at any rate if there were no other such agreements to be con-
1 Only approximate numbers are given, because of various readings.
2 This word is characteristic of Matthew (p. 8).
210 Statistics and Observations Pt.ni
sidered with them. But there are others: in these sections there
are certain other alterations from, and additions to, the Marcan
narrative, as to which it seems almost impossible that Matthew
and Luke could have accidentally concurred in making them. In
these cases at least the changes seem to be owing to some influence,
direct or indirect, of a common source, and not to the independent
judgement of two compilers. I append a list of the instances which
to me convey this impression most forcibly, adding references to
the pages of Synopticon, in which they can most easily be examined,
as well as to Tischendorf s sections. 1
Tisch. Synop-
Syn. Ev. ticon,
Page.
1. Mt ix. 17 lxrrot : Lk v. 37 (KxvOrjfffTcu, whereas in
Mk ii. 22 the verb air6\\vT<u applies to the wine as
well as to the wine-skins . .... . . 37 12
2. Mt xiii. ii ; Lk viii. 10 vfuv SeSorcu yvuvai TO, fjLvffTTjpia,
instead of the more difficult expression in Mk iv. ii
vp.iv TO fj.varrjpiov 845orai 49 21
3. Mt ix. 20 ; Lk viii. 44 rov KpaffireSov added . . . 53 31
4. Mt xiv. i ; Lk ix. 7 6 Tfrpadpxns used of Herod instead
of 0affi\evs as in Mk vi. 14, though he is called 0a<n-
Xcvs in Mt xiv. 9 58 37
5. Mt xiv. 13 KOL dfcovaavres ol ox^oi ^Ko\ovOjjffav avrS> :
Lk ix. II of 8e o^A.ot yvovres TjKoXovOrjaav avr> (cf.
also the mention of healing in Mt(v. 14) and Lk only) 59 40
6. Mt xvi. 16 ; Lk ix. 20, the use of rov 0eot), though not
quite in the same connexion . . . . . 70 53
7. Mt xvii. 5 6Tt avrov \a\ovvros : Lk ix. 34 ravra 5e avrov
Ae-yoi/ros . ........ 71 57
- 8. Mt xvii. 17 ; Lk ix. 41 Kal Sifarpa^fjifvr} added (cf.
Deut xxxii. 5) 72 60
9. Mt xix. 29 ; Lk xviii. 30 iro\\an\aaiova, instead of
(KaTovrarrXaffiova Mk x. 30 115 71
10. Mt xxi. 17 r)v\iaer) : Lk xxi. 37 r)v\i&TO (but the words
are not in quite the same position) .... 124 70
11. Mt xxi. 23 SiSdffKovri : Lk xx. i SiSda/eovTos, where
Mark has no mention of teaching .... 126 81
12. Mt xxvi. 50 ; Lk xxii. 48, the fact that Jesus then
spoke to Judas, though the words recorded are not
the same in the two Gospels 154 IID
1 There is a full discussion of this list in Prof. Burkitt's Gospel History, &c.,
pp. 42-58, and a reference to it by Mr. C. H. Turner in J. T. S., x. 174 ff.
(Jan. 1909), to which I would call attention. I quite agree that textual
criticism has diminished, and is likely to diminish further, from the force of
several of the instances ; and, on the other hand, I have not been able to
find any others that seem worth adding to them (1909).
. B Agreements of Matthew and Luke 211
Tisch Synop-
Syn. Ev. ticon.
Page.
13. Mt xxvi. 75 ; Lk xxii. 62 /cat cfeXOuv f<a HifXavaev -ninptas,
where Mk xiv. 72 has imfiaXuv K\atev. But WH
bracket the words in Luke, where they are omitted
by some important Latin authorities .... 155 115
14. Mt xxvi. 68; Lk xxii. 64 rts kanv 6 iraiffas ffe ; . . 156 114
15. Mt xxvii. 40 el vios el . . . : Lk xxiii. 35 d OVTOS tff.nv . . . ,
where Mark has not this conditional form of sen-
tence : observe also rov Ofov, though in somewhat
different connexions, as was the case above in Mt
xvi. 16 ; Lk ix. 20 165 121
16. Mt xxvii. 54 rcL ywofteva : Lk xxiii. 47 TO yevopevov . 167 123
17. Mt xxvii. 59; Lk xxiii. 53 tvfTv\tcv auro, where Mk
xv. 46 has avrbv evci\jjffev 169 124
18. Mt xxviii. i m<p(affKovar) : Lk xxiii. 54
169 124
a very rare word, 1 used somewhat differently in
these two nearly parallel passages '
19. Mt xxviii. 3 us darpairf] : Lk xxiv. 4 li/ tod^n darpa- ( 171 ) ^
TTTOVO-fl ( J 7 2 1
20. Mt xxviii. 8 ZSpanov dirayy(T\ai ro?s fJta.6rira.LS avrov :
Lk xxiv. 9 dirrjyyei\av ravra TT&VTO. TOIS ei/Sftca /eal
Traffiv TOIS \oinoTs 173 126
[21. There is another striking instance if, following
Western authorities (but not Syr sin ") with Tisch and
WH mg, we omit BrjO<payr) in Mk xi. i and read it
only in Mt xxi. i and Lk xix. 29] .... 122 76
If this evidence is regarded as sufficient to prove that in at least
20 sections and it is reasonable to suspect in others also a
common source has supplied Matthew and Luke with variations
from and additions to the Marcan narrative which apparently forms
the basis of these 58 sections, then the difficult question arises,
What was the nature of this source? (i) Was it an Ur-Marcust
But other considerations (pp. 1151!.) have shown the general unlikeli-
hood of this hypothesis ; and Nos. i, 2, 14 in the foregoing list are
alterations of an explanatory kind which seem far more likely to
have been inserted than to have been dropped by a later editor.
(2) Or was there an early non-Marcan document to which the
compilers of the first and third Gospels were able to refer not
only in those 10 sections as to which we recognized the use
of the Logia or some such document, but also in some or all of
the 58 sections which consist mainly of narrative ? (3) Or was
one of these compilers able to consult the work of the other, in
1 But used twice in the l Gospel of Peter' (chaps. 2 and 9).
P %
212 Statistics and Observations Pt. in
a more or less complete state ? Neither of these two suggestions
is impossible ; but both of them are rendered improbable by the
very small bulk of the additions and alterations, compared with
the whole amount of the matter of these sections. If written
sources of any kind, besides the Marcan one, were available for one
or both of these compilers, would they have used them so very
sparingly ? (4) It seems, therefore, less unlikely that these supple-
ments and modifications, so far as they imply a common source,
were due to one or other of the two following causes : (a) Some
of them, as I suggested in my first edition as to all of them,
may have been first made in one of the two later Gospels, and
then carried across (whether intentionally x or unconsciously) to the
other, either by copyists to whom they were familiar, or more
probably in the course of that oral transmission which, as we have
seen (pp. 67, 78), is almost required by other phenomena of the
Gospels. (3) But it appears to me now that others of them, and
perhaps the majority, may be best accounted for by Dr. Sanday's
suggestion that they are due to the use by Matthew and Luke of
' a recension of the text of Mark different from that from which all
the extant MSS. of the Gospel are derived '. 2
ADDITIONAL NOTES TO PART III.
Additional Note to the quotation from Dr. A. B. Bruce (p. 116).
The growth of reverential feeling in narrators may be illustrated
by the increasing use of Kvpie, as shown in the following table of the
titles by which Jesus is addressed in the Gospels :
Mk Mt Lk Jn
StSdoviraXe . . . , . . 10 6 n a 3
trnffTara . . . . . ... ... 6
Kvpic . ..... i* 19 i6 5 28
3 2 ... 8
I ... ... I
vie Aava'5 2 4 2
1 Compare what was suggested as to Mark's Gospel on p. 153, and the
remarks of Drs. Sanday and Blass and Armitage Robinson there referred to
in note.
z This view will be found stated and defended in Dr. Sanday's own Essay
in the forthcoming Studies in the Synoptic Problem edited by him, to which
I have already referred on p. 108.
3 Only as the interpretation of pa&flfi and paf30owei.
* viz. vii. 28 (there is also the purely Western reading Kvpic pa&fid instead of
pap&ovvfi in x. 51).
5 Not including xix. 25 ; nor ix. 59, where there is probably an assimilation
to Mt viii. 21.
Pt. in Additional Notes 213
Additional Note on the Historic Present in the Septuagint (p. 143).
The numbers of the occurrences of the historic present seem to
be as follows 1 (there being none in the books not named) : Gen
9, Ex 24 (always either Xtyeiv 17, or 6pdv 7), Numb 7 (being Xryeii/
5, 6pav 1, KaOopav l), Josh 1, Judg 2 (?), Ruth 1 (?), i Kingdoms
151, 2 Kingdoms 32, 3 Kingdoms 47, 4 Kingdoms 2, i Chro 2,
i Esdr 3, 2 Esdr 8 (being 3 in our Ezra and 5 in our Neh),
Job 25 (22 being A'y in the introductions to the dramatic speeches,
and 3 only in the opening and concluding narratives), Esther 2,
Tobit 10 (8 of them in the N text only), Daniel 1 (i. e. in LXX :
there are 5 in Theod), Bel 1, i Mace 2, 2 Mace 1, 3 Mace 3, 4 Mace
3. Total in LXX, 337.
As to these numbers the following points deserve notice :
(1) Out of the total 337, 232 of the instances occur in the four
books of Kingdoms, leaving only 105 for the whole of the rest of
the LXX. Of these 25 are in Job, 24 in the historical parts of
Exodus (chiefly in chaps, ii, x, and xxxii), and in no other case is
the number ten exceeded or even reached except by a combination
of two versions of Tobit.
(2) Out of the 232 instances in the four books of Kingdoms, the
First Book (= i Samuel) contains very nearly two-thirds, viz. 151,
which happens to be exactly the same number as Mark contains.
But then i Kingdoms exceeds Mark in length by about one-third,
as may be seen by comparing the two books in the pages of any
English Bible e.g. in the R. V. minion 8vo 1885, in which i Sam
occupies 26 pages, and Mark (without the Appendix) about 15 pages
and a half. Consequently it appears that the historic presents are
scattered considerably more thickly over the pages of the latter than
of the former, the average to a page being in i Sam about 6 and
in Mark between 9 and 10.
(3) Mr. Thackeray (/. T. S., viii. 262 ff., and Gram. o/O. T. in
Gk.^ i. 10) shows in a very interesting way that the Books of King-
doms seem to have been divided into five parts, which may have been
1 I give these numbers with confidence in their approximate correctness,
because I found that my independent count agreed very nearly with the
results that had been reached by Mr. H. St. J. Thackeray. I owe to him the
numbers in 3 and 4 Mace and in the N text of Tobit, which I had not
examined for myself; and I have been enabled by seeing his lists to make
some other additions and corrections in my own.
Additional Notes Pt. in
rendered into Greek by four distinct translators, of whom the first
undertook i Ki, the second 2 Ki i.i-xi. i, the third 3 Ki ii. i2-xxi.
43, and the fourth (who was considerably the latest in date) 2 Ki
xi. 2-3 Ki ii. 1 1 and 3 Ki xxii with 4 Ki. One of the most striking
differences between the work of these four translators appears in
their use of the historic present, the first showing (as we have seen)
151 instances of it, the second 28, the third 47, but the fourth only
4 and 2 in the two parts of his work. A comparison of the respec-
tive lengths of their departments of work in the pages of the aforesaid
English Bible shows that ihe first translator has an average of about
6 historic presents to a page, the second an average of nearly 4 and
the third of rather more than 2, while the fourth translator has the
usage in a few sporadic instances only, which we find also to be the
case in Chronicles, Esdras, and other late historical books.
On the whole, two results emerge :
i. Taking into account the vastly larger amount l of historical
matter in the O. T. and Apocrypha than in the N. T., it is clear that
the Greek historic present was used much more freely by the writers
of the latter than by the translators and (in a few cases) authors of
the former, the numbers being in the LXX 377, and in the N. T.
408 without Matthew's and Luke's parables, or 428 including
them.
ii. In proportion to the comparative length of their works, no
one of the many translators or writers of the LXX equals Mark in
the frequency of this usage, though the translator of i Kingdoms is
not very far distant from him. On the whole, then, it remains
a notable characteristic of Mark, though not so exclusively as was
claimed in the first edition of this book.
Additional Note on the Shortening of Narratives in Matthew (p. 160).
This tendency of the First Evangelist may perhaps throw light
upon what has been well described as his ' way of reduplicating, so
to speak, the personages of one narrative in order to make up for
the omission of another. . . . He is silent as to the healing of the
demoniac at Capernaum [Mk i. 21-8, Lk iv. 31-7], but instead
of this he gives us [viii. 28] two Gadarene demoniacs, at the same
time modifying the language in which he describes this latter incident
1 On a rather rough estimate, the proportion seems to be about four
to one.
pt. in Additional Notes 215
after the pattern of the former ; * in like manner he speaks of the
healing of two blind men at Jericho [xx. 30], but only because he
had passed over the healing of the blind man at Bethsaida [Mkviii.
22-6]/ 2 In the cases of each of these pairs of similar miracles, it
is natural to suppose that the two would have been related together
in the oral teaching of the Evangelist, or of other teachers whose pro-
cedure he followed, and that the one of the two which seemed
the less striking and important would gradually have dropped
into the background. Thus the way would have been prepared
for that conflation, instead of repetition, of the two, which certainly
has the effect of shortening narrative, which seems to have an
object with Matthew. If some such explanation is not accepted,
the duplications must be left as quite unaccountable.
1 Doubtless the reference is to the introduction in Mt viii. 29 of the
question 'Art thou come to . . . ' which occurs in Mk i. 24 and Lk iv. 34,
but not in Mk v. 7 or Lk viii. 28.
2 Sanday, The Gospels in the Second Century, p. 154.
CONCLUDING SUMMARY
IT was explained in the Preface that this book had the
'limited and merely preparatory' purpose of bringing
together * a collection of materials ', and that it was therefore
the endeavour of the writer to keep, as far as possible, his
own opinions in the background, and to let the facts speak
for themselves. It will be no serious departure from this
method if, in these concluding pages, he not only recapitu-
lates a few of the principal matters which have been dealt
with, but indicates, briefly and slightly, the directions in
which they have seemed to point.
A.
Part I was devoted to the ' words and phrases character-
istic of each Evangelist ; and we saw that such expressions
occur not only in the ' peculiar ' parts, but also, though less
abundantly, in the ' common ' parts of each Gospel. Thus
it appears that these writers, even when they were com-
pilers as Matthew and Luke evidently were to a large
extent allowed themselves to deal freely with their
materials, being more careful to preserve the substance than
the exact words (cf. also p. 113). And the same thing may
be inferred from several of the Doublets (pp. 80 ff.), from the
use of certain recurring formulas (pp. 168 ff.), and from the
far greater similarity of Luke's language, than that of
Matthew or Mark, to the language not only of Acts, but of
the Pauline Epistles and Hebrews (pp. 189 ff. : cf. also p. 196).
B.
i. When endeavouring in Part II to find indications of
sources, we saw in Section I many identities in language
between the different Gospels, which were so close and
Concluding Summary 217
sometimes so prolonged as to suggest very strongly the
use of written Greek documents. And the hypotheses, to
be referred to below, of the Logia and the Marcan memoirs
as sources, fall in with this suggestion.
2. But on the other hand we found in Sections II and
III still more distinct traces of oral transmission, both in
the different uses made of the same words, and in the trans-
positions of words and sentences.
3. It seems then all but necessary to allow for the
influence of both these modes of transmission, even though
we may be unable to apportion the amount of influence
which is to be ascribed to each, or to explain how they accom-
panied or succeeded one another. To make such appor-
tionment or explanation was not even attempted in the first
edition; but in the second I would express my strong
opinion that at least the Second and Third Evangelists had
provided themselves with written documents as their main
sources, but that they often omitted to refer closely to
them, partly because of the physical difficulties which there
must then have been in consulting MSS., 1 and partly
because of the oral knowledge of the life and sayings of
Jesus Christ which they had previously acquired as learners
and used as teachers, and upon which therefore it would be
natural for them to fall back very frequently.
C.
The Doublets treated in Part II, Section IV, are important
in more respects than one ; but chiefly because several of
them suggest the use in Matthew and Luke 2 of two sources,
1 See on this point Dr. Sanday in the forthcoming Studies in the Synoptic
Problem.
2 The fact that only one Doublet, and that a not very distinct one (see
p. 99), can be noted in Mark, is, so far as it gees, an argument
against the use in that Gospel of the Logia (or any other second source
besides the Petrine memoirs). That Mark did use the Logia was argued
very fully but as it seems to me not at all conclusively by Titius in
Theologische Studien Herrn Prof. Dr. Bernhard Weiss sit seinem 70, Geburtstage
dargebracht (Gottingen, 1897), pp. 284 ff.
218 Concluding Summary
which it seems not unreasonable to identify with the
Petrine memoirs written by Mark, and the Logia composed
by Matthew, according to the well-known testimony of
Papias. 1 The chief difficulty in the way of this identifica-
tion consists in the absence of distinct traces of the
independent translations of the Logia to which Papias
refers (see, on the contrary, p. 54), but there is no reason-
why the compilers of the first and third Gospels should not
have used the same translation. It is however safer, as well
as more usual now, to refer to the second source merely as Q.
D.
In Part III it was shown that of the Synoptic Gospels
Mark shows the smallest (if any) traces (pp. 117 ff.), and
Matthew shows the most decided traces (see especially
pp. 163 ff.) of adaptation for the purposes of catechetical
or other teaching, Luke holding an intermediate position
in this respect, but nearer to Matthew than to Mark.
This seems to correspond remarkably to the degree of
familiarity with the language of the three Gospels respec-
tively which appears to have existed among Christians in
the following decades, so far as we can judge from the
references to the evangelical history in the writings of the
sub-apostolic age and in Justin. 2 Thus the Gospels which
were most used bear most traces of adaptation for use.
E.
Difficult questions are suggested by the agreements of
Matthew and Luke against Mark, even in places where they
are evidently using his narrative as a Grundschrift. In
the pages about Mark in Part III, which have just been
1 See p. xiv above.
2 Opinions will differ as to some particular instances, but certainly this
is the general impression conveyed by a careful examination of the
references collected in the Indices to Lightfoot's Apostolic Fathers and Otto's
Justin Martyr.
Concluding Summary 219
referred to, reasons have been suggested for many omissions
and some alterations which would produce this result.
Other alterations and some small additions, which cannot
be accounted for in the same way, are dealt with in
Appendix B (p. 308), and I have tried to show that, though
they cannot all have arisen quite independently, they are not
sufficient to necessitate the hypothesis that either Matthew
or Luke had seen the other's Gospel.
F.
The close correspondence of the phraseology of St. Luke's
Gospel with that of the ' We '-Sections of the Acts (see
pp. 183 ff., referring to the tables on pp. 16 ff.) seems to me
so important in its bearing on the date of that Gospel, and
inferentially of the other two, that I call attention to it
again here.
In these inferences and suggestions there is hardly
anything which has not been put forward often before ;
but if the grounds on which they rest have been made
more distinct and tangible, so that they have thus lost
something of their conjectural or hypothetical character,
a little progress will have been made enough perhaps to
encourage the hope of more progress in the study of
the Synoptic Problem.
INDEX
Abbott, Dr. E. A., viii, xiii, 14,
24, 31, 35> 70, 117, 131, 134,
144, 150, 151, 152.
Acts : its linguistic relations with
Luke, 1 74 if. ; with Paul, 1 89 ff. ;
with Hebrews, 192 f. ; with
LXX, 203 ff. ; the two parts of
it, 181.
Additions of minor kinds to the
narrative in Mark, 127.
Agreements of Matthew and Luke
against Mark, 208 ff.
Allen, Archdeacon W. C, 52, 65,
84, 118, 120, 131, 137, 142, 167.
Anacoluthon in Mark, 135.
Apostles, apparent disparage-
ments of, in Mark, 121 f.
Aramaic phrases in Mark, 130.
Asyndeton in Mark, 137.
Bacon, Prof. B. W., 66, 83, loo,
162.
Badham's Formation of the
Gospels, 80.
Blass, 31,48, 56, 133,153.
Briggs, Dr. C. A., 163.
Bruce, Dr. A. B., 76, 116, 120,
121.
Burkitt, Prof., 54, 154, 183, 186,
210.
Burton, Prof. E. De W., 67, 162.
Caesar, Julius, on the Druids, 54.
Carpenter and Harford-Bat-
tersby's Hexateuch, 2, 113.
Cary, G. L., 68.
Characteristic words and phrases
of the three Synoptists, 4 ff., 184.
Charles, Dr. R. H., 116, 164.
Chase, Bishop, 181.
Classical and non-classical words,
135, 207.
Compilation in Mark, suggested
signs of, 116.
Compilation of discourses in Mat-
thew, 161 ff.
Compound verbs, 1 74 f.
'Context-supplements' in Mark,
125 f.
Dalman, 32, 38, 52.
Davidson, Dr. S., 174, 183.
Deissmann, 134.
Dictation a cause of errors, 67.
Different applications of the same
words, 67 ff.
Diminutives in Mark, 132.
Documents, use of written, 54,
107.
Double negatives in Mark, 142.
Doublets, 80 ff.
Driver, Dr., 54, 113.
Drummond, Dr. J., 70.
Duplicate expressions in Mark,
139 ff.
Be and *al in Mark, 150.
Edersheim, Dr., 163, 167.
Enoch, Book of, 164.
eXe-yey, eAryoi/, 12, 52.
cv&W, cvOvs, 12, 141.
Field, Dr. F., 71, 122, 123.
Fivefold divisions of books, 164.
' Formulas/ repetitions and trans-
ferences of, 168 ff.
Four Gospels, sayings contained
in them all, 88.
Freedom used by compilers, 26,
H3> 173-
Geden, Prof., 54, 207.
Gore, Bishop, 158.
Gould, Prof., 46, 76, 1 1 8.
Harnack, 49, 50, 78, no, 112,
113, 181, 183.
' He that hath ears/ c., 106.
Hebraisms in Luke, 198.
Hebrews, Epistle to, 192 f.
Hershon's Talmudic Miscellany,
167.
222
Index
Historic present, 143 ff., 213.
Hobart, Dr., 189.
Hobson, A. A., on Tatian, 67, 80,
162.
Hort, Dr., 16.
Imperfect tense rare in Matthew,
9 5 1 -
Inge, Prof. W. R., 168.
Irenaeus, 116, 127, 164.
Idov, 14, 141, 144.
^/i and 'ifpoo-oXv/ia, 19.
Jason of Cyrene, his history in
five books, 164.
'Jews, the,' the occurrences of
this title, 152.
John, Gospel of, 88, 138, 143, 144,
151,152,167.
Josephus, 54, 144.
Jiilicher, 84, HI, 114, 131, 154.
Justin Martyr, use of the Gospels
by, 218.
Knowling, Dr., 181, 185, 188.
KOI and 8e in Mark, 150.
Koivfi Greek, 135, 143.
xvpie, 212.
Lake, Prof. K., 39, 99, 142.
Latinisms in Mark, 132.
Lightfoot, Dr. John, 61.
Lightfoot, Bp. Joseph B., xiii.
Logia ascribed to Matthew, 107.
And see ' Q '.
Lord's Prayer in Matthew, 32, 166.
Luke, Gospel of: Preface to,
vii ; characteristic words and
phrases, 15 ff., 27 ff. ; Doublets,
99 ; linguistic relations with
Acts, I74ff. ; with the <We'-
Sections of Acts, 182 fif. ; with
Pauline Epistles, iScjff. ; with
Hebrews, 192 f. ; with LXX,
198, 201 ff. ; smaller additions,
194 ff. ; words peculiar to it,
201.
Maccabees, Second Book of, 164.
Maccabees, Fourth Book of, 52.
Maclean, Bishop, 131.
Mark, Gospel of: characteristic
words and phrases, 10 ff. ;
Doublet, 99 ; use of it as a
Grundschrift , 114, 218 ; various
statistics and observations upon
it, H4ff. ; words peculiar to it,
200.
Matthew, Gospel of: character-
istic words and phrases, 3 ff. ;
Doublets, 82 ; the quotations in
it, 1 54 ; other statistics and ob-
servations upon it, I58ff. ; words
peculiar to it, 199.
Max Miiller, on memory in the
East, 54.
Memory highly trained in Judaea,
54-
Menzies, Dr. A., 84.
Mishnah, numerical arrangements
in, 1 66.
Moffatt, Dr. James, 67.
Moulton, Dr. J. H., 8, 14, 31, 38,
40, 48, 52, 56, 59, 65, 71, 131,
132, 133, 144, 175-
Moulton, R. G., 164.
Moulton (W. F.) and Geden's
Concordance^ xiv, 207.
Nestle, 2, 129.
Numerical arrangements in Mat-
thew, 163 ff.
Optative mood, 35, 38, 46, 53.
Oral transmission, indications of,
67, 77, 173, 217-
Overbeck on Acts, 174, 183.
Oxyrhynchus, Sayings of Jesus
found at, 70, 101.
ovpavos and ovpapoi, $2.
Paley on 'tentative miracles',
117.
Papias, xiiif., 54, 115, 126, 164,
218.
Papyri, 59, 6 1, 144.
Parables in 'Q', 112.
Passion-narrative, not referred to
in 'Q', H2.
Pauline Epistles, 189 ff., 192.
Pauline expressions in Luke, 196.
' Peter, Gospel of,' 43, 211.
Phrynichus, 132, 134.
Pirqe A both) 164, l66f.
Pleonastic way of writing in Mark,
141.
Plummer, Dr. A., viii, 38, 43, 76,
142, 198.
Plummer, C., 67.
Polycarp, 91, 127.
Index
223
Proper names in Mark, 131.
Prophecies applied by Matthew,
J 57.
Psalms, five books of, 163 f.
irwpovv, Trtopoxriy, 121.
TTTQJ/Lta, 124.
' Q ', the supposed document so
designated, 81, 107 ff.
Quotations from Old Testament in
Matthew, 1 54 ff.
Ramsay, Sir W. M., 113.
Robinson, Dean J. Armitage, 107,
121, 131, 132, 153, 159.
Rude, harsh, &c., words in Mark,
131 ff.
Rushbrooke's Synopticon, 65, 81.
Salmon, Dr. G., 93, 120.
Sanday, Dr., vi, viii, 153, 212,
215, 217.
Schiller-Szinessy, 54.
Schmiedel, 70, 116, 183.
Schiirer, 54, 130.
Scott, E. F., 167.
Scott-Moncrieff, C. E., 116.
Septuagint, 52, 135, 143, 151,
198 ff., 213.
Sermons on the Mount and Level
Place, 64, 112.
Shortenings of narrative in Mat-
thew, 158 ff., 214.
Speaker's Commentary ', 120, 125.
Stanton, Dr. V. H., 112.
Statistics, danger in using, vi f.
Studies in the Synoptic Problem,
80, 108, 212, 217.
Sub-apostolic age, use of the
Gospels in, 218.
Swete, Dr., 46, 61, 76, 84, 132,
133, 154, 156, 158.
Tatian's Diatessaron, 67, 80, 162.
Thackeray, H. St. J., 52, 213.
Theophilus, 183.
Tischendorf's Synopsis Evan-
gelica, 8 1.
Titius, 217.
Titles by which Jesus is addressed,
212.
Transpositions of words and sen-
tences, 77 ff.
Turner, C. H., 210.
Turpie's The Old Testament in
the New, 156.
Ur-Marcus, hypothesis of an,
115, 152, 211.
' We'-Sections of Acts, i82ff., 219.
Weiss, Bernhard, 181.
Wellhausen, 112, 113.
Wendt, 1 1 6.
Westcott, Bishop, 26, 154, 194.
Westcott and Hort {Introduction
and Notes\ 46, 59, 95, 140.
Winer's Grammar (ed. W. F.
Moulton), 35, 45, 46, 48,56, 1 5-
Woods, F. H., 112, 114.
Words, number of, in the Synoptic
Gospels, 2.
Words peculiar to each Synoptist
and to Acts, 199 ff.
Wright, Dr. A., 78, 80, 84, 131,
I33> 181.
York Powell, Prof., on powers of
memory, 54.
Zeller on Acts, 174, 182 f.
THE END
OXFORD
PRINTED AT THE CLARENDON PRESS
BY HORACE HART, M.A.
PRINTER TO THE UNIVERSITY
CLAKENDON PRESS BOOKS
THEOLOGY
The Holy Scriptures, Apocrypha, etc
The Bible in English
Reprint of the Authorized Version of 1611. 4to. isss. s 3s.net.
The Authorized Version.
Complete lists of Oxford Bibles, Oxford Bibles for Teachers, Oxford Prayer
Books, Church Sets, etc, in all styles and bindings can be obtained from
any bookseller, or from Mr. Henry Frowde, Oxford University Press,
Amen Corner, London, E.G.
The Revised Version.
[The Revised Version is the joint property of the Universities of Oxford
and Cambridge.]
Edition for the Church Desk.
Folio. In buckram, with the Apocrypha, 2 2s. net. Bound in
Grained Cowhide, 2 10s.; with the Apocrypha, 3; in Turkey
Morocco, 4 4s.; with the Apocrypha, 4 16s.
Library editions, in large type (pica). Bound in cloth and greatly reduced
in price.
Royal 8vo, with large margins : with the Apocrypha, 6 vols., from 1 9s. ;
the Apocrypha only, 10s. fid. ; the other five volumes, 18s. 6d.
Demy 8vo, with the Apocrypha, 6 vols., 1 Is. ; the Apocrypha only,
7s. 6d. ; the other five volumes, 14s.
Single volume editions :
Royal 8vo, on Oxford India Paper, and in large type (pica), in Persian,
2 12s. 6d.; with the Apocrypha, in Turkey Morocco, 3 19s.
Royal 8vo, small pica type. In cloth, 10s. 6d. ; in leather bindings, from
19s. 6d.
8vo, small pica type. In cloth, 7s. 6d. ; in leather bindings, from 10s. 6d.
8vo, minion type. In cloth, 4s. ; with the Apocrypha, 6s. ; the Apocrypha
only, 3s.
16mo, ruby type. In cloth, 2s. 6d. ; with the Apocrypha, 4s. ; the
Apocrypha only, 2s. ; with the Oxford Helps, in leather, from 7s.
16mo, nonpareil type. In leather, from 3s.
16mo, pearl type. In cloth boards, from 8d. ; with Oxford Helps,
from 2s. 6d.
The Revised Version with marginal references.
8vo, in bourgeois type, from 6s. ; on Oxford India paper, bound in
leather, from 15s.
8 vo, in minion type, from 5s. ; with the Apocrypha, from 7s. 6d. ; with Oxford
Helps, from 11s. ; on Oxford India paper, bound in leather, from 14s.
16mo, in nonpareil type, in leather, from 6s. ; on Oxford India paper,
bound in leather, from 10s. 6d.
The Parallel Bible, containing the Authorized and Revised Versions in
parallel columns. Small quarto, in minion type. On ordinary paper, from
10s. 6d. ; on Oxford India paper, bound in leather, from 16s.
The Two-Version Bible, being the Authorized Version with the
differences of the Revised Version printed in the margins, so that both texts
can be read from the same page. With references and maps. Bourgeois
type. Cloth, 7s. 6d. ; leather, from 10s. 6d. ; on Oxford India paper cloth,
10s. 6d. ; leather, from 15s. ; interleaved with writing-paper, and bound in
leather, from 1 Is. With the Oxford Helps, leather, from 18s. 6d. Printed
on writing-paper with wide margins for notes, from 10s. 6d. net.
1
Elementary Helps to the Study of the Bible
Oxford Bible for Teachers, containing the texts of the Old and
New Testaments, with or without marginal references, and in either the
Authorized or Revised Versions, together with the Oxford Helps to the Bible
(see below), and 124 full-page plates.
In many styles and bindings, from 3s. to 5. A complete list can be
obtained from Mr. Henry Frowde, Amen Corner, London, E.C.
The Oxford Helps to the Study of the Bible, containing
Introductions to the several Books, the History and Antiquities of the Jews,
the Natural History of Palestine, with copious tables, concordance and
indices, and a series of maps. With 124 full-page plates.
8vo, in long primer type cloth, 5s. ; leather, from 6s. 6d.
Bvo, in nonpareil type cloth, 2s. 6d. ; leather, 3s. 6d.
16mo, in pearl type stiff covers, Is. net ; cloth, Is. 6d. ; leather, from 2s.
Bible Illustrations, being 124 full-page plates, forming an appendix to
the above. Crown 8vo, cloth, 2s. 6d.
Old Testament History narrated for the most part in the words of
the Bible. By GEORGE CARTER. With maps. Crown 8vo. 2s.
An Annotated Psalter. Arranged by J.M.THOMPSON. FcapSvo. 2s.
Dr. Stokoe's Manuals. Crown 8vo
Old Testament History for Schools. By T. H. STOKOE. Part I.
(Third edition.) From the Creation to the Settlement in Palestine. Part II.
From the Settlement to the Disruption. Part III. From the Disruption to
the Return from Captivity. Extra fcap 8vo. 2s. 6d. each, with maps.
Manual of the Four Gospels. With Maps, 3s. 6d. Or, separately,
Part I, The Gospel Narrative, 2s. ; Part II, The Gospel Teaching, 2s.
Manual of the Acts. 3s.
The Life and Letters of St. Paul. 3s. ea. Or, separately,
Part I, The Life of St. Paul, 2s. Part II, The Letters of St. Paul, 2s.
First Days and Early Letters of the Church. 3s. Or, Part I,
First Days of the Church, Is. 6d. Part II, Early Letters of the Church, 2s.
Graduated Lessons on the Old Testament. By u. z. RULE,
edited by LL. J. M. BEBB. Selected Readings from the O. T. with para-
phrases and connecting paragraphs ; with notes for teachers and pupils. For
use in lower forms, and in elementary and Sunday Schools. The text is that
of the R.V., but the book may be used with the A. V. In three volumes.
Extra fcap 8vo. Is. 6d. each in paper covers, or Is. 9d. each in cloth. Vol. I.
Creation to Death of Moses. Vol. II. Conquest of Canaan, Psalms, etc.
Vol. III. Israel and Judah, the Captivity, the Prophets.
The Gospel according to St. Mark. Ed. by A. s. WALPOLE. is.6d.
Notes On the Gospel Of St. Luke, for Junior Classes. By Miss
E. J. MOORE SMITH. Extra fcap 8vo, stiff covers. Is. 6d.
A Greek Testament Primer, being an easy grammar and reading-
book for the use of students beginning Greek. By E. MILLER. Second
edition. Extra fcap 8vo, paper, 2s. ; cloth, 3s. 6d.
History of the Bible
List of Editions of the Bible in English, by H. COTTON.
Second edition. 8vo. 8s. 6d.
RhemeS and Doway ; showing what has been done by Roman Catholics
for the diffusion of the Bible in English. By H. COTTON. 8vo. 9s.
The Part of Rheims in the Making of the English
Bible, by J. G. CARLETON, containing historical and critical introduction,
tables and analyses thereof. 8vo. 9s. 6d. net.
Bible, portion edited by W. W. SKEAT. See p. 6.
Studia Biblica et Ecclesiastica. Essays chiefly in Biblical and
Patristic criticism, and kindred subjects. 8vo.
Vol. I, 10s. 6d. Vol. II, 12s. 6d. Vol. Ill, 16s. Vol. IV, 12s. 6d.
Vol. V, complete, 16s., or, in separate parts, Part I, Life of St. Nino, by
M. and J. O. WARDROP. 3s. 6d. Part II, Texts from Mount Athos, by
K. LAKE. 3s. 6d. Part III, Place of the Peshitto Version in the Ap-
paratus Criticus of the Greek New Testament. 2s. 6d. Part IV, Baptism
and Christian Archaeology, by C. F. ROGERS. 4s. 6d.
The Gospel of Barnabas. Edited and translated from the Italian
MS. in the Imperial Library, Vienna, by LONSDALE and LAURA RAGG. 8vo,
with a facsimile. 16s. net.
The Journal of Theological Studies. Edited by J. F. BETHUNE-
BAKER and F. E. BRIGHTMAN. Published Quarterly, price 3s. 6d. net.
Annual subscription 12s. net, post free. Many of the back numbers are still
obtainable.
The Old Testament and Apocrypha
The Psalter, by RICHARD ROLLE of HAMPOLE. Edited by H. R.
BRAMLEY. With an introduction and glossary. 8vo. 1 Is.
The Parallel Psalter : being the Prayer-Book version of the Psalms
and a new version arranged on opposite pages, with an introduction and
glossaries by S. R. DRIVER. Second edition. Extra fcap 8vo. 3s. 6d. net.
The Book of Job in the Revised Version. Edited, with
introductions and brief annotations, by S. R. DRIVER. Crown 8vo.
2s. 6d. net.
The Hebrew Prophets in the Revised Version. Arranged
and annotated by F. H. WOODS and F. E. POWELL. In four vols., crown 8vo.
Vol. I (Amos, Hosea, Isaiah i-xxxix, Micah), 2s. 6d. net.
Lectures On EcclesiasteS. By G. G. BRADLEY. Second edition.
Crown 8vo. 5s. 6d.
Israel's Hope of Immortality. By C. F. BURNEY. 8vo. 2s. 6d. net.
EcclesiasticUS, translated from the Hebrew by A. E. COWLEY and
A. NEUBAUER. Crown 8vo. 2s. 6d.
3
The Place of Ecelesiasticus in Semitic Literature. An
essay by D. S. MARGOLIOUTH. Small 4to. 2s. 6d.
The Five Books of Maccabees, with notes and illustrations by
H. COTTON. 8vo. 10s. 6d.
The Book of Enoch, translated from Dillmann's Ethiopic text (emended
and revised), and edited by R. H. CHARLES. 8vo. [Out of print.]
The Book of the Secrets Of Enoch, translated from the Slavonic
by W. R. MORFILL, and edited, with introduction, notes, etc, by R. H.
CHARLES. 8vo. 7s. 6d.
History and Song of Deborah (Judges iv and V). By G. A.
COOKE. 8vo. Paper covers. Is. 6d. (Published by Mr. Frowde.)
Deuterographs. Duplicate passages in the Old Testament. Arranged
by R. B. GIRDLESTOXE. 8vo. 7s. 6d.
Astronomy in the Old Testament. By G. SCHIAPARELLI.
Authorized translation. Crown 8vo. 3s. 6d. net.
Libri Psalmorum Versio antiqua Latina, cum Paraphrasi Angio-
Saxonica. Edidit B. THORPE. 8vo. 10s. 6d.
Libri Psalmorum Versio antiqua Gallica e Cod. MS in Bibi.
Bodleiana adservato, una cum Versione Metrica aliisque Monumentis perve-
tustis. Nunc primum descripsit et edidit F. MICHEL. 8vo. 10s. 6d. net.
Chandler's Life of David. 8vo. 7s. 6d. net.
Faussett's Sacred Chronology. 8vo. 10s. 6d. net.
Hebrew and Chaldee
Notes on the Hebrew Text of the Book of Genesis.
By G. J. SPURRELL. Second edition. Crown 8vo. 12s. 6d.
Notes On Samuel. By S. R. DRIVER. [Out of print.]
Notes on the Hebrew Text of the Books of Kings. By
C. F. BURNEY. 8vo. 14s. net.
A Hebrew and English Lexicon of the Old Testament,
with an Appendix containing the Biblical Aramaic, based on the Thesaurus
and Lexicon of GESENIUS, by F. BROWN, S. R. DRIVER, and C. A. BRIGGS.
Small 4to. Cloth, 34s. net ; morocco back, 45s. net. The several Parts can
be supplied to complete sets.
Gesenius's Hebrew Grammar, as edited and enlarged by E.
KAUTZSCH. New edition in preparation.
A Treatise on the Use of the Tenses in Hebrew. By
S. R. DRIVER. Third edition. Crown 8vo. 7s. 6d. net.
A Commentary on the Book of Proverbs, attributed to
ABRAHAM IBN EZRA. Edited from a MS in the Bodleian Library by S. R.
DRIVER. Crown 8vo. Paper covers, 3s. 6d.
4
The Book of Tobit. A Chaldee Text, from a unique MS in the
Bodleian Library ; with other Rabbinical texts, English translations, and the
Itala. Edited by A. NEUBAUER. Crown 8vo. 6s.
EcclesiastlcUS (xxxix. 15 xlix. 11). The Hebrew, with early
versions and English translation, etc, edited by A. E. COWLEY and A. NEUBAUER.
With 2 facsimiles. 4to. 10s. 6d. net. Translation, see p. 67.
Facsimiles of the Fragments hitherto recovered of the
Book of Ecclesiasticus in Hebrew. 60 leaves in Collotype. 1 Is. net.
(Published jointly by the Oxford and Cambridge University Presses.)
The Psalms in Hebrew without points, stiff covers. 2s.
Accentuation of Psalms, Proverbs, and Job. By w. WICKES.
8vo. 5s.
Hebrew Prose Accentuation. By the same. 8vo. ios. 6d.
Lightfoot's Horae Hebraicae et Talmudicae. A new
Edition by R. GANDELL. 4 vols. 8vo. 1 Is.
Greek
VetUS Testamentum ex Versione Septuaginta Interpretum secundum
exemplar Vaticanum Romae editum. Accedit potior varietas Codicis Alex-
andrini. Tomi III. 18mo. 6s. each volume.
A Concordance to the Septuagint and other Greek Versions of
the O. T. (including the Apocryphal Books) ; by the late EDWIN HATCH and
H. A. REDPATH. With Supplement. ByH. A. REDPATH. Fasc. I, containing
a Concordance to the proper names occurring in the Septuagint ; Fasc. II,
containing a Concordance to Ecclesiasticus, other Addenda, and the Hebrew
Index to the whole work. Imperial 4to. Cloth in 3 vols. 8 -8s. net (or
Concordance, 2 vols., 6 17s. 6d. net. Supplement, 2 net). Parts II- VI,
21s. net each ; Supplements I and II, 16s. net each.
Origenis Hexaplorum quae SUperSUnt sive Veterum Inter-
pretum Graecorum in totum Vetus Testamentum Fragmenta. Edidit F. FIELD.
2 vols. 4to. 5 5s. net.
Essays in Biblical Greek. By EDWIN HATCH. 8vo. 10s. 6d. net.
The Book of Wisdom: the Greek Text, the Latin Vulgate, and the
Authorized English Version; with an introduction, critical apparatus, and
a commentary. By W. J. DEANE. 4to. 12s. 6d. net.
The Greek Versions of the Testaments of the Twelve
Patriarchs. Edited from nine MSS, with variants from other versions.
By R. H. CHARLES. 8vo. 18s. net.
Coptic
Tattam's Major and Minor Prophets. See p. 85.
5
The New Testament
The Parallel New Testament, Greek and English ; being
the Authorized Version, 1611 ; the Revised Version, 1881 ; and the Greek
Text followed in the Revised Version. 8vo. 9s. net.
The New Testament in Greek and English. Edited by
E. CARDWELL. 2 vols. 183T. Crown 8vo. 6s.
Greek
The Greek Testament, with the Readings adopted by the Revisers of
the Authorized Version. (1) Pica type. DemySvo. 10s. 6d. (9) Long Primer
type. With marginal references. Fcap 8vo. 4s. 6d. (3) The same, on
writing-paper, with wide margin, 15s. (4) The same, on India paper. 6s.
Novum Testamentum Graece. Accedunt parallela S. Scripturae
loca, etc. Ed. C.LLOYD. 18mo. 3s. On writing-paper, with wide margin, 7s. 6d.
Critical Appendices to the above, by W. SANDAY. Extra fcap 8vo. 3s. 6d.
NoVUm Testamentum Graece (ed. LLOYD), with Sanday's Appen-
dices. Cloth, 6s. ; paste grain, 7s. 6d. ; morocco, 10s. 6d.
Novum Testamentum Graece juxta Exemplar Millianum.
Fcap 8vo. 2s. 6d. On writing-paper, with wide margin, 7s. 6d.
Evangelia Sacra Graece. Fcap 8vo, limp. is. 6d.
NoVUm Testamentum Graece. Antiquissimorum Codicum Textus
in ordine parallelo dispositi. Edidit E. H. HANSELL. Tomi III. 8vo. 1 4s.
Athos Fragments of Codex H of the Pauline Epistles.
Photographed and deciphered by KIRSOPP LAKE. Full-size collotype
facsimiles, large 4to, in an envelope. 21s. net.
Athos Fragments of the Shepherd of Hernias. Photo-
graphed and transcribed by KIRSOPP LAKE. Full-size collotype facsimiles,
large 4to, in an envelope. 17s. 6d. net.
Outlines of the Textual Criticism of the New Testament.
By C. E. HAMMOND. Sixth edition. Crown 8vo. 4s. 6d.
Greswell's Harmonia Evangelica. Fifthedition. 8vo. 9s. ed. Pro-
legomena. 8vo.5s.net. Dissertations on the Harmony. 25s.net
Jones's Canon of the New Testament. 8vo. 3 vols. iss. net.
DiatCSSaron. Edited by J. WHITE. 3s. 6d.
Horae Synopticae. By Sir J. C. HAWKIXS, Bart. 8vo. 10s. 6d. net.
Dr. Sanday's Books
Sacred Sites of the Gospels, with sixty-three full-page illustrations,
maps, and plans. 8vo. 13s. 6d. net.
Criticism of the Fourth Gospel. 8vo. 7s. ed. net.
The Life of Christ in Recent Research. 8vo, with two
illustrations. 7s. 6d. net.
Presidential AddreSS to the Christian Section of the Congress for the
History of Religions, 1908. 8vo. Is. net.
6
The Logia
Two Lectures on the ' Sayings of Jesus', delivered at Oxford
in 1897, by W. LOCK and W. SANDAY. 8vo. Is. 6d. net.
The Oxyrhynchus Logia and the Apocryphal Gospels.
By C. TAYLOR. 8vo, paper covers, 2s. 6d. net.
The Oxyrhynchus Sayings of Jesus, found in 1903 ; with the
Sayings called ' Logia ', found in 1897. By C. TAYLOR. 8vo. 2s. net.
Published by Mr. Frowde for the Egypt Exploration Fund.
By B. P. GRENFELL and A. S. HUNT.
AOriA IHXOY, from an early Greek papyrus, with translation and com-
mentary. 8vo, stiff boards, with two collotypes, 2s. net; with two tone
blocks, 6d. net.
New Sayings of Jesus and Fragment of a Lost Gospel. With one Plate. Is. net.
Fragment of an Uncanonical Gospel from Oxyrhynchus. With one Plate. Is. net.
Coptic and Syriac
The Coptic Version of the New Testament, in the Northern
Dialect, otherwise called Memphitic and Bohairic. With introduction,
critical apparatus, and English translation. 8vo. Vols. I and II. The Gospels.
2 2s. net ; Vols. Ill and IV. The Epistles. 2 2s. net.
Tetraeuangelium Sanctum iuxta simplicem Syrorum versionem ad
fidem codicum, Massorae, editionum denuo recognitum. Lectionum supel-
lectilem quam conquisiverat P. E. PUSEY auxit, digessit, edidit G. H.
GWILLIAM. Accedunt capitulorum notatio, concordiarum tabulae, translatio
Latina, annotationes. Crown 4to. 2 2s. net.
Collatio Cod. Lewisiani Evangeliorum Syriacorum cum
Cod. Curetoniano, auctore A. BONUS. Demy 4to. 8s. 6d. net.
Latin
Old-Latin Biblical Texts : small 4to, stiff covers.
No. I. St. Matthew, from the St. Germain MS (g t ). Edited by J.
WORDSWORTH. 6s. net. No. II. Portions of St. Mark and St. Matthew,
from the Bobbio MS (k), etc. Edited by J. WORDSWORTH, W. SAND AY, and
H. J. WHITE. 1 Is. net. No. III. The Four Gospels, from the Munich
MS (q), now numbered Lat. 6224. Edited by H. J. WHITE. 12s. 6d. net.
No. IV. Portions of the Acts, of the Epistle of St. James, and of the
First Epistle of St. Peter, from the Bobbio Palimpsest (s), now numbered
Cod. 16 in the Imperial Library at Vienna. Edited by H. J. WHITE.
5s. net. No. V. The Gospels from the Codex Corbeiensis (ff x or ff 2 ) with
Fragments of the Catholic Epistles, Acts, and Apocalypse from the
Fleury Palimpsest (h). Edited by E. S. BUCHANAN. 12s. 6d. net.
Nouum Testamentum Latine, secundum Editionem Sancti Hiero-
nymi. Recensuit I. WORDSWORTH, Episcopus Sarisburiensis ; in operis
societatem adsumto H. I. WHITE. 4to. Part I (Gospels), 2 12s. 6d. (Some
of the fasciculi of Part I can still be obtained separately.) Part II, fasc. i
(Romans), in the press. Part III, fasc. i (Acts\ 12s. 6d.
Notes on the Early History of the Vulgate Gospels. By
Dom JOHN CHAPMAN, O.S.B. 8vo. 16s.net.
Gothic
Sacrorum Evangeliorum Versio Gothica cum interpretatione
Latina et annotationibus ERICI BENZELII edidit EDWARDUS LYE (1750). Large
4to. 1 10s. net.
7
The Fathers of the Church and
Ecclesiastical History
Editions with Latin Commentaries
Catenae GraeCOrum Patrum in Novum Testamentum edidit J. A.
CRAMER. Tomi VIII. 8vo. 2 8s. net.
ClementlS Alexandrini Opera, ex rec. GUIL. DINDORFII. Tomi IV. 8vo.
3 net.
Cyrilli Archieplscopi Alexandrini in XII Prophetas edidit P. E. PUSEY.
Tomi II. 8vo. 2 2s.
In D. Joannis Evangeliura. Accedunt Fragmenta Varia. Edidit post
Aubertum P. E. PUSEY. Tomi III. 8vo. 2 5s.
Commentarii in Lucae Evangelium quae supersunt Syriace edidit
R. PAYNE SMITH. 4to. 1 2s. Translation, 2 vols. 8vo. 14s.
Ephraemi Syri, Rabulae, Balaei aliorumque Opera Selecta. See p. 85.
Eusebii Opera recensuit T. GAISFORD.
Evangelicae Praeparationis Libri XV. Tomi IV. 8vo. 42s. net.
Evangelicae Demonstrationis Libri X. Tomi II. 8vo. 15s.
Contra Hieroclem et Marcellum Libri. 8vo. 7s.
Annotationes Variorum. Tomi II. 8vo. 17s.
Canon MuratorianuS. Edited, with notes and facsimile, by S. P.
TREGELLES. 4to. 10s. 6d.
Historia Ecclesiastica, ex rec. H. VALESII. 8vo. 4s.
.T 1. Josephl de bello Judaico Libri Septem recensuit E. CARDWELL.
Tomi II. 8vo. 17s.
Philosophumena; sive omnium Haeresium Refutatio e Codice
Parisino nunc primum edidit EMMANUEL MILLER. 8vo. 10s.
Patrum ApOStolicoriim dementis Romani, Ignatii, Polycarpi, quae
supersunt edidit G. JACOBSON. Tomi II. Fourth edition. 8vo. 1 Is.
Reliquiae Sacrae secundi tertiique saeculi recensuit M. J. ROUTH.
Tomi V. Second edition, 1846. 8vo. 1 5s. net.
Scriptorum Ecclesiasticorum Opuscula recensuit M. J. ROUTH.
Tomi II. Third edition, 1858. 8vo. 10s.
Socratis Scholastic! Historia Ecclesiastica Gr. et Lat. edidit R. HUSSEY.
Tomi III. 1853. 8vo. 15s. net.
Historia Ecclesiastica edidit R. HUSSEY. Tomi III. 8vo. 15s. net.
Theodoretl Ecclesiasticae Historiae Libri V rec. T. GAISFORD. 8vo. 7s. 6d. net.
Graecarum Affectionum Curatio rec. T. GAISFORD. 8vo, 7s. 6d.
Notitia Scriptorum SS. Patrum. By J. G. BOWLING. 8vo.
7s. 6d. net.
8
Editions with English Commentaries
or Introductions
St. AthanaSlUS. Orations against the Arians. With an account of his
Life by W. BRIGHT. Crown 8vo. 9s.
Historical Writings, according to the Benedictine Text.
With an introduction by W. BRIGHT. Crown 8vo.
10s. 6d.
St. AugUStine. Select Anti-Pelagian Treatises, and the Acts of the
Second Council of Orange. With introduction by W. BRIGHT. Crown 8vo.
[Out of print.]
St. Basil : on the Holy Spirit. Revised text, with notes and introduction,
by C. F. H. JOHNSTON. Crown 8vo. 7s. 6d.
Barnabas, Editio Princeps of the Epistle of, by Archbishop Ussher, as
printed at Oxford, A. D. 1642. With a dissertation by J. H. BACKHOUSE.
Small 4to. 3s. 6d.
Canons of the First Four General Councils of Nicaea, Con-
stantinople, Ephesus, and Chalcedon. With notes by W. BRIGHT. Second
edition. Crown 8vo. 7s. 6d.
Eusebius' Ecclesiastical History, according to Burton's text, with
introduction by W. BRIGHT. Second edition. Crown 8vo. 8s. 6d.
Eusebii Pamphili Evangelicae Praeparationis Libri XV.
Revised text edited, with introduction, notes, English translation, and indices,
by E. H. GIFFORD. 4 vols. [Vols. I, II, text, with critical notes. Vol. Ill,
in two parts, translation. Vol. IV, notes and indices.] 8vo. 5 5s. net.
(Vol. Ill, divided into two parts, containing the translation, 1 5s. net.)
The Bodleian Manuscript of Jerome's Version of the
Chronicles Of Eusebius, reproduced in collotype, with an intro-
duction by J. K. FOTHERINGHAM. 4to, buckram. 2 10s. net.
John of EpheSUS. Seep. 85. Translation, by R.PAYNE SMITH. 8vo. 10s.
Philo : about the Contemplative Life ; or, the Fourth Book of
the Treatise concerning Virtues. Edited, with a defence of its genuineness,
by F. C. CONYBEARE. With a facsimile. 8vo. 14s. net.
Socrates' Ecclesiastical History, according to Hussey's Text, with
introduction by W. BRIGHT. Second edition. Crown 8vo. 7s. 6d.
Tertulliani Apologeticus adversus Gentes pro Christianis. Edited by
T. H. BINDLEY. Crown 8vo. 7s. 6d. net.
De Praescriptione Haereticorum : ad Martyras : ad Scapulara.
Edited by T. H. BINDLEY. Crown 8vo. 5s. net.
Works of the English Divines. 8vo
Sixteenth, seventeenth, eighteenth and early
nineteenth centuries
Editions of Hooker and Butler
Hooker's Works, with Walton's Life, arranged by JOHN KEBLE. Seventh
edition, revised by R. W. CHURCH and F. PAGET. 3 vols. 12s. each. [Vol. II
contains the Fifth Book.]
Introduction to Hooker's Ecclesiastical Polity, Book V.
By F. PAGET. Second edition. 5s. net.
The Text, as arranged by J. KEBLE. 2 vols. 11s.
The Works Of Bishop Butler. By W. E. GLADSTONE. 2 vols.
14s. each. Crown 8vo, Vol. I, Analogy, 5s. 6d. ; Vol. II, Sermons, 5s.
Studies subsidiary to the AVorks of Bishop Butler.
Uniform with the above. 10s. 6d. Crown 8vo, 4s. 6d.
PEARsoN'sExposmoNOFTHECREED. Revised by E. Burton. Sixth edition. 10s. 6d.
MINOR THEOLOGICAL WORKS. Edited by E. Churton. 2 vols. 10s.
ENCHIRIDION THEOLOGICUM ANTI-ROMANUM.
I. JEREMY TAYLOR'S Dissuasive from Popery, and Real Presence. 8s.
II. BARROW'S Supremacy of the Pope, and Unity of the Church. 7s. 6d.
III. Tracts by WAKE, PATRICK, STILLINGFLEET, CLAGETT, and others. 11s.
ADDISON'S EVIDENCES. 3s. 6d. net.
ALLIX'S WORKS. 4 vols. 5s. each. BENTLEY'S SERMONS. 4s.
BISCOE'S HISTORY OF THE ACTS. 9s. 6d.
BRAGG E'S WORKS. 5 vols. 1 12s. 6d.
BULL'S WORKS, with NELSON'S Life. Ed. by E. Burton. 8 vols. 2 9s.
BURNET'S EXPOSITION OF THE XXXIX ARTICLES. 7s.
BUTLER'S WORKS, 1849. 2 vols. Sermons. 5s. 6d. Analogy. 5s. 6d.
CLERGYMAN'S INSTRUCTOR. Sixth edition. 6s. 6d.
COMBER'S WORKS. 7 vols. 1 11s. 6d.
FELL'S PARAPHRASE ON ST. PAUL'S EPISTLES. 7s.
FLEETWOOD'S WORKS. 3 vols. 1 Is. 6d.
HALL'S WORKS. Edited by P. Wynter. 10 vols. 3 3s.
HAMMOND'S PARAPHRASE ON THE NEW TESTAMENT. 4 vols. 20s.
PARAPHRASE ON THE PSALMS. 4 vols. 20s.
HORBERY'S WORKS. 2 vols. 8s. HOOPER'S WORKS. 2 vols. 8s.
JACKSON'S (DR. THOMAS) WORKS. 12 vols. 3 6s.
JEWEL'S WORKS. Edited by R. W. Jelf. 8 vols. 1 10s.
LESLIE'S WORKS. 7 vols. 40s.
LEWIS' (JOHN) LIFE OF WICLIF. 5s. 6d. LIFE OF PECOCK. 3s. 6d.
LEWIS' (THOMAS) ORIGINES HEBRAICAE. 3 vols. 16s. 6d.
NEWCOMBE'S OBSERVATIONS. 6s. net.
PATRICK'S THEOLOGICAL WORKS. 9 vols. 1 Is.
SANDERSON'S WORKS. Edited by W. Jacobson. 6 vols. 1 10s.
SCOTT'S WORKS. 6 vols. 1 7s. SMALRIDGE'S SERMONS. 2 vols. 8s.
SHERLOCK'S DISCOURSES. 4 vols. 42s. net.
STILLINGFLEET'S ORIGINES SACRAE. 2 vols. 9s.
GROUNDS OF PROTESTANT RELIGION. 2 vols. 10s.
STANHOPE'S PARAPHRASE. 2 vols. 10s. TAVERNER'S POSTILS. 5s. 6d.
WALL'S HISTORY OF INFANT BAPTISM. By H. Cotton. 2 vols. 1 Is.
WATERLAND'S WORKS, with Life by Van Mildert. 6 vols. 2 11s.
DOCTRINE OF THE EUCHARIST. 3rd ed. Cr. 8vo. 6s. 6d.
WHEATLEY'S ILLUSTRATION OF THE BOOK OF COMMON PRAYER. 5s.
10
Early Ecclesiastical History
The New Testament in the Apostolic Fathers. By a Com-
mittee of the Oxford Society of Historical Theology. 8vo. 6s. net.
The Origins of Christianity. By C. BIGG. Edited by T. B. STRONG.
8vo. 12s. 6d. net.
The Church's Task under the Empire, with preface, notes,
and excursus, by C. BIGG. 8vo. 5s. net.
Bingham's Antiquities of the Christian Church, and other Works.
10 vols. 8vo. 3 3s.
The Church in the Apostolic Age. By W. W. SHIRLEY. Second
edition. Fcap 8vo. 3s. 6d.
Harmonia Symbolica: Creeds of the Western Church. By C.
HEURTLEY. 8vo. 6s. 6d.
A Critical Dissertation on the Athanasian Creed. By
G. D. W. OMMANXEY. 8vo. 16s.
Ecclesiae Occidentalis Monumenta luris Antiquissima :
Canonum et Conciliorum Graecorum Interpretationes Latinae. Edidit
C. H. TURNER. 4to, stiff covers. Tom. I, Fasc. I, pars I, 10s. 6d. net; pars
II, 21s. net. Tom. II, pars I, 18s. net.
The Key Of Truth : being a Manual of the Paulician Church of
Armenia. By F. C. CONYBEARE. 8vo. 15s. net.
Baptism and Christian Archaeology, being an offprint of studia
Biblica, Vol. V. By C. F. ROGERS. 8vo. 5s. net.
Ecclesiastical History of Britain, etc
Sources
Vita S. Columbae. Edited, with introduction, notes,
and glossary, by J. T. FOWLER. Crown 8vo, leather back. 8s. 6d. net.
With translation, 9s. 6d. net.
Baedae Opera Historica. Edited by C. PLUMMER. Two volumes.
Crown 8vo. 21s. net.
Councils and Ecclesiastical Documents relating to Great
Britain and Ireland. Edited after Spelman and Wilkins, by A. W. HADDAN
and W. STUBBS. Medium 8vo. Vols. I-III, 3 13s. 6d. net. Also Vol. II (Parts
I and II) and Vol. Ill, separately, 14s. net per volume.
Nova Legenda Angliae, as collected by John of Tynemouth and
others, and first printed 1516. Re-edited 1902 by C. HORSTMAN. 2 vols.
8vo. 1 16s. net.
Wyclif. A Catalogue of the Works. By W. W. SHIRLEY. 8vo. 3s. 6d.
Select English Works. By T. ARNOLD. 3 vols. 8vo. 1 Is. net.
Trialogus. First edited by G. LECHLER. 8vo. 7s.
Cranmer's Works. Collected by H. JENKYNS. 4 vols. 8vo. 1 10s.
' Cranmer's ' Catechism with the Latin Original. Edited by
EDWARD BURTOX (1829). 8vo, with woodcuts. 7s. 6d. net.
n
Records of the Reformation. The Divorce, 1527-1533. Mostly
now for the first time printed. Collected and arranged by N. POCOCK. 2 vols.
1 16s.
Primers put forth in the reign of Henry VIII. 8vo. 5s.
The Reformation of Ecclesiastical Laws, as attempted in the
reigns of Henry VIII, Edward VI, and Elizabeth. Edited by E. CARD WELL.
8vo. 6s. 6d.
Conferences on the Book of Common Prayer from 1551 to
1690. Edited by E. CARDAVELL. Third edition. 8vo. 7s. 6d. net.
Documentary Annals of the Reformed Church of
England; Injunctions, Declarations, Orders, Articles of Inquiry, etc, from
1546 to 1716. Collected by E. CARDWELL. 2 vols. 8vo. 25s.net.
Formularies of Faith set forth by the King's authority during
Henry VIII's reign. 8vo. 7s.
Homilies appointed to be read in Churches. By J. GRIFFITHS. 8vo. 7s. 6d.
Hamilton's Catechism, 1552. Edited, with introduction and
glossary, by T. G. LAW. With a Preface by W. E. GLADSTONE. 8vo. 12s. 6d.
Noelli CatechisniUS sive prima institutiodisciplinaquePietatisChristianae
Latine explicata. Editio nova cura G. JACOBSON. 8vo. 5s. 6d.
Sylloge Confessionum sub tempus Reformandae Ecclesiae edit. Subjic.
Catechismus Heidelbergensis et Canones Synodi Dordrecht. 8vo. 8s.
Histories written in the seventeenth (or early
eighteenth) and edited in the nineteenth century
Stillingfleet's Origines Britannicae, with LLOYD'S Historical
Account of Church Government. Edited by T. P. PANTIN. 2 vols. 8vo. 10s.
Inett's Origines Anglicanae (in continuation of Stillingfleet). Edited
by J. GRIFFITHS. 1855. 3 vols. 8vo. 15s.
Fuller's Church History of Britain. Edited by J. s. BREWER.
1845. 6 vols. 8vo. 2 12s. 6d. net.
Le Neve's Fasti Ecclesiae Anglicanae. Corrected and con-
tinued from 1715 to 1853 by T. D. HARDY. 3 vols. 8vo. 1 10s. net.
Strype's Memorials of Cranmer. 2 vols. 8vo. us. net. Life of
Aylmer. 8vo. 5s. 6d. net. Life of Whitgift. 3 vols. 8vo. 16s. 6d. net.
General Index. 2 vols. 8vo. lls.net.
Burnet's History of the Reformation. Revised by N. POCOCK.
7 vols. 8vo. 1 10s.
Prideaux's Connection of Sacred and Profane History. 2 vols. 8vo.
10s. Shuckford's Continuation, 10s.
Gibson's SynoduS Anglicana. Edited by E. CARDWELL. 1854.
8vo. 6s.
12
Recent Works in English Ecclesiastical History
History of the Church of England from the abolition of the
Roman Jurisdiction. By W. R. DIXON. 3rd edition. 6 vols. 8vo. 16s. per vol.
Chapters of Early English Church History. By w. BRIGHT.
Third edition. With a map. 8vo. 12s.
Registrum Sacrum Anglicanum : an attempt to exhibit the course
of Episcopal Succession in England. By W. STUBBS. 2nd ed. 4to. 10s. 6d.
The Elizabethan Clergy and the Settlement of Religion, 1558-1564.
By HENRY GEE. With illustrative documents and lists. 8vo. 10s. 6d. net.
Liturgiology
Liturgies, Eastern and Western. Vol. I. Eastern Liturgies.
Edited, with introductions and appendices, by F. E. BRIGHTMAN, on the basis
of a work by C. E. HAMMOND. 8vo. 1 Is. net.
Rituale Armenorum I the Administration of the Sacraments and the
Breviary Rites of the Armenian Church, with the Greek Rites of Baptism
and Epiphany. Edited by F. C. CONYBEARE; with the East Syrian Epiphany
Rites, translated by A. J. MACLEAN. 8vo. 21s. net.
CardwelTs Two Books of Common Prayer. Ed. 3. 8vo. 7s.net.
Gelasian Sacramentaiy, Liber Sacramentorum Romanae Ecclesiae.
Edited by H. A. WILSON. Medium 8vo. 18s. net.
Leofric Missal, with some account of the Red Book of Derby, the Missal
of Robert of Jumieges, etc. Edited by F. E. WARREN. 4to. 1 10s. net.
Ancient Liturgy of the Church of England, according to the
Uses of Sarum, York, Hereford, and Bangor, and the Roman Liturgy
arranged in parallel columns. By W. MASKELL. 8vo. 15s. net.
Monumenta Ritualia Ecclesiae Anglicanae : the occasional
Offices of the Church of England according to the old Use of Salisbury, the
Prymer in English, and other prayers and forms, with dissertations and
notes. By the same. Second edition. Three volumes. 8vo. 2 10s. net.
The Liturgy and Ritual of the Celtic Church. By F. E.
WAHREN. 8vo. 16s. net.
Sharp on the Rubric. 8vo. 6s/ net.
Helps to the Study of the Book of Common Prayer. By
W. R. W. STEPHENS. Crown 8vo. Cloth, 2s. 6d. net ; also in leather bindings.
Printed on Oxford India paper and bound with the Prayer Book, from 11s. 6d.
The Oxford Hymn Book
Music Edition. Crown 8vo, Ss. 6d. net ; gilt edges, 4s. net ; India
paper, 5s. net. Words Only. Crown 8vo, Is. 6d. net ; gilt edges,
2s. net ; India paper, 3s. net. 32mo, cut flush, 6d. net ; cloth boards; 9d. net ;
India paper, 2s. net.
13
PHILOSOPHY
Ancient Philosophy
(For editions, translations, &c., see pages 44-47)
Greek Theories of Elementary Cognition from Aicmaeon to
Aristotle. By J. I. BEARE. 12s. 6d. net
Plato's Doctrine Of Ideas. By J. A. STEWART. 8vo. 6s. net.
Mediaeval and Modern Philosophy
Opera hactenus inedita Rogeri Baconi. Edited by ROBERT
STEELE. 8vo. Fasc. I, De Viciis Contractis in Studio Theologie. os. net.
Fasc. II, Communium Naturalium Lib. I. 10s. 6d. net.
loannis Saresberiensis Policratici Libri vm recognovit com-
mentario etc instruxit C. C. J. WEBB. Two volumes. 8vo. 36s. net.
Bacon's NoVUm Organum, edited, with introduction, notes, etc,
by T. FOWLER. Second edition. 8vo. 15s.
NoVUm Organum, edited by G. W. KITCHIN. 8vo. 9s. 6d.
Bentham's Introduction to the Principles of Morals and
Legislation. Crown 8vo. 6s. 6d.
The Works of George Berkeley, formerly Bishop of Cloyne. With
prefaces, annotations, appendices, and an account of his Life and Philosophy,
by A. C. FRASER. New edition (1901) in crown 8vo. Four volumes. 1 4s.
Some copies of the 8vo edition of the Life are still on sale, price 16s.
Selections from Berkeley, with introduction and notes, for the use of
Students. By the same Editor. Fifth edition. Crown 8vo. 7s. 6d.
The Cambridge PlatonistS : being selections from their Writings,
with introduction by E. T. CAMPAGNAC. Crown 8vo. 6s. 6d. net.
Leibniz's Monadology and other Philosophical Writings, translated,
with introduction and notes, by R. LATTA. Crown 8vo. 8s. 6d.
Locke's Essay. Collated and annotated with prolegomena, biographical,
critical, and historical, by A. C. FRASER. Two volumes. 8vo. 1 12s.
Locke's Conduct of the Understanding. Edited byT. FOWLER.
Extra fcap 8vo. 2s. 6d.
A Study in the Ethics of Spinoza. By H. H. JOACHIM. 8vo.
10s. 6d. net.
Hume's Treatise of Human Nature. Edited by L. A. SELBY-
BIGGE. Second edition. Crown 8vo. 6s. net.
Hume's Enquiries. Edited by L. A. SELBY-BIGGE. Crown 8vo. Second
edition. 6s. net.
British Moralists, being Selections from writers principally of the
eighteenth century. Edited by L. A. SELBY-BIGGE. Two volumes. Crown
8vo. 12s. net. Uniform with Hume's and Berkeley's Works.
Butler's Works, edited by W. E. GLADSTONE. Two volumes. Medium
8vo or Crown 8vo Vol. I (Analogy) 14s. or 5s. 6d, Vol. II (Sermons) 14s. or os.
The Optimism of Butler's Analogy. The Romanes Lecture,
1908. By HENRY SCOTT-HOLLAND. 2s. net.
14
Recent Philosophy
Kant's Theory Of Knowledge. By H. A.PRICHARD. 8vo. 6s. 6d. net.
The Logic of Hegel, translated from the Encyclopaedia of the Philo-
sophical Sciences, with Prolegomena, by W. WALLACE. Second edition.
Two volumes. Crown 8vo. 10s. 6d. each.
Hegel's Philosophy of Mind, translated, with five introductory essays,
by W. WALLACE. Crown 8vo. 10s. 6d.
Lotze's Logic, in Three Books of Thought, of Investigation, and of
Knowledge. Translated by B. BOSANQUET. Seconded. 2 vols. Cr. 8vo. 12s.
Lotze's Metaphysic, in Three Books Ontology, Cosmology, and
Psychology. Translated by B. BOSANUUET. Seconded. 2 vols. Cr. 8vo. 12s.
BluntSChli's Theory Of the State. Translated from the sixth
German edition. Third edition, 1901. Crown 8vo, half-bound, 8s. 6d.
Green's Prolegomena to Ethics. Edited by A. C.BRADLEY. Fifth
edition, 1906. With a Preface by E. CAIRD. Crown 8vo. 6s. net.
Types Of Ethical Theory, by J. MARTINEAU. Third edition. Two
volumes. Crown 8vo. 15s.
A Study of Religion : its Sources and Contents. By the same
author. Second edition. Two volumes. Crown 8vo. 15s.
The Principles Of Morals. By T. FOWLER and J. M. WILSON. 8vo.
14s. Also, separately Part I, 3s. 6d. Part II, 10s. 6d.
Logic ; or, The Morphology of Knowledge. By B. BOSANQUET.
Two volumes. 8vo. 1 Is. net.
Lectures and Essays on Natural Theology and Ethics.
By W. WALLACE. Edited by E. CAIRD. With portrait. 8vo. 12s. 6d.
Studies in History and Jurisprudence. By Rt. Hon. J. BRYCE.
1901. 2 vols. 8vo. 1 5s. net.
The Theory Of Good and Evil. By H. RASHDALL. 8vo. 2 vols.
14s. net.
The Herbert Spencer Lectures. 8vo. 1905, by FREDERIC HARRISON.
2s.net. 1906. The Voluntary 1st Creed. By AUBERON HERBERT. 2s.net. 1907.
Probability, the Foundation of Eugenics. By FRANCIS GALTON. Is. net.
1908. Individualism and After. By BENJAMIN KIDD. Is. net.
An Introduction tO Logic. By H.W. B. JOSEPH. 8vo. 9s. 6d. net.
Essay On Truth. By H. H. JOACHIM. 8vo. 6s. net.
The Ethical Aspects Of Evolution. By W. BENETT. 6s. net.
Elementary Logic
The Elements of Deductive Logic. By T. FOWLER. Tenth
edition, with a collection of examples. Extra fcap 8vo. 3s. 6d.
The Elements of Inductive Logic. By the same. Sixth edition.
Extra fcap 8vo. 6s. In one volume with Deductive Logic, 7s. 6d.
15
ORIENTAL LANGUAGES
See also Anecdota Oxoniensia, pp. 98, 99.
Sacred Books of the East
Translated by various Scholars, and edited by the late
Right Hon. F. MAX MULLER. Forty-nine volumes
An Index Volume (Vol. L) is in the press.
Sacred Books of India. Brahmanism
Twenty-one volumes
Vedic Hymns, Part I, translated by F. MAX MULLER. Part II, translated
by H. OLDENBERG. Two volumes (XXXII, XLVI). 18s. 6d. net and 14s. net.
HymnS Of the Atharva-Veda, translated by M. BLOOMFIELD.
One volume (XLII). 21s. net.
The xS'atapatha-BrahmaTZa, translated by JULIUS EGGELING.
Five volumes (XII, XXVI, XLI, XLIII), 12s. 6d. net each ;
(XLIV), 18s. 6d. net.
The Gn'hya- Sutras, translated by H. OLDENBERG.
^ Two volumes (XXIX, XXX), each 12s. 6d. net.
The Upanishads, translated by F. MAX MULLER.
Two volumes (I, XV Second edition), each 10s. 6d. net.
The Bhagavadglta, translated by KASHINATH TRIMBAK TELANG.
One volume (VIII), with the Sanatsu^atiya and Anugita. 10s. 6d. net.
The Vedanta- Sutras, with Ankara's Commentary, by G. THIBAUT.
Two volumes (XXXIV, XXXVIII), each 12s. 6d. net.
The third volume (XLVIII) with Ramanu^a's ribhashya. 25s. net.
Vol. XXXI V Part I of the Vedanta-Sutras is temporarily out of print.
The Sacred LaWS of the AryaS, translated by G. BUHLER.
Two volumes (II (Second edition) and XIV), each 10s. 6d. net.
The Institutes Of Vishmi, translated by JULIUS JOLLY.
One volume (VII). 10s. 6d. net.
Manu, translated by GEORG BUHLER. One volume (XXV). 21s. net.
The Minor Law-books, translated by JULIUS JOLLY.
* One volume (XXXIII, Narada, BHhaspati). 10s. 6d. net.
Jainism and Buddhism. Twelve volumes
The Gaina- Sutras, translated from Prakrit by H. JACOBI.
Two volumes (XXII, XLV). 10s. 6d. net and 12s. 6d. net.
The Saddharma-pUT^arika, translated from Sanskrit by H. KERN.
One volume (XXI). 12s. 6d. net.
Mahayana Texts, by E. B. COWELL, F. MAX MULLER, and J. TAKAKUSU.
One volume (XLIX). From the Sanskrit. 12s. 6d. net.
The Dhammapada and Sutta-Nipata, translated by F. MAX
MULLER and V. FAUSBOLL. One vol. (X, Ed. 2). From the Pali. 10s.6d.net.
Buddhist SuttaS, translated from the Pali by T. W. RHYS DAVIDS.
One volume (XI). 10s. 6d. net.
16
RETURN TO the circulation desk of any
University of California Library
or to the
NORTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY
Bldg. 400, Richmond Field Station
University of California
Richmond, CA 94804-4698
ALL BOOKS MAY BE RECALLED AFTER 7 DAYS
2-month loans may be renewed by calling
(510)642-6753
1-year loans may be recharged by bringing books
to NRLF
Renewals and recharges may be made 4 days
prior to due date
DUE AS STAMPED BELOW
JAN 3 01995
SEP 5 1995
OCTi
FEB082
20,000 (4/94)
_J
YC 101567
240097
H3